TEC Ma-1595 program manual - 4S Business Systems Inc.

TEC Electronic Cash Register 

MA-1595 SERIES 

Programming Manual 

Original Dec., 2003 

(Revised Mar., 2007) 

Document No. EO3-11103B 

PRINTED IN JAPAN

CAUTION! 

1. This manual may not be copied in whole or in part without prior written permission of TOSHIBA 

TEC. 

2. The contents of this manual may be changed without notification. 

3. Please refer to your local Authorised Service representative with regard to any queries you may 

have in this manual. 

Copyright © 2003 

by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION 

All Rights Reserved 

570 Ohito, Izunokuni-shi, Shizuoka-ken, JAPAN

1. STAND-ALONE LEVEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

EO3-11103B 


(Revision Date: May 31, 2007) 

1. INTRODUCTION----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1- 1 

1.1 Main Features----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1- 1 

1.2 Description of Model Number --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1- 2 

2. SPECIFICATIONS -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2- 1 

3. CAPACITIES --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3- 1 

3.1 Indexing Capacities---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3- 1 

3.2 Basic Memory Capacities -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3- 2 

3.3 Financial Memory ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3- 4 

3.4 Cashier Memory ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-10 

3.5 Others -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-10 

3.6 Memory Balance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-11 

4. SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURE --------------------------------------------------------------4- 1 

5. RAM CLEAR, DATA CLEAR, STATUS CLEAR-----------------------------------------------5- 1 

5.1 RAM Clear --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5- 1 

5.2 DATA Clear -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5- 2 

5.3 STATUS Clear ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5- 3 

6. TERMINAL FILE PROGRAMMING----------------------------------------------------------------6- 1 

6.1 Basic Key Functions and Keyboard Variations in Programming Operations -------------- 6- 3 

6.2 Character Entries------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6- 5 

6.3 Condition Required for Programming Operations------------------------------------------------- 6- 9 

6.4 SFKC (Selective Function Key Code) Programming-------------------------------------------- 6- 10 

6.5 RAM Allocation Setting (Submode 79) ------------------------------------------------------------- 6- 17 

6.6 Table Clear (Submode 91)----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6- 19 

6.7 System Option Programming (Submode 11 or 18)---------------------------------------------- 6- 20 

6.8 Store Name Message, Commercial Message and Footer Logo Message 

Programming (Submode 1)---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6- 74 

6.9 Cashier Code and Name Programming (Submode 2)------------------------------------------ 6- 77 

6.10 Department Table Programming (Submode 3)--------------------------------------------------- 6- 79 

6.11 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)------------------------------------------------------------- 6- 89 

6.12 Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5)--------------------------------------------------------- 6-104 

6.13 Date Setting or Adjustment (Submode 6)--------------------------------------------------------- 6-104 

6.14 Hourly Range Table Setting (Submode 7) (for report purposes)---------------------------- 6-105 

6.15 Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys (Submode 8)----------------------------------------- 6-106 

6.16 Financial Report Item Name Programming (Submode 9)------------------------------------- 6-107 

6.17 Print Line Item Name Programming (Submode 10) -------------------------------------------- 6-114 

6.18 Vat or Add-on Tax Rate Setting (Submode 12) (QP model) --------------------------------- 6-118 

6.19 Non-Taxable Amount Limit Setting (Submode 12) (US model) ----------------------------- 6-119 

6.20 Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13)----------------------------------------------- 6-120 

6.21 Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14)----------------------------------------------- 6-121 

6.22 Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting (Submode 15) -------------- 6-122 

6.23 Display Upper-Row Message Programming (Submode 17) --------------------------------- 6-124 

6.24 Combination Report Table Programming (Submode 19) ------------------------------------- 6-127 

6.25 Salesperson Code and Name Programming (Submode 20)--------------------------------- 6-129 

Page

EO3-11103B 



Page 

6.26 Credit Card Company ID Code and Name Programming (Submode 21)----------------- 6-131 

6.27 Endorsement (or France Cheque Print) Message Programming (Submode 22) ------- 6-133 

6.28 Key Status Programming (Submode 23)---------------------------------------------------------- 6-134 

6.29 PLU Stock Loading or Changing (Submode 24) (QP model only)-------------------------- 6-141 

6.30 Link-PLU Table Programming (Submode 25)---------------------------------------------------- 6-142 

6.31 Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26)--------------------------------- 6-143 

6.32 PLU Preset-Code Key Setting (Submode 27) --------------------------------------------------- 6-145 

6.33 Report Item Print/Non-Print Setting (Submode 28)--------------------------------------------- 6-148 

6.34 PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29) ------------------------------------------------ 6-155 

6.35 Comment Message Programming (Submode 30) (US model only)------------------------ 6-156 

6.36 Display Message Programming (Submode 31) ------------------------------------------------- 6-157 

6.37 Error Message Programming (Submode 32)----------------------------------------------------- 6-159 

6.38 Media Pick-up Warning Setting (Submode 33) -------------------------------------------------- 6-162 

6.39 Function Key (Combination Key) Setting (Submode 34)-------------------------------------- 6-163 

6.40 Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting (Submode 35) --------------------------------- 6-164 

6.41 Special Rounding Process Setting, 1-digit type (Submode 36) (QP model only)------- 6-165 

6.42 Special Rounding Process Setting, 2-digit type (Submode 37) (QP model only)------- 6-166 

6.43 Drawer warning Time Setting (Submode 38) ---------------------------------------------------- 6-167 

6.44 Read/Reset Report Name Programming (Submode 39)-------------------------------------- 6-168 

6.45 PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting (Submode 40) 

(US model only) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-171 

6.46 Age Limit Setting (Submode 41) (US model only) ---------------------------------------------- 6-172 

6.47 Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting, 1-digit type (Submode 48) ---------------- 6-173 

6.48 Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting, 2-digit type (Submode 49) ---------------- 6-174 

6.49 Credit Card No. Negative Check File Programming (Submode 54) (US model only) - 6-175 

6.50 Barcode Individual Flag Type Designation (Submode 55) (US model only) ------------- 6-176 

6.51 Store ID Setting (Submode 56) (QP model only) ----------------------------------------------- 6-177 

6.52 PLU Price Setting or Changing (Submode 60) (QP model only)---------------------------- 6-177 

6.53 PLU Addition to PLU Additional Table File (Submode 64)------------------------------------ 6-178 

6.54 EFT Key Status Programming (Submode 65) (US model only)----------------------------- 6-179 

6.55 EFT Information Setting 1 (Submode 66) (US model only) ---------------------------------- 6-180 

6.56 EFT Information Setting 2 (Submode 67) (US model only) ---------------------------------- 6-182 

6.57 PC Transmission Information Setting (Submode 68) ------------------------------------------ 6-182 

6.58 COM Port and R/J Printer Setting (Submode 71)----------------------------------------------- 6-183 

6.59 PLU File Sequential Sort Check (Submode 93)------------------------------------------------- 6-185 

6.60 PLU File Sequential Delete (Submode 94) ------------------------------------------------------- 6-185 

6.61 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing--------------------------------------------------- 6-186 

6.62 PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing, Whole Package Quantity Changing 

(US model)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-187 

6.63 PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing (QP model) -------------------------------------------- 6-188 

6.64 %+ and %- Preset Rate Setting --------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-189 

6.65 Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 to SI4) 

(SI3 and SI4: US model only) ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-190 

6.66 Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting -------------------------------------------------------- 6-192 

6.67 HAUS BON Discount Rate Setting (QP model only)------------------------------------------- 6-194 

6.68 TAX Table Setting (US model only) ---------------------------------------------------------------- 6-195 

6.69 Store/Register No. Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-198 

7. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA ----------------------------------------------------7- 1 

7.1 Verification of Programmed Data ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 7- 1 

7.2 Tax Calculation Test (US model only) ---------------------------------------------------------------- 7- 2

1. INTRODUCTION EO3-11103B 

1. INTRODUCTION 

1- 1 

1.1 Main Features 

This programming manual is provided for salespersons, field engineers and other personal as 

supplementary manual for TOSHIBA TEC Electronic Cash Register MA-1595 series. 

This manual is comprised of two parts: Stand-alone level and Master-Satellite level. The Master- 

Satellite level handles addition to and changes of the Stand-alone level only. Please be sure to read 

the Stand-alone level first. 

1.1 Main Features 

< Hardware > 

• Provides machine containing expendability and interface boards. 

• High speed processing using a RISC-CPU. 

• The ECR is equipped with the 1MB memory as standard, which can be expanded up to 4MB. 

• This ECR has LAN interface. 

• This ECR has three RS-232C ports. It can be connected to a Scanner, Remote Slip Printer, Scale, 

or EFT (US model). 

< Software > 

• The PLU/Cashier/Check Track/Data Capture functions can be programmed in the allocation system. 

• Files for up to 65,000 PLUs and 99 cashiers can be controlled. (when Expansion Memory is 

installed) 

• File backup function by connecting the backup master terminal. 

• Cashier management on the master terminal (Floating Cashier System). 

• PLU addition function. 

• Transaction data capture function configured by connecting the PC. 

• Cashier training function.



1.2 Description of Model Number 

1.2 Description of Model Number 

1.2.1 Terminal Model Number 

M A - 1 5 9 5 - - - - 

1.2.2 Field Option Model Name 

Series 

1: US type 

2: QP type 

1- 2 

Country Code 

(US, QP, etc.) 

Drawer Type 

S: SP drawer 

G: ESP drawer 

RoHS Compliance 

Blank: Non-RoHS 

compliant model 

R: RoHS compliant 

model 

Receipt Printer Cutter Type 

Blank: Auto Cutter 

K: Manual Cutter (with tear bar) 

Clerk Type 

Blank: Code Entry Type 

FIU Type 

Blank: 2 lines (16-digits Dot Display + 10-digits 7-segment 

Display) 

Connector for the Expansion Memory Board 

Blank: BTK connector (Non-RoHS compliant part) 

A: IMSA connector (RoHS compliant part) 

KRAM-4-1595 Series: Expansion Memory Board (4M bytes)

2. SPECIFICATIONS EO3-11103B 


2. SPECIFICATIONS 

2. SPECIFICATIONS 

SIZE: US model: 460 mm (width) x 430 mm (depth) x 350 mm (height) 

(including rubber feet) 

QP model: 410 mm (width) x 430 mm (depth) x 346 mm (height) 

(including rubber feet) 

WEIGHT: 15.0 Kg (US model), 14.0 Kg (QP model) 

POWER REQUIREMENT: AC 117V±10%, 60Hz±10%, 0.6A 

AC 220~230V±10%, 50/60Hz±10%, 0.3A 

(It differs depending on destination.) 

BATTERY: 

Type ------------------------------------------------ Lithium-vanadium battery 

Life -------------------------------------------------- 5 years 

Back-up duration -------------------------------- 1 month (in case of full charge) 

Charge method Turning on the power switch (when applying the current) 

Full charge time --------------------------------- 48 hours or more 

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: 0°C to 40°C 

RELATIVE HUMIDITY: 10% to 90% (No condensation) 

PRINTER: 

Model----------------------------------------------- M-T203/T203A, M-T207 (EPSON) 

Print method-------------------------------------- Line thermal dot printing 

Total Number of dots--------------------------- 432 dots (54mm) 

Dot density---------------------------------------- 8 dots/mm 

Number of stations------------------------------ 2 stations (receipt and journal) 

Print speed---------------------------------------- max. 100 mm/s (Receipt), 80mm/s (Journal) 

Printable digits ----------------------------------- 32 digits/line on both receipt and journal 

Character components ------------------------ 12 (width) x 24 (height) dots 

(including 2-dot spacing in column) 

Paper roll (receipt and journal) -------------- 57.5±0.5 mm (width) x max. 83 mm (diameter), 

0.06 mm to 0.075 mm (thickness) 

Receipt cut method----------------------------- M-T203A: Auto cut (Partial cut), M-T207: Manual cut 

DISPLAY: 

Operators Display 

Upper Row---------------------------------------- 16 digits dot fluorescent display 

Display Color…Green 

Lower Row---------------------------------------- 10-digits 7-segment fluorescent display 


Amount -------------------------------------------- 8 digits (7 digits for registering) 

Department Code…2 digits 

Repeat Count…1 digit 

Triangular Lamps…10 

Customer Display 

Lower Row---------------------------------------- 10-digits 7-segment fluorescent display 


Amount -------------------------------------------- 8 digits (7 digits for registering) 

Department Code…2 digits 

Repeat Count…1 digit 

Triangular Lamps…10 

KEYBOARD: 

Number of keys---------------------------------- Ordinary (Stroke Type) keyboard…max. 90 keys 

Flat (Moisture-proof) keyboard…max. 120 keys 

DRAWER: 

The size of the drawer and the specifications of the money case vary depending on the individual 

product standard. 

Drawer-open Detector….. Provided 

2- 1

3. CAPACITIES EO3-11103B 

3. CAPACITIES 

3.1 Indexing Capacities 

Input Item Digits US/QP Remarks 

Amount 7 US/QP 

Quantity in Multiplication 6 US/QP 

3 integer digits + 3 decimal digits 

(0.001 to 999.999) 

Unit Price in Multiplication 6 US/QP 

Scale Unit Price 

5 

6 

QP 

US/QP 

Serial Type Scale 

Parallel Type Scale 

Tender Media Keys 8 US/QP 

Non-add Number 18 US/QP 

Percent Rate 5 US/QP 

Department Gross Profit Rate 5 QP 

Selective Itemizer Rate 5 US/QP 

VAT Rate 4 QP 

3- 1 


(0.001 to 99.999%) 


(0.01 to 100%) 


(0.001 to 99.999%) 


(0.01 to 99.99%) 

Tax Rate 6 US 


(0.0001 to 99.9999%) 

TARE Table 1 US 1 to 9 

PLU Code 6 or 13 (14) US/QP Selected by system option 

Cashier Code 4 US/QP 

2-digit secret code (01 to 99) 

+ 2-digit Cashier code (01 to 99) 

Salesperson Code 2 US/QP 1 to 99 

Credit Card Company ID Code 2 US/QP 1 to 12 

Check Track (Customer File) Code 12 US/QP 1 to 999999999999 

Scale Weight 

4 

5 

US/QP 

US/QP 

4 digits for LB 

5 digits for Kg 

Check No. 15 US/QP 1 to 999999999999999 

Department Code 2 US/QP 1 to 99 

Minor/Major Group Code 2 US/QP Minor: 1 to 30, Major: 1 to 10 

PLU Group Code 2 US/QP 1 to 99 

Canadian Tax Rate 4 US 


(0.01 to 99.99%) 

Negative Card No. 19 US 1 to 9999999999999999999 

3.1 Indexing Capacities


3.2 Basic Memory Capacities 

(NOTE: At item counts, “6 + 2 digits” means that it has 6 integer digits and 2 decimal digits) 

Major Group Memory (Major Group Name: 12 characters; max. 10 Major Groups) 

Memory Type Counter or Total digits 

Daily Memory 

Item Count 

Amount 

6 + 2 

10 

GT Memory 

Item Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

3- 2 


The same memory capacity is also provided for the Total of All Major Groups as an individual Major 

Group. 

Minor Group Memory (Minor Group Name: 12 characters; max. 30 Minor Groups) 


Daily Memory 

Item Count 

Amount 

6 + 2 

10 

GT Memory 


Amount 10 

The same memory capacity is also provided for the Total of All Minor Groups as an individual Minor 

Group. 

Department Memory (Department Name: 16 characters; max. 99 departments) 


Daily Memory 

Customer Count 6 


Amount 10 

Dollar Discount (US model) 

Amount Discount (QP model) 

% Discount 

Count 

Amount 

6 

10 

Return 

Count 

Amount 

6 + 2 

10 

Store Coupon 

Item Correct/Void 

Negative Mode 

Positive Dept. 

Negative Dept. 

Count 6 

Amount 10 

Count 6 

Amount 10 

Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

Count 6 + 2 

Amount 10 

GT Memory Same as Daily Memory


PLU Memory (PLU Name: 16 characters; 5000 PLUs (standard); 

Max. 1500 PLUs without PLU Inquiry option and with Standard Memory use; 

Max. 5000 PLUs Inquiry option and with Standard Memory use; 

Max. 65000 PLUs Inquiry option and with Expansion Memory use; 

(The maximum number of PLUs varies depending on the RAM allocation.) 



Daily Memory 

Amount 10 

GT Memory (NOTE) 


Amount 10 

NOTE: When the PLU Inquiry option is selected, no GT Memory is provided. 

Hourly Range Memory (max. 24 hour ranges) 


Customer Count 6 

Daily Memory 


Amount 10 

3- 3 


Credit Card Company Sales Memory (Credit Card Company Name: 12 characters: max. 12 

credit card companies) 


Daily Memory 

Count 

Amount 

6 

10 

GT Memory 

Count 6 

Amount 10 

Check Track Memory (Customer File Name: 16 characters: max.1000 Customer Files with standard 

Memory use; max. 3000 Customer Files with Expansion Memory use; the maximum number of files 

varies depending on the RAM allocation.) 


Memory Amount 10 

Salesperson Memory (Salesperson Name: 12 characters; max. 99 salespersons) 


Daily Memory 

Gross Sale 

Item Count 

Amount 

6 + 2 

10 

Net Sale w/o Tax Item Count 6 + 2 

(US model only) Amount 10 

Net Sale with Tax 

Item Count 

Amount 

6 + 2 

10 

Return 

Item Count 

Amount 

6 + 2 

10


PLU Group Memory (PLU Group Name: 16 characters; max. 99 PLU Groups) 


Daily Memory 

Item Count 

Amount 

6 + 2 

10 

GT Memory 


Amount 10 

3- 4 

3.3 Financial Memory 

The same memory capacity is also provided for the Total of all PLU Groups as an individual PLU 

Group. 

Negative Card Memory (US model only) (max. 3000 when expansion Memory is used; the max. 

number of files varies depending on the RAM allocation.) 

digits 

Card No. 19 

Error Status 1 


• US model 

Name of Total/Counter 

Counter 

Type 

Counter 

Digits 

Daily GT 

Total 

Digits 

Counter 

Digits 

Total 

Digits 

Remarks 

GT (Ground Total) 16 (16) Non-resettable 

NET GT (All-media Sales GT) 16 (16) Non-resettable 

GS (Gross Sale) ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

% I (%+) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

% II (%+) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Net Sale without Tax ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

Tax 1 to Tax 4 4 x 10 4 x 10 

Tax 5 (Manual Tax) 10 10 

Net Sale with Tax ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

Positive HASH Depts. ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

Negative HASH Depts. ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

% I on Subtotal (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

% II on Subtotal (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Vender Coupon ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Dollar Discount ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Bottle Return (Inside-sale Type) ITEM 6 10 6 10 

All-media Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Cash Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Check Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Charge Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Misc. Media Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

-- continued on next page --


Financial Memory: US model (continued) 


Counter 

Type 

Counter 

Digits 

Daily GT 

3- 5 

Total 

Digits 

Counter 

Digits 

Credit 1Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Credit 2 Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

DEBIT Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

EBT Cash Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

EBT F/S Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Food Stamp Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Received-on-Account ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Paid-Out ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Loan 10 10 

Pick UP ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Cash-in-drawer 10 10 

Check-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 

Charge-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 

Misc. Media-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 

Credit 1-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 


DEBIT-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 

EBT Cash-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

EBT F/S-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Food Stamp-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 

Food Stamp Change 10 

Total 

Digits 


Remarks 

Item Correct ENTRY 6 10 6 10 Item Correct on DP+/PLU+ 

Void ENTRY 6 10 6 10 Void on DP+/PLU+ 

Misc. Void ENTRY 6 10 6 10 Item Correct on others 

All Void ENTRY 6 10 6 10 Transaction All Void 

%I on Line Items (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

%II on Line Items (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Dollar Discount on Line Items ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Store Coupon ITEM 6 10 6 10 

Negative Departments Total ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

Returned Merchandise ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

Negative Tax 10 10 

Negative Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Negative Mode ( - ) Total ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Transfer Balance GT 10 (10) Same as Daily Memory 

Transfer + GT 10 (10) Same as Daily Memory 

Transfer - GT 10 (10) Same as Daily Memory 

Transfer + Daily 10 10 

Transfer - Daily 10 10 



Financial Memory: US model (continued) 


Counter 

Type 

Counter 

Digits 

Daily GT 

3- 6 

Total 

Digits 

Counter 

Digits 

Previous Balance Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Total 

Digits 


Remarks 

Previous Balance R/A 10 10 Payment made for PB 

Pervious Balance PO 10 10 PB refunded to customers 

Taxable 1 to 4 4 x 10 4 x 10 

Selective Itemizer 1 & 2 ENTRY 2 x 6 2 x 10 2 x 6 2 x 10 

Tax-exempted Customer CUS 6 6 

Tax 1 to 4 Exempt 4 x 10 4 x 10 

Tax Exempt 1 to 4 by Food Stamp 4 x 10 4 x 10 

Foreign Currencies 1 to 5 ENTRY 5 x 6 5 x 10 In-drawer Totals 

Special Rounding for Foreign 

Currencies 

10 

Net Sale Item Count per 

Customer 

ITEM 6 + 2 6 + 2 

Net Sale without Tax per Cus. 10 10 

No-sale Counter ENTRY 6 

Validation Counter ENTRY 6 

HOLD Counter ENTRY 6 

Off-line Auth ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

%III on Subtotal (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

%IV on Subtotal (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

%V on Subtotal (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

%VI on Subtotal (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

%III on Line Items (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

%IV on Line Items (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

%V on Line Items (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

%VI on Line Items (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Selective Itemizer 3 ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Selective Itemizer 4 ENTRY 6 10 6 10


• QP model 


Counter 

Type 

Counter 

Digits 

Daily GT 

3- 7 

Total 

Digits 

Counter 

Digits 

Total 

Digits 


Remarks 

GT (Grand Total) 16 (16) Non-resettable 

NET GT (All-media Sales GT) 16 (16) Non-resettable 

NEG GT 16 (16) Non-resettable 

GS (Gross Sale) ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

Tax 1 to Tax 8 8 x 10 8 x 10 

Tax Total 10 10 

Net Sale with Tax ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

Positive HASH Dept. ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

Negative HASH Dept. ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

% I (%+) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

% II (%-) ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Vender Coupon ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Amount Discount ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

EAN Coupon ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

Bottle Return (Inside-sale Type) ITEM 6 10 6 10 

Negative Departments Total ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

Special Rounding 10 10 

All-media Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Cash Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Cheque Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Credit Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Misc. Media Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Media-Coupon Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 






Received-on Account ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Paid-Out ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Bottle Return (Outside-sale Type) ITEM 6 10 6 10 

Loan 10 

Pick UP ENTRY 6 10 

Cash-in-drawer 10 

Cash-in-drawer 

(Foreign Currency 1) ENTRY 6 10 







Financial Memory: QP model (continued) 


Counter 

Type 

Counter 

Digits 

Total 

Digits 





Cheque-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 

Cheque-in-drawer 


Cheque -in-drawer 








Credit-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 

Credit-in-drawer 










Misc. Media-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 

Misc. Media-in-drawer 


Misc. Media -in-drawer 








Media-Coupon-in-drawer ENTRY 6 10 

Media-Coupon-in-drawer 















Daily GT 

3- 8 

Counter 

Digits 

Total 

Digits 


Remarks 

Cash-in-drawer Difference 10 at Money Declaration 

Cheque-in-drawer Difference 10 at Money Declaration 





Counter 

Type 

Counter 

Digits 

Daily GT 

3- 9 

Total 

Digits 

Counter 

Digits 

Total 

Digits 


Remarks 

Credit-in-drawer Difference 10 at Money Declaration 

Misc. Media-in-drawer Difference 10 at Money Declaration 

Media-Coupon-in-drawer Difference 10 at Money Declaration 

Credit 1-in-drawer Difference 10 at Money Declaration 





Item Correct ENTRY 6 10 6 10 Item Correct on DP+/PLU+ 

Void ENTRY 6 10 6 10 Void on DP+/PLU+ 

Misc. Void ENTRY 6 10 6 10 Item Correct on others 

All Void ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Store Coupon ITEM 6 10 6 10 

Returned Merchandise ITEM 6 + 2 10 6 + 2 10 

Negative-Balance Sales CUS 6 10 6 10 

Negative Mode ( - ) Total ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Haus Bon 1 ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Haus Bon 2 ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

%- on Line Items ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Amount Discount on Line Items ENTRY 6 10 6 10 

Transfer Balance GT 10 (10) Non-resettable 

Transfer + GT 10 (10) Non-resettable 

Transfer - GT 10 (10) Non-resettable 

Transfer + Daily 10 10 

Transfer - Daily 10 10 

Previous Balance CUS 6 10 6 10 

Previous Balance R/A 10 10 Payments made for PB 

Previous Balance PO 10 10 PB refunded to customers 

Taxable Total 1 to 8 8 x 10 8 x 10 

VAT 1 to 8 8 x 10 8 x 10 

VAT Total 10 10 

Net Sale without Tax 10 10 

Selective Itemizer 1 & 2 ENTRY 2 x 6 10 2 x 6 10 

Tax-exempted Customer CUS 6 6 

Tax 1 to 8 Exempt 8 x 10 8 x 10 

Special Rounding for Foreign 

Currencies 

10 





Net Sale Item Count per 

Customer 

Counter 

Type 

Counter 

Digits 

Daily GT 

3-10 

Total 

Digits 

Counter 

Digits 

ITEM 6 + 2 6 + 2 

All-media Sales per Cus. 10 10 

No-sale Counter ENTRY 6 

Clear Key Counter ENTRY 6 

Power ON/OFF Counter ENTRY 6 

Total 

Digits 

3.4 Cashier Memory 

Remarks 

3.4 Cashier Memory 

(max.15 cashiers with Standard Memory; max.99 cashiers with Expansion Memory) 

• The cashier Memory for each cashier has the same contents of Daily Memory and GT 

Memory as the Financial Memory already described except the following items are not 

provided for the Cashier Memory: 

GT, NET GT, NEG GT (QP model), Off-line Auth (US model) 

• The following are memory items that are provided exclusively to the Cashier Memory for each 

cashier and not provided in the Financial Memory:. 

Counter Daily GT 


Type 

Counter 

Digits 

Total 

Digits 

Counter 

Digits 

Total 

Digits 

Money Declaration Counter ENTRY 6 QP model 

Read Report Counter ENTRY 4 4 QP model 

Reset Report Counter ENTRY 4 4 

Commission 10 10 QP model 

Remarks 

NOTE: The number of cashiers depends on whether Standard Memory or Expansion Memory is 

used: 

With Standard Memory use: max. 15 cashiers 

With Expansion Memory use: max. 99 cashiers 

The memory selection is determined by the RAM Allocation. 

3.5 Others 


Counter 

Type 

Counter 

Digits 

Hourly Range Reset Counter ENTRY 4 

Daily GT 

Total 

Digits 

Counter 

Digits 

PLU Reset Counter ENTRY 4 4 

Department Reset Counter ENTRY 4 4 

Total 

Digits 

Financial Read Counter ENTRY 4 4 QP model 

Financial Reset Counter ENTRY 4 4 

PLU Group Reset Counter ENTRY 4 4 

Salesperson Reset Counter ENTRY 4 

Credit Card Company Reset 

Counter ENTRY 4 4 

Remarks


3-11 

3.6 Memory Balance 


• US model 

1. GT (Grand Total) = Sum of Daily GS (Gross Sale) 

2. NET GT = Sum of Daily All-media Sales 

3. GS (Gross Sale) = (Sum of Positive Depts) + (Sum of Taxes)* + (%+) +(Item Correct) + 

(Void) + (%- on Line Item) + (Dollar Discount on Line Items) + 

(Store Coupon) + (Returned Merchandise) + (Negative Tax)* + 

(Negative Mode Total) + (All Void)*** + (Selective Itemizer Totals) 

4. Net Sale with Tax = (Sum of All Depts)** + (Sum of Taxes)* + (%+) 

= (GS) - (Item Correct) - (Void) - (%- on Line Items) 

- (Dollar Discount on Line Items) - (Store Coupon) 

- (Negative Depts Total) - (Returned Merchandise) - (Negative Tax)* 

- (Negative Mode Total) - (All Void)*** - (Selective Itemizer Totals) 

5. All-media Sales = (Net Sale with Tax) - (%- on Subtotal) - (Vender Coupon) 

- (Dollar Discount) - (Bottle Return ) ± (Selective Itemizer Totals) 

+ (Sum of Positive HASH Depts) - (Sum of Negative HASH Depts) 

= (Cash Sales) + (Check Sales) + (Charge Sales) + (Misc. Sales) 

+ (Media-Coupon Sales) + (Food Stamp Sales) 

+ (Previous Balance Sales) + (Credit 1 to 4 Sales) 

6. Sum of Hourly Range Sales = 

NOTE 2 

Net Sale with Tax (US Balance) 

7. Sum of Hourly Range Sales = 

NOTE 2 

Net Sale without Tax (Canada Balance) 

8. Negative Mode Total = GS (Gross Sale) in the Negative Mode 

9. Net Sale Item Count per Customer = (Item Count of Net Sale with Tax) 

÷ (Customer Count of All-media Sales) 

Net Sale per Customer = (Amount of Net Sale without Tax) 


NOTE 3 

NOTE 3 

NOTES 1, 4 

(Sum of Taxes)*, (Negative Tax)* = (Amount of exclusive taxes only, inclusive taxes are excluded) 

(Sum of All Depts)** = (Sum of Positive Depts) + (Sum of Negative Depts) but excluding HASH Depts 

(All Void)*** = (Sum of the amount processed into the GS memory by the time of All Voiding) 

NOTES: 1. When the option “SI/TL Add to or Subtract from sale” is selected. 

2. If Financial Reset Report and Hourly Range Reset Report are taken at the same time. 

3. When the option “NET process in department/PLU memory” is selected. 

4. When the option “GROSS process in department/PLU memory” is selected.


3-12 


• QP model 

1. GT (Grand Total) = Sum of Daily GS (Gross Sale) 

2. NET GT = (Sum of Daily Net Sales) – (Sum of Daily Bottle Return Outside-sale Type) 

3. NEG GT = GT – NET GT 

NOTE 1 

4. GS (Gross Sale) = (Sum of Positive Depts) + (Sum of Add-on Taxes) 

5. Net Sale = GS – (Sum of Negative Depts) + (%+) – (%-) – (Vender Coupon) 

NOTE 2 

– (Amount Discount) + (Special Rounding) 

NOTE 3 

– (Bottle Return Inside-sale Type) ± (Selective Itemizer 1 & 2) 

+ (Sum of HASH Depts) 

= (Cash Sales) + (Sum of all other media sales) + (Previous Balance Sales) 

= (Sum of Hourly Sales)… If Financial Reset Report and Hourly Range Reset Report are taken 

at the same time. 

6. Negative Mode Total = (Net Sale + Received-on-Account + Paid-Out + Bottle Return 

Outside-sale Type) in Negative Mode 

7. Net Sale without Tax (N.NS) = (Net Sale) – (Sum of VATs)… applicable only when the VAT feature is 

8. Net Sale Item Count per Customer = (Item Count of Net Sale) 

selected 

All-media Sales pre Customer = 


(Amount of All-media Sales) 

9. Credit-in-drawer = 


Sum of all Credit Card Companies-in-drawer 1 to 12 (if the [CRT] key is 

always used to finalize sales using those credit companies’ cards only) 

NOTE: 1. Applicable only when the Add-on Tax feature is selected. 

2. The special-rounded portion is Received-on-Account and Paid-Out transaction will not 

make correct balance. 

3. This is applied only when the option “SI/TL is processed into memory” is selected. 

4. The process into the %- memory made when %- item is entered after a subtotal entry in a 

transaction. The process into the Amount Discount memory is made when an Amount 

Discount item is entered after a subtotal or an individual Department/PLU item in a 

transaction.

4. SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURE EO3-11103B 

4. SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURE 

Case 1: To start-up using the MA-1595 terminal only: 

RAM Clear 

(Chapter 5) 

RAM Allocation Setting 

(Chapter 6, Submode 79) 

All the programming operations 

Required as a terminal 

(Chapter 6) 

Case 2: To start-up by installing programming data from the PC 

RAM Clear 

(Chapter 5) 



PC Transmission Information 

Setting 


Turn OFF then ON the terminal power. 

DLL (Down Line Loading) of the data 

Set at PC, to the terminal 

4- 1 


For using Expansion Memory, perform this 

setting. For using Standard Memory, this 

setting is necessary only for using any other 

than the default value for memory 

allocation. 

Perform this setting for using Expansion 

Memory. For using Standard Memory, 

this setting is necessary only for using 

any other than the default value for 

memory allocation. 

Perform this setting only for 

selecting any other than the 

default value. 

Perform this operation only when the PC 

Transmission Information Setting (above) 

has been performed.

5. RAM CLEAR, DATA CLEAR, STATUS CLEAR EO3-11103B 

5. RAM CLEAR, DATA CLEAR, STATUS CLEAR 

5.1 RAM Clear 

5- 1 

5.1 RAM Clear 

CAUTION! 

This clear operation deletes all programmed data and sales data stored in the memory of the ECR. 

(i.e., the register goes back to initial status.) 

If the ECR becomes completely inoperative due to battery discharge or malfunction of the program 

memory, the RAM Clear operation must be carried out. When the RAM Clear is operated, all memory 

stored in the RAM will be cleared. (i.e., the programmed data and the sales data) In the clearing 

process, the designated zero-amount format is reset. Also “Initial Data” and “Initial Status” for 

respective programming items are automatically reset. A RAM clear is also necessary to determine 

the type of the ECR keyboard. 

1. Turn the Power Switch to OFF. 

2. Use the S key to turn the Mode Lock to “BLIND” position. 

3. Turn the Power Switch to ON. The message “Please Input Key” is displayed on the Operator 

Display. 

4. Depress the following Numeric keys according to the zero-suppress form and the type of keyboard 

installed. 

Numeric Keys 

Keyboard Type 

(Nation Code) 

Zero-suppress 

Form 

[1] & [8] Flat Type (IT) . - - 0 

[1] & [9] Ordinary Type (IT) . - - 0 

[3] & [8] Flat Type (US, QP) 0 . 0 0 

[3] & [9] Ordinary Type (US, QP) 0 . 0 0 

5. Depress the [AT/TL] key. 

6. A RAM Clear receipt is issued. 

NOTES: 1. When the RAM clear operation is performed, the condition “after all sales data reset” is 

obtained, just as “Status Clear” and “Data Clear”. Therefore, no Reset Report should be 

taken for starting any programming operation. 

2. On completion of Step 6, all the memory will be cleared, and at the same time the 

keyboard will automatically be programmed as specified in the “Standard Keyboard” 

(refer to the “SFKC” programming operation later described). 

3. After a RAM Clear, the Standard Program Data for FINANCIAL REPORT ITEM NAME 

and PRINT LINE ITEM NAME, etc. will also be set automatically. 

RAM-C 

08-22-2003 FRI #0 

0001 13:43TM


5.2 DATA Clear 

5- 2 

5.2 DATA Clear 

CAUTION! 

This clear operation deletes all sales data of any operation sequence stored in the memory of the 

ECR. 

Performing the DATA Clear operation will clear only the sales data accumulated in the memory of the 

ECR (report memory), however, the programmed data will not be cleared. By this operation, all sales 

data including non-resettable totals and counters, Reset Report Counts, and Receipt Consecutive No. 

are cleared. 




Display. 

4. Depress the following Numeric keys. 

Numeric Keys 

Keyboard Type 

(Ordinary or Flat K/B) 

Zero-suppress 

Form 

[1] IT . - - 0 

[3] US, QP 0 . 0 0 

5. Depress the [AT/TL] key. 

6. A DATA Clear receipt is issued. 

NOTES: 1. When the DATA clear operation is performed, the condition “after all sales data reset” is 

obtained, just as “Status Clear”. Therefore, no Reset Report should be taken for starting 

any programming operation. 

2. None of PLU table, stock status, and stock memory are cleared. 

DATA-C 

08-22-2003 FRI #0 

0001 13:44TM


5.3 STATUS Clear 

5- 3 

5.3 STATUS Clear 

Performing the STATUS Clear operation will clear an error and the key locked condition, however, the 

sales data and the programmed data will not be cleared by this operation. When the STATUS Clear is 

operated to clear a key locked condition during sale, the sale item data that has already been entered 

for the current sale will be cleared. 

The STATUS Clear operation obtains the condition “after all sales data reset” which is required for 

some programming operations, but this operation will not affect any sales data. This condition is 

obtained by taking reset reports. In case you do not want to reset the sales data such as in business 

hours, this function is effective. Depending on the programming item, sales data should be reset 

instead of STATUS Clear to keep consistency between programmed data and sales data. 

The STATUS Clear can be performed in 2 methods shown below. 

< Method 1 > 




Display. 

4. Depress a key except for the [1], [3], and [AT/TL] keys. 

Or only depress the [AT/TL] key. 

5. A STATUS Clear receipt is issued. 

< Method 2 > 

1. Turn the Mode Lock to “SET” position. 

2. Depress the [9] key (Numeric key), and then the [ST] key. 

3. A STATUS Clear receipt is issued. 

NOTE: When the sales item entry is being performed on the satellite terminal in Master-Satellite 

system, do not execute STATUS Clear on the master terminal. 

08-22-2003 FRI #0 

STATUS-C 

0002 13:44TM

6. TERMINAL FILE PROGRAMMING EO3-11103B 


6. TERMINAL FILE PROGRAMMING 


Table of Terminal File Programming Operations 

Operation 

6- 1 

Condition 

(NOTE) 

Mode Lock 

Position 

Submode 

No. 

Basic Key Function and Keyboard Variations in Programming Operations --- --- --- 6-3 

Character Entries --- --- --- 6-5 

Condition Required for Programming Operations --- --- --- 6-9 

SFKC (Selective Function Key Code) Programming All Resets BLIND --- 6-10 

RAM Allocation Setting TC BLIND 79 6-17 

Table Clear Anytime BLIND 91 6-19 

System Option Programming FZ 

BLIND 18 

SET 18 or 11 

Store Name Message, Commercial Message and Footer Logo Message 

Programming 

Anytime SET 1 6-74 

Cashier Code and Name Programming Anytime/CZ SET 2 6-77 

Department Table Programming 

Anytime/DZ, 

DGZ, PZ, PGZ 

SET 3 6-79 

PLU Table Programming Anytime/PZ SET 4 6-89 

Time Setting or Adjustment Anytime SET 5 6-104 

Date Setting or Adjustment Anytime SET 6 6-104 

Hourly Range Table Setting HZ SET 7 6-105 

Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys Anytime SET 8 6-106 

Financial Report Item Name Programming FZ, FGZ SET 9 6-107 

Print Line Item Name Programming Anytime SET 10 6-114 

VAT or Add-on Tax Rate Setting (QP model) FZ SET 12 6-118 

Non-Taxable Amount Limit Setting (US model) FZ SET 12 6-119 

Minor Group Name Programming Anytime SET 13 6-120 

Major Group Name Programming Anytime SET 14 6-121 

Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting Anytime SET 15 6-122 

Display Upper-Row Message Programming Anytime SET 17 6-124 

Combination Report Table Programming Anytime SET 19 6-127 

Salesperson Code and Name Programming Anytime SET 20 6-129 

Credit Card Company ID Code and Name Programming Anytime SET 21 6-131 

Endorsement (or France Cheque Print) Message Programming Anytime SET 22 6-133 

Key Status Programming Anytime SET 23 6-134 

PLU Stock Loading or Changing (QP model) Anytime SET 24 6-141 

Link-PLU Table Programming Anytime SET 25 6-142 

Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting Anytime SET 26 6-143 

PLU Preset-Code Key Setting Anytime SET 27 6-145 

Report Item Print/Non-Print Setting Anytime SET 28 6-148 

PLU Group Name Programming Anytime SET 29 6-155 

Comment Message Programming (US model) Anytime SET 30 6-156 

Display Message Programming Anytime SET 31 6-157 

Error Message Programming Anytime SET 32 6-159 

Media Pick-Up Warning Setting FZ SET 33 6-162 

Function Key (Combination Key) Setting Anytime SET 34 6-163 

Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting Anytime SET 35 6-164 

Special Rounding Process Setting, 1-digit type (QP model) Anytime SET 36 6-165 

Special Rounding Process Setting, 2-digit type (QP model) Anytime SET 37 6-166 

Drawer Warning Time Setting Anytime SET 38 6-167 

Page 

6-20




Table of Terminal File Programming Operations (Continued) 

Operation 

6- 2 

Condition 

(NOTE) 

Mode Lock 

Position 

Submode 

No. 

Read/Reset Report Name Programming Anytime SET 39 6-168 

PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting (US model) Anytime SET 40 6-171 

Age Limit Setting (US model) Anytime SET 41 6-172 

Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting, 1-digit type Anytime SET 48 6-173 

Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting, 2-digit type Anytime SET 49 6-174 

Credit Card No. Negative Check File Programming (US model) Anytime SET 54 6-175 

Barcode Individual Flag Type Designation (US model) Anytime SET 55 6-176 

Store ID Setting (QP model) Anytime SET 56 6-177 

PLU Price Setting or Changing (QP model) Anytime SET 60 6-177 

PLU Addition to PLU Additional Table File Anytime SET 64 6-178 

EFT Key Status Programming (US model) Anytime SET 65 6-179 

EFT Information Setting 1 (US model) Anytime SET 66 6-180 

EFT Information Setting 2 (US model) Anytime SET 67 6-182 

PC Transmission Information Setting Anytime SET 68 6-182 

COM Port and R/J Printer Setting Anytime SET 71 6-183 

PLU File Sequential Sort Check Anytime BLIND 93 6-185 

PLU File Sequential Delete Anytime BLIND 94 6-185 

Department Preset Price Setting or Changing Anytime SET --- 6-186 

PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing, Whole Package Quantity Changing 

(US model) 

Page 

Anytime SET --- 6-187 

PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing (QP model) Anytime SET --- 6-188 

%+ and %- Preset Rate Setting Anytime SET --- 6-189 

Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 to SI4) 

(SI3 and SI4: US model only) 

Anytime SET --- 6-190 

Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting Anytime SET --- 6-192 

HAUS BON Discount Rate Setting (QP model) Anytime SET --- 6-194 

Tax Table Setting (US model) FZ SET --- 6-195 

Store/Register No. Setting Anytime SET --- 6-198 

NOTE: TC = After Table Clear DGZ = After Department GT Reset PGZ = After PLU GT Reset 

FZ = After Financial Daily Reset HZ = After Hourly Range Reset All Resets = All Daily and GT Resets 

FGZ = After Financial GT Reset CZ = After Cashier Reset Anytime = Any time outside a sale (no 

DZ = After Department Daily Reset PZ = After PLU reset Condition required)


6.1 Basic Key Functions and Keyboard Variations in Programming Operations 

6.1 Basic Key Functions and Keyboard Variations in Programming 

Operations 

6.1.1 Basic Key Functions 

1. The following are main keys and their functions to be used in programming operations: 

[X] (or [@/FOR]) ---------------------Used to enter the program Submode No. 

[ST] or [NS] ---------------------------Used to enter the Address No. or Item Code. Also used to 

end the item data entry. 

[#] ----------------------------------------Used to enter data for the address or item. Each character 

also entered through this key. 

[ITEM CORR] -------------------------When you enter incorrect settings, depressing this key can 

return the display to the previous item setting. 

[AT/TL] ---------------------------------Used to end the entire program Submode sequence. 

2. Function of the [C] key: 

٠ When an entered program data is already printed, the [C] key cannot clear if any longer. 

To correct the data, re-enter it. 

٠ Before the entered data is printed, the data may be cleared by the [C] key (except in the 

SFKC Programming Operation). 

3. To clarify the operation flow, definitions of keys of the ECR keyboard are as shown below. 

| |--------Selective numeric value which is entered through the Numeric keys. 

[ ] --------Depression of the function key. 

xxxx-----------Fixed numeric value which is entered through the Numeric keys. 

Fixed 

6.1.2 Keyboard Variations in Programming Operations 

This ECR provides several keyboards for programming operations. Depending on which keyboard is 

used, the key layout and the character entry method will vary. 

Case 1: When the ECR Keyboard is Ordinary Type (Stroke-key Type) 

1-1 When the Ordinary keyboard alone is used for programming, follow the instructions as they 

are described in this manual. For character settings, use the CHARACTER CODE TABLE 

(later stated). None of the DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY methods are possible. 

1-2 When the PLU Keyboard PK-2 (hardware option) is connected: 

1) Character Keys provided on the PK-2 Character Setting Sheet may be used to directly enter 

the characters (DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY method). Any characters not provided there 

(and those provided as well) may be entered, in the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method, 

through the Numeric Keys and the [#] key on the ECR keyboard. 

6- 3


6.1 Basic Key Functions and Keyboard Variations in Programming Operations 

2) All Function keys ([C], [X] or [@/FOR], [ST], [AT/TL], [DP#], etc.) must be operated on the 

ECR keyboard. 

3) In the following operations, however, the Character Setting Sheet should be removed and the 

keys on the PK-2 are used as PLU Preset-code Keys: 

• PLU PRESET-CODE KEY SETTING (Submode 27 in this chapter) 

Case 2: When the ECR Keyboard is Flat Keyboard Type: 

The Flat Keyboard will be set with the “Setting Mode Key Layout” in the programming operations 

including character entries. On this keyboard, functions and locations of keys required in various 

programming operations are fixed. Characters on the key sheet can be entered directly through this 

keyboard. The Character Code Entry method is also allowed. 

NOTES: 1. If an option keyboard (PK-2) is connected, the DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY method is 

allowed through both the ECR keyboard and the option keyboard. 

2. For QP model, whether the “REG” mode key layout or the “Setting Mode Key Layout” 

will be active is determined by the Mode Lock position and the Submode No. entry 

through the [X] key (which is usually labeled as [@/FOR]). Therefore, the programming 

Submode No. and the [X] key depression must be operated in the “REG” mode key 

layout. That is, if the locations of the [X] key in the “REG” mode key layout are different 

from those in the “Setting Mode Key Layout”, key-ins up to the Submode No. and the 

depression of the [X] key must be operated on the “REG” mode key layout, and then the 

“Setting Mode Key Layout” sheet should be inserted. 

6- 4


6.2 Character Entries 

6- 5 


As already stated, there are two methods of operations for character settings for names or messages: 

CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method and DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method. 

CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method 

This method is to set a character by entering a Character Code and depressing the [#] key. This 

method is allowed in either of Case 1 and Case 2, but is operated only on the ECR keyboard 

(Ordinary Type or Flat Type). 

DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method 

This method is to set a character by directly depressing the Character Key on any of the following 

keyboard: 

• Flat Keyboard (ECR Keyboard Flat Type) with “Setting Mode Key Layout” sheet 

(refer to Case 2) 

• PK-2 Keyboard (PLU Keyboard; hardware option) 

By using those character keys, the characters are directly entered. In this manual, sample 

operations are attached to most of the programming operations. And at name or message 

programming portions, characters are entered by the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method. 

Instead of this, you may depress the Character Keys. For example, instead of entering 401 [#] (to 

enter character “A”), you may simply depress Character Key “A” on any of the above three 

keyboards. 

On the following pages, Character Code Tables under the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method 

and three different keyboards under the DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method are shown. These 

pages are to be referred to, every time the “Character Entries” sequence is contained in various 

programming operations in this manual. 

Read through these pages at least once first, so that you may know the appropriate method of 

character entries using the ECR keyboard and/or option keyboards.


6.2.1 Character Code Entry Method 

Character Code Table 1: Standard Characters 

Row 

Code 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 

00 SP 0 @ P ` p € � a A \ → 

01 

02 

Column Code 

! 1 A Q a q e a ← 

" 2 B R b r ⎡ i Ø ↓ 

03 # 3 C S c s ⎦ o o ↑ 

04 $ 4 D T d t , u A ½ 

05 % 5 E U e u • a a ¼ 

06 & 6 F V f v A e Œ � 

07 ' 7 G W g w Ë i œ � 

08 ( 8 H X h x O o β Kg 

09 ) 9 I Y i y U u ¢ lb 

10 * : J Z j z E a £ No 

11 + ; K [ k { a e Φ X 

12 , < L ¥ l | e i ∑ � 

13 - = M ] m } i c ÷ � 

14 . > N ^ n ¯ o N ─ 

15 / ? O _ o u n 

6- 6 


NOTE: Characters of those character codes 1007, 1206, 1207, 1211, 1500 through 1503, and 1506 

through 1514 cannot be printed on the slip printer.


Character Setting Operations 

6- 7 


• To set a regular-sized character, enter the COL (column) code and then the ROW code, 

followed by the [#] key. 

ex.) To set “%”, enter 205 and depress [#]. 

To set “kg” enter1508, and depress [#]. 

• To set a blank instead of a character, simply depress [#] without a prior entry, or enter 200 

and depress [#]. 

• Depress the [X] key once prior to regular-sized character entry, and it will be a double-sized 

character (a blank will also be double-sized). 

ex.) To set “GROUP”, “G” in double-sized, and “ROUP” in regular-sized: 

[X] 407 [#] 502 [#] 515 [#] 505 [#] 500 [#] 

G R O U P 

• Depress the [X] key twice prior to the first character code entry to set the entire message line 

or enter name will all double-sized characters. 

ex.) To set “GROUP” all in double-sized: 

To set “Drink”, all in double-sized; 

[X] [X] 407 [#] 502 [#] 415 [#] 505 [#] 500 [#] 

G R O U P 

All Double-sized Declaration 

6.2.2 Direct Character Entry Method 

Using Flat Keyboard (installed as the ECR Main Keyboard): 

-- Setting Mode Key Layout -- 

(Use the special template for this purpose and insert it between the film layers covering the flat 

keyboard. This key layout is applicable to only certain submodes.) 

Q W E R T Y U I O P RF JF 

A S D F G H J K L ; # 

Z X C V B N M , . / 

ALL 

VOID 

q w e r t y u i o p C X 

a s d f g h j k l * 7 8 9 DP# 

z x c v b n m - ? – 4 5 6 

! @ # $ % & : ( ) SP 

ITEM 

CORR 1 2 3 ST 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 PLU 0 00 • AT/TL 

Character Key in Programming Function key in programming 

Character Keys: Simply depress the key to enter the character. (The [#] key should not follow.) Then 

numerics 1 to 0 are entered as characters 1 to 0 but not as codes for PLU Item 

Codes, etc. 

Function Keys: These are function keys to be used in programming operations with the Setting Mode 

Key Layout. The numeric Keys here are used to enter PLU Codes, etc. or numeric 

values as program data, but not to enter the numerics as characters.


Using PK-2 (PLU Keyboard; hardware option) 

6- 8 


The PK-2 is used to enter a required PLU code by simply depressing the code-preset key on the 

PK-2 keyboard in the REG or MGR mode. In addition, the PK-2 can be used to enter characters 

directly during the programming operations that require character settings, such as STORE 

NAME/MESSAGE AND COMMERCIAL MESSAGE PROGRAMMING, DEPARTMENT TABLE 

PROGRAMMING, etc. 

The figure below shows the key indications of the PK-2 keyboard for the character setting purpose. 

Insert the template for this purpose between the film layers that cover the PK-2 keyboard. 

Instead of entering a 3- or 4 digit character code and depressing the [#] key on the ECR keyboard, 

a simple depression of the appropriate key on the PK-2 keyboard will be the character entry. 

Unlike the TKB-1, all the function keys, such as [X], [ST], [#]. [AT/TL], etc. must be operated on the 

ECR side. Any characters not listed on the template may be entered by the CHARACTER CODE 

ENTRY method on the ECR keyboard (the characters even listed on the template may be entered 

as well by that method). 

Please note also that the keys “0” to “9” in the figure below function as character keys but do not 

function for code entries. Any code entries, for Menu Item Codes, Address Nos, etc. must be 

entered through the Numeric Keys on the ECR keyboard. 

The One Double-size Declaration (by depressing the [X] key once prior to the required character) 

and the All Double-sized Declaration (by depressing [X] twice before all the characters) are the 

same as in the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method. 

7 8 9 

4 5 6 

1 2 3 

! @ # $ % ¢ & * ( ) 0 

q w e r t y u i o P ~ ^ 

a s d f g h j k l " _ + 

z x c v b n m ' - = 

Q W E R T Y U I O P [ ] 

A S D F G H J K L ; : , 

Z X C V B N M space . / ?


6.3 Condition Required for Programming Operations 

6- 9 

6.3 Condition Required for Programming Operations 

“CONDITION” is given at the top of each programming operation. The ECR must satisfy this condition 

to perform programming operations. 

There are two types of conditions: 

“Any time outside a sale” 

It means that the programming operation is allowed when a sale is finalized before going into any other 

sale entry. 

“After------ reset” 

It means that the designated reset report must be taken before entering the programming operation. 

And an error will result if the operation is attempted without taking the report. However, the words 

“After ... Reset” do not necessarily mean “immediately after ...”. 

When the designated reset report has already been taken and then some operations are performed in 

the SET, X, or Z mode, the condition “After ... Reset” is still satisfied and the programming operation is 

still allowed. 

On the contrary, when the designated reset report has been taken but then some sales data relating to 

that report’s output data are entered in the REG, MGR, or - mode, the programming operation will no 

longer be allowed and the same reset report must be taken. 

Thus the condition “After ... Reset” indicates that all the sales data relating to the report data must be 

zero (except non-resettable memory data). Because of this “CONDITION” requirement, the report data 

will be protected from any inconsistencies of sales data entered in the period from a resetting of the 

report to another resetting of the same report next time.


6.4 SFKC (Selective Function Key Code) Programming 

6-10 


SFKC Programming is to determine the keyboard layout with the required keys. This operation must 

be performed first before any other programming operation. If the RAM Clear is performed prior to the 

SFKC programming, program only the keys that require changes from the SFKC in the Standard 

Keyboard which has been set by the RAM Clear operation automatically. (For Standard Keyboards, 

see Page 6-14 and 6-15.) 

The following keys that are minimum requirements for programming and registering operations must 

be installed on the keyboard no matter what any other keys may or may not be installed: 

[C], [X] ([@/FOR]), [ST], [AT/TL], [#], [NS], and Department Keys or [DP#] 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

After all Z and GTZ reports, or after RAM CLEAR, DATA CLEAR, or STATUS CLEAR 

Mode Lock: BLIND 

76 [AT/TL] | SFKC | [KEY] [AT/TL] 

to read preset SFKC 

Repeat 

The key that requires the 

function of the SFKC 

1. Enter 76, and depress the key to be [AT/TL] (Cash Media key). This declares the SFKC 

Programming Start and at the same time sets the SFKC 76 on the key. 

From this step on, the depressed key will be [AT/TL]. 

2. Enter the SFKC (see the SFKC table on the following pages), and depress the key that 

require the key name of the SFKC. Repeat this step until all the require keys are set with their 

own SFKC’s. Each key on the keyboard must correspond to one SFKC, except for SFKC 96 

(PLU Preset-code Keys). If in this step, a key is simply depressed without a prior SFKC entry, 

the SFKC that has been pre-programmed on that key is displayed at that AMOUNT portion. 

3. Depress the [AT/TL] key (the key set as [AT/TL] in Step 1) to end the SFKC programming 

operation. The display now shows “0” at the AMOUNT portion. A receipt is issued. 

NOTES: 1. The entered SFKC is displayed at the AMOUNT portion of the display. 

2. If a wrong code has been entered and the key has also been depressed (i.e. a wrong 

SFKC has been set on a key), enter the correct SFKC and depress the key. 

3. If “0” is entered as SFKC, the key will be dead and its memory will also be closed. 

4. Each of the keys programmed in this step will have its memory (if any) opened 

automatically. 

5. The [C] key, if once set with SFKC 95, may be used to clear an error, but not to clear 

and SFKC entry. If any SFKC is entered and the [C] key is depressed, that SFKC will 

be set on the key that was once the [C] key. 

6. To designate the SFKC 100 for the [TAX] key (Manual Tax), operate the keys [1] → 

[0] → [0]. In this case, the [00] key is unavailable. 

7. When a key is opened here, the print status should be set to its memory in Report Item 

Print/Non-Print Setting (Submode 28). 

8. When a department key is assigned here, its memory will not be opened. Please be 

sure to program the department by the Department Table Programming (Submode 3).


SFKC TABLE 

6-11 


SFKC Key Name Memory to be opened (REMARKS) 

0 Dead-key code (used to close the key and memory) 

1 to 60 Department Preset-code Keys 1 to 60 Respective Department memory 

61 RF (Receipt Feed) No memory 

62 JF (Journal Feed) No memory 

63 00 (Double-zero) No memory 

64 000 (Triple-zero) No memory 

65 • (Decimal Point) No Memory 

66 VND CPN (Vender Coupon) Vender Coupon 

67 STR CPN (Store Coupon) Store Coupon 

68 BTL RTN (Bottle Return) Bottle Return 

69 

DOLL DISC (Dollar Discount) 

- (Amount Discount) 

Dollar Discount (US model) 

Amount Discount (QP model) 

70 %+ % I 

71 %- % II 

72 RTN MDSE (Returned Merchandise) Returned Merchandise 

73 ITEM CORR (Item Correct) Item Correct, Misc. Void 

74 VOID (Void) Void, Misc. Void 

75 ALL VOID (All Void) All Void 

76 

AT/TL (Cash Amount Tender/Total) 

-- Cash Media 

Cash Sales, Cash-in-drawer, 

Cash-in-drawer Difference (QP model) 

77 CHK TND (Check Tender) 

Check Sales, Check-in-drawer, 

Check-in-drawer Difference (QP model) 

Chg (Charge Total) (US model) Charge Sales, Charge-in drawer 

78 

CRT (Credit Total) (QP model) 

Credit Sales, Credit-in-drawer, 

Credit-in-drawer Difference 

79 MISC TEND (Miscellaneous Tender) 

Misc. Sales, Misc.-in-drawer, 

Misc.-in-drawer Difference (QP model) 

CREDIT 1 (Credit 1) (US model) Credit 1 Sales, Credit 1-in-drawer 

80 

CPN (Media Coupon) (QP model) 

Media-Coupon Sales, Media-Coupon-in-drawer 

Media-Coupon-in-drawer Difference 

CREDIT 2 (Credit 2) (US model) Credit 2 Sales, Credit 2-in-drawer 

81 

CREDIT 1 (Credit 1) (QP model) 

Credit 1 Sales, Credit 1-in-drawer 

Credit 1-in-drawer Difference 

82 ST (Subtotal) No memory 

83 R/A (Received-on-Account) Received-on-Account 

84 PO (Paid-Out) Paid Out 

85 NS (No-sale) No-sale Counter 

86 PR OPEN (Preset Open) No memory 

87 LC OPEN (Listing Capacity Open) No memory 

88 OPEN (PR/LC Open) No memory 

89 VALIDATE (Validation) (US model) Validation counter 

90 # (Non-add Number) No memory 

91 -- vacant -- 

(To open memory, each PLU program is further 

92 PLU (Price-Look-Up) 

necessary; however, if this key is closed, the 

memory for all PLUs are closed.) 

93 @/FOR (US model), X (QP model) No memory 

94 RECEIPT ISSUE (Receipt Post-Issue) No memory 

95 C (Clear) Clear Key Counter 

96 PLU Preset-code keys No memory 

-- Continued on next page --


SFKC TABLE (continued) 

6-12 



97 

TX1/M (Tax 1 Modifier) (US model) 

TX1/M (Tax 1 Modifier) (QP model) 

Tax 1, Taxable Total 1, Negative Tax 

No memory 

98 



Tax 2, Taxable Total 2 

No memory 

99 TXBL TL (Taxable Total) (US model) No memory 

100 TAX (Manual Tax) (US model) Tax 5 (Manual Tax memory) 

101 EX (Tax Exempt) 

PB+ (Previous Balance +; for Manual 

Exempt Customer, Exempt 1, 2, 3, 4 

102 

PB Entry Type), or 

PICK UP BAL (Pick Up Balance; for 

Check Track option) 

PB- (Previous Balance -; for Manual 

Transfer, Previous Balance Sales, Previous 

Balance R/A, Previous Balance PO 

103 

PB Entry Type), or 

CODE OPEN (Pick Up Balance; for 

Check Track option) 

No memory 

104 TRF (Transfer) No memory 

105 SI1/M (Selective Itemizer 1 Modifier) No memory 

106 SI1/TL (Selective Itemizer 1 Total) Selective Itemizer 1 Total 

107 SI2/TL (Selective Itemizer 2 Total) Selective Itemizer 2 Total 

108 AMT (Amount) No memory 

109 RPT (Repeat) No memory 

110 SCALE (Scale) No memory 

111 TARE (Tare No.) (US model) No memory 

112 STOCK (Stock) (QP model) No memory 

113 SI2/M (Selective Itemizer 2 Modifier) No memory 

114 CARD No. (Card No.) 

115 FS/M (Food Stamp Modifier) No memory 

116 




No memory 

117 

SI3/TL (Selective Itemizer 3 Total) 

(US model) 

Selective Itemizer 3 Total 

118 

SI4/TL (Selective Itemizer 4 Total) 

(US model) 

Selective Itemizer 4 Total 

119 -- vacant -- 

120 FSTL/TEND (Food Stamp Total/Tender) 

Food Stamp Total, Food Stamp-in-drawer, 

Food Stamp Change 

121 CUR 1 (Foreign Currency 1) Foreign Currency 1-in-drawer 





DEBIT (Debit) (US model) Debit Sales, Debit-in-drawer 

126 




EBT CASH (US model) EBT Cash Sales, EBT Cash-in-drawer 

127 




EBT F/S (US model) EBT F/S Sales, EBT F/S-in-drawer 

128 







6-13 



129 CREDIT 5 (Credit 5) (QP model) 



130 LOG/RECEIPT (Log/Receipt) No memory 

131 LOG (Log) No memory 

132 SALES PERSON (Salesperson) No memory 

133 CHK NO (Check No. Print) No memory 

134 




No memory 

135 DP# (Department No.) No memory 

136 CARD CHK (Card No. Check) (US model) No memory 

137 PLU ADD (PLU Add) No memory 

138 RTR Available Master Terminal only 

139 RECEIPT (Receipt) No memory 

140 -- vacant -- 

141 COMMENT (Comment) (US model) No memory 

142 -- vacant -- 

143 to 150 

CLK1 (Cashier 1) to 

CLK8 (Cashier 8) 

No memory 

151 to 160 

FUNCTION1 (Function1) to 

FUNCTION10 (Function10) 

No memory 

151 to 160 

FUNCTION1 (Function1) to 

FUNCTION10 (Function10) 

No memory 

161 HOLD/RECALL (Hold/Recall) (US model) Hold Counter 

162 -- vacant -- 

163 VAT (VAT Print) (QP model) No memory 

164 HAUS BON 1 (Haus Bon 1) (QP model) Haus Bon 1 

165 HAUS BON 2 (Haus Bon 2) (QP model) Haus Bon 2 

166 JP (Journal Print) (QP model) No memory 

167 -- vacant -- 

168 1st PRICE (QP model) No memory 

169 2nd PRICE (QP model) No memory 

170 3rd PRICE No memory 

171 to 173 -- vacant -- 

174 %- (US model) %III 

175 %- (US model) %IV 

176 %- (US model) %V 

177 %- (US model) %VI 

178 to 184 -- vacant -- 

185 READ (PLU Price Read) No memory 

186 TARE 2 (Tare 2) (US model) No memory 

187 PRINT (Print) (US model) No memory 

188 TARE 3 (Tare 3) (US model) No memory 

189 DISPLAY 1 (Display 1) (US model) No memory 






195 PACK (Pack) (US model) No memory 

196 ID (Identification) (US model) No memory 




6-14 



197 

MANUAL CARD# (Manual Card No.) 

No memory 

(US model) 

198 OFFLINE AUTH (Off-line Auth) (US model) No memory 

199 STORE RECEIPT (Store Receipt) (US model) No memory 

200 POST AUTH (Post Auth) (US model) No memory 

201 VAT DISPLAY (QP model) No memory 

202 TX5/M (Tax 5 Modifier) (QP model) No memory 




206 VOUCHER AUTH (US model) No memory 

207 BALANCE INQUIRY (US model) No memory 

208 RELOAD (US model) No memory 

209 GIFT CARD BALANCE (US model) No memory 

210 GIFT CARD CASH OUT (US model) No memory 

SFKC Receipt Sample 

08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P76 

#060 076 → 076 

#085 026 → 099 

#086 027 → 120 

#073 016 → 088 

#074 017 → 104 

#075 018 → 102 

#076 019 → 103 

0003 13:47TM


• Ordinary Keyboard Type (US model) 

LOG/ 

RECEIPT 

RECEIPT 

ISSUE 

CUR 

RTN 

MDSE 

NS 

ALL 

VOID 

DOLL 

DISC 

HOLD/ 

RECALL 

STANDARD KEYBOARD 1 (auto-set by RAM CLEAR) 

# RF JF 

PO C @/FOR 

R/A 7 8 9 

%- EX 4 5 6 

VOID READ TX1/M 1 2 3 

ITEM 

CORR 

6-15 


1 6 11 16 21 26 

2 7 12 17 22 27 

3 8 13 18 23 28 

4 9 14 19 24 29 

5 10 15 20 25 30 

PLU TX2/M 0 00 • ST AT/TL CHECK Chg 

• Ordinary Keyboard Type (QP model) 

LOG/ 

RECEIPT 

RECEIPT 

ISSUE 

NS VAT # RF JF 

ALL 

VOID 

PO C X 

CUR - R/A 7 8 9 

RTN 

MDSE 

%- EX 4 5 6 

VOID READ TX1/M 1 2 3 

ITEM 

CORR 

CREDIT 

1 

1 6 11 16 21 26 

2 7 12 17 22 27 

3 8 13 18 23 28 

4 9 14 19 24 29 

5 10 15 20 25 30 

PLU TX2/M 0 00 • ST AT/TL CHECK CRT CPN


• Flat Keyboard Type (US model) 

STANDARD KEYBOARD 2 (auto-set by RAM CLEAR) 

1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 1 9 

2 10 18 26 34 42 50 58 2 10 

3 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 3 11 

4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 4 12 

5 13 21 29 37 45 53 61 5 13 

6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 6 14 

7 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 7 15 

8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 8 16 

PLU Preset-code keys 

• Flat Keyboard Type (QP model) 

1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 1 9 

2 10 18 26 34 42 50 58 2 10 

3 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 3 11 

4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 4 12 

5 13 21 29 37 45 53 61 5 13 

6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 6 14 

7 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 7 15 

8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 8 16 

PLU Preset-code keys 

6-16 

Department 

keys 

Department 

keys 


LOG/ 

RECEIPT RF JF NS EX 

RECEIPT 

ISSUE 

ALL 

VOID 

# 

PO 

DOLL 

DISC 

HOLD/ 

RECALL 

CUR R/A C @/FOR 

RTN 

MDSE 

%- TX1/M 

READ TX2/M 

CREDIT 

1 

7 8 9 Chg 

VOID 4 5 6 CHECK 

ITEM 

CORR 

1 2 3 ST 

PLU 0 00 • AT/TL 

LOG/ 

RECEIPT RF JF NS EX 

RECEIPT 

ISSUE # - %- TX1/M 

ALL 

VOID 

PO VAT READ TX2/M 

CUR R/A C X CPN 

RTN 

MDSE 

7 8 9 CRT 

VOID 4 5 6 CHECK 

ITEM 

CORR 

1 2 3 ST 

PLU 0 00 • AT/TL


6.5 RAM Allocation Setting (Submode 79) 

6-17 


This submode sets the capacity of the Expansion Memory, the number of cashiers, the number of 

PLUs the number of check tracks (customer files), and the number of data capture records. 

CONDITION After a Table Clear or a RAM clear 

OPERATION 


79 [X] 1 [ST] 0 [#] 

[AT/TL] 

Stand-alone designation 

2 [ST] | Codes to designate Expansion Memory | [#] 

1 digit 

0: No Expansion Memory (Standard Memory only) (Default) 

2: 2MB 

4: 4MB 

3 [ST] | Codes to designate System Setting | [#] 

US model: Max. 4 digits, 

QP model: Max. 3 digits 

(combination of 1,2, 3 and 4) see * below 

4 [ST] | Number of Cashiers | [#] 

Max. 2 digits 

5 [ST] | Number of PLUs | [#] 


6 [ST] | Number of Check Tracks | [#] 


7 [ST] | Number of Data Capture Records | [#] 


8 [ST] | Number of Negative Card Nos | [#] 

Max. 4 digits (US model only) 

(See ** for 

the value of 

each item.)


* Codes to designate System Setting: 

US model: Combine the following four codes (1 to4) in a maximum of 4 digits. 

QP model: Combine the following three codes (1 to3) in a maximum of 3 digits. 

For example, enter 12 to designate 1 and 2. 

1: Cashier Expansion Memory is used. 

2: PLU Inquiry Function is used. 

3: Check Track Expansion Memory is used. 

4: CVS Spec. is used (US model only) 

6-18 


NOTES: 1. Default Value (auto-set after a RAM Clear) is “2”. 

2. When no Expansion Memory is used, entering the code 1 or 3 then depressing the 

[#] key causes an error. 

3. To use the CVS spec., the Expansion Memory of 2MB or more is necessary. 

Furthermore, when the system setting code 4 (CVS spec.) is selected, all other 

system setting codes (1 to 3) are forcibly programmed. (US model only) 

** Values to be set for the Number of Cashiers, the Number of PLUs, the Number of Check 

Tracks, Number of Data Capture Records and Number of Negative Card Nos (US model only): 

Item 

(Number of:) 

Default Value 

(auto-set after a 

RAM Clear) 

Value range when 

Standard Memory is 

used 


Expansion Memory 

Is used 

Cashiers 15 1 to 15 1 to 99 

PLUs 5,000 

Check Tracks 

500 (US model) 

400 (QP model) 

0 to 5,000 (NOTE 1) 

0 to 1,500 (NOTE 2) 

0 to 65,000 (NOTE 3) 

0 to 1,000 0 to 3,000 

Data Capture 

Records 

0 0 0 to 65,000 

Negative Card Nos 

(US model only) 

0 0 0 to 3,000 

No setting for the Number of “Data Capture Records” and “Negative Card Nos (US model only)” will be 

possible unless the Expansion Memory is used. 

NOTES: 1. When using the PLU Inquiry Function. 

2. When not using the PLU Inquiry Function. 

3. For a system with the CVS spec. selected, value range with expansion memory is 0 

to 30,000. 

4. The minimum unit for setting the number of PLUs, Check Tracks, or Data Capture 

Records or Negative Card Nos. (US model only) is 100. 

5. Even when a large area remains to be unallocated in the RAM, setting of any item 

cannot exceed its value range specified in the table above. 

6. When any of the values already set are to be changed even during the entire setting 

operation sequence, complete the submode first by depressing the [AT/TL] key, 

then start the submode again from the first after executing the Table Clear or the 

RAM Clear. 

7. The Expansion Memory capacity must match the installed RAM capacity. When 

Check Tracks, Data Capturing, or Negative Card Nos (US model only) is used, 

select the corresponding System Option settings. 

8. When using the Cashier Expansion memory on Stand-alone Terminal or using the 

Floating Cashier System on Master/Satellite Terminal, select the Code Entry 

Method.


Setting Example) 

To allocate the RAM as in the following: 

Type of Terminal: Stand-alone Terminal 

Expansion Memory: No Expansion Memory (Code 0) 

System Setting: System Setting Code 2 is used. (Code 2) 

Number of Cashiers: 4 cashiers 

Number of PLUs: 4,000 PLUs 

Number of Check Tracks: 800 tracks (customer files) 

Number of Data Capture Records: 0 record 

Number of Negative Card Nos (US model): 0 record 

Key Operation: Mode Lock: BLIND, Enter 79 and depress [X] key. 

1 [ST] 0 [#] (Type of Terminal) 

2 [ST] 0 [#] (Expansion Memory) 

3 [ST] 2 [#] (System Setting) 

4 [ST] 4 [#] (Number of Cashiers) 

5 [ST] 4000 [#] (Number of PLUs) 

6 [ST] 800 [#] (Number of Check Tracks) 

7 [ST] 0 [#] (Number of Data Capture Records) 

8 [ST] 0[#] (Number of Negative Card Nos (US model)) 

[AT/TL] (To complete this Program) 

6.6 Table Clear (Submode 91) 

6-19 

6.6 Table Clear (Submode 91) 

This operation is used to clear all the programming data and sales data of the RAM allocation area 

(Cashiers, PLUs Check Tracks, Data Capture Records, and Negative Card Nos (US model)) at a time. 

CONDITION 

Any time outside a sale 

OPERATION 


91 [X] [AT/TL] 

08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P79 

#1 0:S/A 1:M/S 0 

#2 EX RAM 0 

#3 SYSTEM 2 

#4 CLERK 4 

#5 PLU 4000 

#6 C.T 800 

#7 TRAN 0 

#8 NEG CARD 0 

0009 14:03TM 

NOTES: 1. After a Table Clear operation, the RAM Allocation Setting (Submode 79) will be allowed. 

2. The default values of RAM Allocation are auto-set after a Table Clear operation. 

08-22-2003 FRI #0 

TABLE CLEAR 

P91 

0006 13:59TM


6-20 

6.7 System Option Programming (Submode 11 or 18) 


This operation is used to set the ECR’s basic features and selective functions to meet the requirement 

of the market and your user. 

CONDITION After Financial Daily Reset 

OPERATION 

For User System Options: Mode Lock: SET 11 [X] 

(Address No. 1 to No.10) 

For Dealer System Options: Mode Lock: SET 18 [X] 

(Address No. 1 to No. 29) 

For Dealer System Options: Mode Lock: BLIND 18 [X] 

(Address No. 1 to No. 49) 

Repeat for another Address No. 

| Address No. | [ST] | Bit Nos for “SET” | [#] [AT/TL] 

Enter a maximum of eight-digit number composed of Bit Nos whose status must be selected to 

the “SET” status in the Address. 

ex.) To set Bit No. 2 only ...................... Enter 2. 

To set Bits No. 2 and No. 3 ........... Enter 23. 

To set all the Bit Nos ..................... Enter 12345678 

To reset all the Bit Nos .................. Enter 0. 

NOTES: 1. Any bit No. with the “-- vacant --” item will be disregarded even if it is set. 

(However, if even set, it will not result in an error.) 

2. When a RAM Clear is completed, the status of each Bit No. is automatically set to the 

side marked with an asterisk in the STANDARD STATUS column of each SYSTEM 

OPTION TABLE shown on the following pages. Therefore, only the Bit status changes 

of the required Addresses may be entered according to your customer’s requirements. 

Setting Example) 

To set Address No. 1 with the following requirements: 

(Refer to the Address No. 1 table on the next page.) 

Bit No. 1: Time NON-PRINT (SET status) 

Bit No. 3: Subtotal NON-PRINT (SET status) 

Other bits will be selected to “RESET” status. 

Key Operation: Mode Lock to SET, enter 11, depress [X]. 

Enter 1 (Address No.), depress [ST]. 

Enter 13 (Bit Nos for SET), depress [#]. 

Depress [AT/TL] to end. 

08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P11 

#01---------------------------13 

0011


SYSTEM OPTION TABLE 

6-21 


Standard Bit Set (auto-set by RAM Clear) 

ADDRESS NO. CONTENTS US 4 

BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

1 NON-PRINT OPTION I 

ITEM SELECTIVE STATUS 

Time (on Sale Receipt, 

Report, Program 

Receipt) SET NON-PRINT 

Sale Item Count on 

each Sale Receipt 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET PRINT * * 


SET NON-PRINT 

Subtotal Amount print 

by [ST] key on Receipt 

and Journal SET NON-PRINT 

Taxable Total Amount 

print by [TXBL TL] key 

on Receipt and Journal 

(US model) 


RESET PRINT 

Customer Count for 

each Department on 

Department Reports SET NON-PRINT 

Sale % of each 

Department and Group, 

on Department and 

Group Reports (NOTE 2) 

Gross Profit of each 

Department, on 

Department Reports 

(QP model) 

SET NON-PRINT * 



SET NON-PRINT 

RESET PRINT * 

SET NON-PRINT 

Sales Person on Sale 

Receipt and Remote 

Slip SET NON-PRINT 


QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

Both Bit 5 & 6 RESET: 

Prints sales % of each 

Department and Group 

“Department Gross 

Profit Read Reports” 

can be issued 

regardless of this status 

NOTE 1: For QP model, this bit status selection is also applied to the following cases in which the subtotal amount is automatically printed. 

• Sale Finalization, % Operation, Amount Discount, Haus Bon and Special Rounding Spec. 

NOTE 2: • The sale % of a department = (That Department) / (Sum of Positive Department) 

(When the “Sum of Positive Department” is zero or negative, the sale % of 0% will be printed.) 

• The sale % of an HASH Department and a negative Status Department is not printed.



6-22 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 NON-PRINT OPTION II 


Discount % Discount 

Memory to Department 

RESET PRINT 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

Report SET NON-PRINT * * 

2 -- vacant -- 




6 

7 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

INPS 1 for the Charge 

Posting on Remote Slip 

RESET PRINT ALL ITEMS * 

Printer (QP model) SET INPS 1 

INPS 2 for the Charge 

Posting on Remote Slip 

RESET PRINT ALL ITEMS * 

Printer (QP model) SET INPS 2 


RESET * * 

SET 

QP 1 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOE 2 below 

(INPS = Item Not Print 

on Slip) 

NOTE 3 below 

This bit must always be 

RESET 

NOTE 1: Selection of printing Discount / % Discount, Returned Merchandise, Store Coupon, Item Correct, Void, REG Minus 

SET: Non-print 

RESET: Print (However, memory for which the non-print is selected in Report Item Print/Non-print setting (Submode 28) is 

not printed.) 

NOTE 2: If set, print items except the following will not be printed on the Remote Slip Printer in the charge posting operation. 

PB+, PB-, Check Track No., CRT, PB R/A, PB PO and TRF 

NOTE 3: If set, print items except NEW BAL will not be printed on the Remote Slip Printer in the charge posting operation. Trailer Line and 

NEW BAL will be printed on one line.



6-23 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

3 OPTIONAL FUNCTION I 

Fraction Rounding 

ROUND UP 


ROUND DOWN 


STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET Follow Bit 2 status * * 

SET ROUND UP 

RESET ROUND OFF * * 

SET ROUND DOWN 

[TXBL TL] key before 

finalizing a sale 

RESET NOT COMPULSORY * 

(US model) SET COMPULSORY 

[ST] key before 



(QP model) SET COMPULSORY 

Credit Balance in REG 

mode 

Drawer Opening on 

taking Financial Reports 

Split Package Pricing 

Fraction Round-up 

Method 

(US model) 

RESET PROHIBITED * * 

SET ALLOWED 

RESET OPEN * 

SET NOT OPEN 

RESET ROUND UP PRODUCT * 

SET ROUND UP UNIT PRICE 

Quantity Extension 

(Multiplication) order 

RESET UNIT PRICE x QUANTITY 

(QP model) SET QUANTITY x UNIT PRICE 

Manager Intervention 

for entering Negative 

Departments/PLUs in 

REG mode 


for finalizing Negativebalance 

Sales in REG 

mode 

RESET NOT REQUIRED * * 

SET REQUIRED 


* 

QP 6 

REMARKS 

If both RESET, it will be 

ROUND OFF. 

(If both SET, it will be 

ROUND DOWN.) 

See also NOTE 1 on 

the next page. 

See NOTE 2 on the 

next page. 

See NOTE 3 on the 

next page. 

SET REQUIRED Except when finalized 

by [AT/TL]


6-24 


NOTE 1: The selective status of the fraction rounding here applies to quantity extension, %+, and %-calculations. The fraction resulted 

from any tax % calculations (VAT or Add-on Type) or selective itemizer % calculations will be ROUNDED OFF (no alternative 

rounding method is provided). For fraction rounding of scale entry calculations, selections are provided in Address 35. 

NOTE 2: US model: 

The “Credit Balance” means that amount entries through [DOLL DISC], [VOID], [STR CPN], [VND CPN], [BTL RTN] will result in 

over-subtraction of the subtotal amount the time of the entry through any of those keys. If the status SET (ALLOWED) is selected, 

over-subtraction using these keys will be allowed in the REG mode. The [RTN MDSE] key and negative departments/PLUs are 

not subject to this “Credit Balance” status selection. The Credit Balance is always allowed in the MGR or - mode. 

QP model: 

The "Credit Balance" means that amount entries through [-] (Amount Discount), [VOID], [STR CPN], [VND CPN], [BTL RTN] 

(Inside-sale Type) will result in over-subtraction of the subtotal amount at the time of the entry through any of those keys. If the 

status SET (ALLOWED) is selected, over-subtraction using these keys will be allowed in the REG mode. The [RTN MDSE] key 

and negative departments/PLUs are not subject to this "Credit Balance" status selection. 

The Credit Balance is always allowed in the MGR or - mode. 


Example) When the price of a whole package is $1.00 which contains 3 tomatoes, a customer buys 2 tomatoes: 

ROUND UP PRODUCT: $1.00 x 2/3 = $0.6666 ... → round up to $0.67 

ROUND UP UNIT PRICE: $1.00 x 1/3 = $0.3333 ... → 2 x $0.34 (rounded-up price of 1 tomato) = $0.68 

The two methods of calculation above are applicable to the portion of split items within one whole package. When Split Package 

Pricing is operated on items exceeding one package portion, the portion of the whole package will be calculated as one whole 

package and the rest items exceeding the whole package portion will be subject to whichever of the two methods above.



6-25 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 OPTIONAL FUNCTION II 

Zero-skip in All 

Department and 

Department Group 

Reports 

Zero-skip in PLU 

Reports 


Zero-skip on Financial 

and Cashier Reports 


5 

6 

7 

Cashier No. Display on 

Operator Display 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET Print all Departments data * 

SET Zero-skip * 

RESET Print all PLUs data 

SET Zero-skip * * 

RESET Print all items data 

SET Zero-skip * * 

RESET 

SET 

RESET Not display * * 

SET Display (NOTE 1) 

PLU Price Level Display 

on Operator Display 

RESET Not display * 

(QP model) SET Display (NOTE 2) 

NET/GROSS Process in 

DP/PLU memory 


RESET GROSS Process 

SET NET Process * 

RESET * * 

SET 

QP 23 

REMARKS 

Departments/Groups 

with no sale will be 

skipped in the report. 

When both SET or both 

RESET, Department 

No. will be displayed. 

(QP model) 

NOTE 3 on the next 

page 

NOTE 1: If SET, the Cashier No. of the signed-ON cashier is always displayed. It will be displayed on the Department Code position (2 

digits). This bit must be SET in case the Cashier Key is programmed by SFKC programming for the convenience of operation. 

NOTE 2: If SET, the PLU Price Level is always displayed instead of the Department Code.


(Revision Date: Dec 14, 2007) 



SET Status: NET process ---- 

Subtracts from the department/PLU memory on the discount on line items, %- on line items, dollar discount 

on subtotal, %- on subtotal, and SI/TL (special discount) operations. 

Registering more than 301 items causes an error. 

RESET Status: GROSS process ---- 

Does not subtract from the department/PLU memory on the dollar discount on subtotal, %- on subtotal, and 

SI/TL (special discount) operations. 

Example) 

1) When the %- on subtotal operation is performed 

Setting Status: 

Preset Price Link Department Tax Status 

PLU1 $1,000 Dept1 Non taxable 

PLU2 $2,000 Dept2 Non taxable 

Operation: 

[PLU1] 

[PLU2] 

[ST] 

20 [%-] 

[AT/TL] 

When BIT 7 is RESET: 

Department sales are $1,000 for Dept1 and $2,000 for Dept2. 

PLU sales are $1,000 for PLU1 and $2,000 for PLU2. 

When BIT 7 is SET: 

Department sales are $800 for Dept1 and $1,600 for Dept2. 

PLU sales are $800 for PLU1 and $1,600 for PLU2. 

Report Print: 

BIT 7 is RESET. BIT 7 is SET. 

PLU Report 

PLU1 1,000 800 

PLU2 

Department Report 

2,000 1,600 

Dept1 1,000 800 

Dept2 

Financial Report 

2,000 1,600 

NS 3,000 2,400 

%-ST 600 600 

MEDIA TL 2,400 2,400 

SI TL 0 0 

2) When the SI/TL (special discount) operation is performed. 

Operation example 1: 


Preset Price Link Department PLU Status (*1) Tax Status 

PLU3 $1,000 Dept3 SI 1 (20%) Non taxable 

PLU4 $2,000 Dept4 SI 1 (20%) Non taxable 

*1: In the PLU Table Programming (Submode 4), Code 2 of Status Code 1 is set to ON. 

Operation: 

[PLU3] 

[PLU4] 

[SI1/TL] 

[AT/TL] 

When BIT 7 is RESET: 

Department sales are $1,000 for Dept3 and $2,000 for Dept4. 

PLU sales are $1,000 for PLU3 and $2,000 for PLU4. 

When BIT 7 is SET: 

Department sales are $800 for Dept3 and $1,600 for Dept4. 

PLU sales are $800 for PLU3 and $1,600 for PLU4. 

6-26


Report Print: 


PLU Report 

PLU3 1,000 800 

PLU4 


2,000 1,600 

Dept3 1,000 800 

Dept4 


2,000 1,600 

NS 3,000 2,400 

%-ST 0 0 

MEDIA TL 2,400 2,400 

SI TL 600 600 

Operation example 2: 


Preset Price Status Tax Status 

DEPT2 $10.00 SI 1 (10%) Tax1 (10%) 

DEPT3 $20.00 SI 1 (10%) Non taxable 

Operation: Operation: 

[DEPT2] [DEPT3] 

[SI1/TL] [SI1/TL] 

[AT/TL] [AT/TL] 

DPT2 10.00TS 

SI1 TL -1.00T 

TAX 0.90 

CASH 9.90 

6-27 


BIT 7 is RESET. BIT 7 is SET. BIT 7 is RESET. BIT 7 is SET. 

Department Report Department Report 

DEPT2 10.00 9.00 DEPT2 

DEPT3 DEPT3 20.00 18.00 

Financial Report Financial Report 

TAX 0.90 0.90 TAX -2.00 0.00 

NS 10.90 9.90 NS 19.80 18.00 

%-ST 0.00 0.00 %-ST 0.00 0.00 

MEDIA TL 9.90 9.90 MEDIA TL 17.80 18.00 

SI TL 0.00 1.00 SI TL 2.00 2.00 

Operation: 

[DEPT2] 

[DEPT3] 

[SI1/TL] 

[AT/TL] 

DPT2 10.00TS 

DPT3 20.00 S 

SI1 TL -3.00T 

TAX 0.90 

CASH 27.90 



DEPT2 10.00 9.00 

DEPT3 20.00 18.00 


TAX 0.70 0.90 

NS 30.70 27.90 

%-ST 0.00 0.00 

MEDIA TL 27.70 27.90 

SI TL 3.00 3.00 

DPT3 20.00 S 

SI1 TL -2.00T 

CASH 18.00


(Revision Date: Dec 14, 2007) 


< Supplementary explanation > 

Discount process for the dollar discount/%- on subtotal and SI/TL (special discount) operations 

• The department code and amount are stored in the buffer on the department entry. The PLU code, link department, and 

amount are stored in the buffer on the PLU entry. 

On the returned merchandise operation, a transaction is returned from the buffer if possible. 

• On the dollar discount/%- on subtotal operations, the discount calculation is performed for the department and PLU which are 

stored in the buffer. Then, the discount/%- data affects each department and PLU by the sale finalization. 

For the financial memory, the discount and %- operations are processed into the item memory (%- on line items, dollar 

discount on line items). 

• Registering more than 301 items causes an error. At this time, an error message “ITEM LIMIT OVER” is displayed. 

• The discount process for the %- on subtotal is performed as follows. 

Step 1: An item of which amount (not unit price) is highest in the items subject to discount will be rounded. 

When there are two-or-more items of which amount are highest, the first entered item will be rounded. 

If an item is entered twice or more, the total of them is rounded. 

Step 2: A discount calculation is performed for the items which are not subject to rounding. 

(Fraction rounding: fixed to round off to the whole number) 

Step 3: (Discount amount) – (Total discount amount of items which are not subject to rounding) 

= (Discount amount of an item which is subject to rounding) 

(Discount calculation) 

PLU Department Unit price Q’ty Amount 

6-28 

Amount subject 

to rounding 

Discount 

calculation 

Result of 

round off 

01 02 120 2 240 240 7.2→ 7 (1) 

02 01 160 3 480 480 14.4→ 14 (2) 

03 03 260 1 260 520 16 (5) 

-- 04 220 2 440 440 13.2→ 13 (3) 

05 02 520 1 520 520 15.6→ 16 (4) 

03 03 260 1 260 

Subtotal 2200 (1)+(2)+(3)+(4) 50 

Discount 3% 66 Rounding 66-50=16 

Total 2134 

∗ As PLU03 was entered twice, their total amount is figured out. (Amount 520) 

∗ Between PLU03 and PLU05 of which amounts are highest, the last entered item PLU03 is rounded. 

∗ The discount calculation is performed for the remaining items. 

(Discount amount) – (Total discount amount of items which are not subject to rounding) 

= (Discount amount of an item which is subject to rounding) 

(Discount process on the department/PLU) 

PLU Discount Department Discount 

01 Discount (1) 7 01 Discount (2) 14 

02 Discount (2) 14 02 Discount (1)+(4) 23 



Total 66 

NOTE: When it is possible to perform a discount operation subtracting an amount more than subtotal by the system option 

setting, the department memory would be negative according to the sale transaction.


6-29 





BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

5 SELECTIVE ITEMIZER CONTROL 


SI 1 Total Amount on 


Slip on [SI1/TL] 

Depression 

[SI1/TL] Key before 


SI 1 Function as Special 

Discount (%- function) 


Charge (%+ function) 



Slip on [SI2/TL] 

Depression 







RESET PRINT (and DISPLAY) 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

SET NON-PRINT (DISPLAY only) * * 

RESET NOT COMPULSORY * * 

SET COMPULSORY 


SET %- (subtract from sale) 

RESET Not affect Sale Total * * 

SET %+ (add to sale) 


SET NON-PRINT (DISPLAY only) * * 




SET %- (subtract from sale) 

RESET Not affect Sale Total * * 

SET %+ (add to sale) 

QP 15 

REMARKS 

Will print on Journal in 

either status. 

See NOTE 2 below. 

The [SI1/TL] key 

depression will 

calculates and finalize 

the SI 1 content. 

If both RESET, the SI 1 

content will not affect 

sales total at all (only 

display, print , or 

neither). 

(If both SET, it will 

result in %+ function) 


Refer to Bit 1 to 4 

descriptions. 

NOTE 1: If Bit No.3 SET is selected, the preset % rate (to be set in a separate programming operation described later) will automatically 

subtract from the sale total. 

If Bit No.4 SET status is selected, the preset % rate will automatically add to the sale total. 

If no preset % rate is set for the SI, 100% will be the rate (all SI amount). 

If both Bit No.3 and No.4 are RESET, the following will display (and print if Bit No.1 is SET) without affecting the sale total: 

• If % rate is preset, the amount calculated by the % rate. 

• If % rate is not preset, the entire SI total amount (i.e. same as 100% preset). 

NOTE 2: The SI 1 total amount will print disregarding the Bit No.1 status selection when Bit No.3 or No.4 is SET. (The same is applied to 

Bit No.5 status selection as to SI 2 Total Print when Bit No.7 or No.8 is SET.)



6-30 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

6 REMOTE SLIP PRINTER CONTROL 


Remote Slip Print 

Compulsory for any PB 

entry in REG or MGR 

mode 

Code No. Entry before 

[CHECK NO.] Key 

Print Selection by 

[CHECK NO.] Key 

depression 

(QP model) 

Number of Amount Print 

Lines in France Cheque 

Print 

(QP model) 





STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 





RESET ENDORSEMENT PRINT * 

SET FRANCE CHEQUE PRINT 

RESET ONE-LINE PRINT * 

SET TWO-LINE PRINT 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE below 

NOTE: This is applied to the Previous Balance entry whether it is PB Manual Entry type or Check Track (Customer File) type.



6-31 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

7 OPTIONAL FUNCTION III 

Display Message 

Method 


Display Message in the 

REG and MGR modes 

Display Message During 

Signed-ON status 

RESET 16 CHARACTERS HELD 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

SET SCROLLING DISPLAY * * 

RESET NON-DISPLAY * * 

SET DISPLAY 

RESET NON-DISPLAY * * 

QP 1 

REMARKS 

The message to be displayed 

is programmable, and it will 

be displayed in the Dot 

Windows. 

NOTE 1 below 

SET DISPLAY After the sale is 

finalized 

Negative Card Check 

Inquiry 

RESET NOT INQUIRED * 

(US model) SET INQUIRED 

Code 3 of Department RESET Tare 3 Entry 

Status 2 and Code 2 of 

PLU Status 2 SET Net to Selective Itemizer 4 * 

Cashier Sign ON/OFF 

and Sign IN/OUT 

Receipts SET NOT ISSUE 

Drawer on Sign 

ON/OFF by Cashier 

8 Media Pick Up Warning 

RESET PRINT and ISSUE * * 

RESET NOT OPEN * * 

SET OPEN 

RESET DISPLAY and ALARM * * 

SET DISPLAY only 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: The “Display Message” here indicates the message to be programmed in Submode 31. The message is displayed immediately 

when the Mode Lock is turned to the LOCK position, regardless of the status selection here. (The message is to be displayed in 

REG or MGR mode after a sale is finalized and no key-in operation takes place for 30 seconds.) 

NOTE 2: SET status: Net to Selective Itemizer 4 is selected for Code 3 of department status 2 and Code 2 of PLU status 2. 

RESET status: Tare 3 entry compulsion is selected for Code 3 of department status 2 and Code 2 of PLU status 2.



6-32 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

8 SCANNING OPTION I 


Conversion of 

Shortened Type UPC-E 

of Barcodes SET Converted to a 13-digit code 

Selects a number of 

digits for read No. 13 

department code 

(QP model) 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET Padding preceding digits with0 * * 

RESET 2-digit * 

SET 3-digit 

Permits or inhibits read 

code No. 12/13 

RESET Inhibit * 

(QP model) SET Permit 

Select read code No. 12 

or 15 

RESET No. 12 * 

(QP model) SET No. 15 

GEN code (read code 

No. 14) 

RESET No. 3 * 

(QP model) SET No. 14 

EAN code Coupon Flag 

98 

RESET Normal * 

(QP model) SET Bottle Return 

EAN code Coupon Flag 

99 

RESET Normal * 

(QP model) SET Bottle Return 

Price handling of read 

code No.8 with 

F1F2=20 

(QP model) 

RESET Price of barcode x 1 * 

SET Price of barcode x 10 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE below 

When Bit 8 of Address 

24 is SET, this option 

becomes ineffective. 

When Bit 8 of Address 

24 is SET, this option 

becomes ineffective. 

This selection is effective 

when Bit 1 of Address 25 is 

SET (France) and Bit 8 of 

Address 25 is RESET (Non- 

PLU). 

NOTE: This status selection is applied to the Read Code Nos. 2 and 11, and determines the way to convert the shortened code into a 13digit 

code. 

Read Code No. 2 RESET (padding preceding digits with 0): 

Shortened Code = X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 → Converted = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 

SET (Converted to a 13 digit code) 

When X6 = 5 to 9: 0 0 0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 0 0 0 0 X6 

When X6 = 4: 0 0 0 X1 X2 X3 X4 0 0 0 0 0 X5 

When X6 = 3: 0 0 0 X1 X2 X3 0 0 0 0 0 X4 X5 

When X6 = 0 to 2: 0 0 0 X1 X2 X6 0 0 0 0 X3 X4 X5 

Read Code No. 11 RESET (padding preceding digits with 0): 

Shortened Code == X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 → Converted = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 

SET (Converted to a 13 digit code) 

0 0 0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 0 0 0 0 X6



6-33 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 SELECTIVE ITEMIZER CONTROL 




Slip by the [SI3/TL] 

Depression 









Slip by the [SI4/TL] 

Depression 








SET NON-PRINT (DISPLAY only) * 



RESET Follow Bit 4 status * 

SET %- (subtract from sale total) 

RESET Not affect Sale Total * 

SET %+ (add to sale total) 


SET NON-PRINT (DISPLAY only) * 




SET %- (subtract from sale total) 

RESET Not affect Sale Total * 

SET %+ (add to sale total) 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

QP 

REMARKS 

It is printed on the 

journal regardless of 

this bit status. 


If SET, a sale finalization 

prior to the [SI3/TL] key is 

prohibited in the [SI/M] 

key operation. 

If both RESET, the SI 3 

content will not affect 

sales total at all (only 

display, print , or 

neither). 

(If both SET, it will 

result in %+ function.) 


Refer to Bit 1 to 4 

descriptions. 

NOTE 1: The SI 3 total amount is printed regardless of Bit No.1 status selection when either Bit No.3 or No.4 is SET. (This function is also 

applied to Bit No.5 status selection (SI4 total amount print) when Bit No.7 or No.8 is SET.) 

NOTE 2: If Bit No.3 SET is selected, the preset % rate is subtracted from the sale total. 

If Bit No.4 SET is selected, the preset % rate is added to the sale total. 

If no % rate is preset to the SI and affects to the sale total, the rate is 100%. 

If both Bit No.3 and No.4 are RESET, the following is displayed (and printed if Bit No.1 is RESET) without affecting the sale total: 

• If % rate is preset, the amount calculated by the % rate is displayed. 

• If % rate is not preset, the entire SI total amount (i.e. same as 100% preset) is displayed. 

-- Address No. 10 is vacant. --



6-34 




BIT 

NO. 

11 NON-PRINT OPTION III 


2 

3 

4 

5 

6 


STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET * * 

SET 

Check No. Code in 

Endorsement Printing 

RESET PRINT * 

(US model) SET NON-PRINT 

Date/Time Line in 


RESET PRINT * 

(US model) SET NON-PRINT 

Sale Total Amount in 



SET NON-PRINT 

[C] (Clear) Key Counter 

on Reports 

RESET COUNT 

(QP model) SET NON-COUNT 

Financial and Cashier 

Daily Read Counter on 

Reports 

(QP model) 


8 

RESET PRINT 

SET NON-PRINT 

RESET * 

SET 

[C] (Clear) Key on 

Journal 

RESET PRINT (NOTE 3 below) 

(QP model) SET NON-PRINT 

* 

* 

* 

QP 568 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 


When SET is selected, the check No. code is not printed on the endorsement. 

If EFT specification is being activated, the check No., EFT license Number (LIC#), and EFT authorization code (APR#) are not 

printed. 


When SET is selected, the cashier code, consecutive No., date and time are not printed. 

NOTE 3: QP model: 

The descriptor “CLEAR” (programmable) is printed on Journal every time the [C] key is operated in the REG mode to clear a 

numeric or declaration key error. It will not be printed on a [C] key depression to clear an error condition. In the MGR or - mode, 

this print will not be recorded, not will appear on Receipt or Remote Slip Printer in any mode. 

- - Address Nos. 12 and 13 are vacant. - -



6-35 




BIT 

NO. 

14 MANAGER INTERVENTION 






6 

7 


STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 


for the PLU Stock Read 

RESET NOT REQUIRED * 

(QP model) SET REQUIRED 


for the PLU Price Read 



SET REQUIRED 

RESET * * 

SET 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: If SET status is selected, the [STOCK] key operation (PLU Stock Read) in the REG mode is prohibited. The PLU Stock Read 

operation is always allowed in the - and MGR modes. 

NOTE 2: If SET status is selected, the [READ] key operation (PLU Price Read) in the REG mode is prohibited. The PLU Price Read 

operation is always allowed in the - and MGR modes. 

-- Address No. 15 is vacant --



6-36 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

16 OPTIONAL FUNCTION IV 

Date of Birth Entry 

before [ID] Key 

Depression 

(US model) 

Austria Spec. 

Read Code No. 8 

Standard 

(QP model) 

Austria Spec. 


Option 1 

(QP model) 

Austria Spec. 


Option 2 

(QP model) 

Austria Spec. 


Option 3 

(QP model) 

Netherlands Spec. 


Standard 

(QP model) 

Netherlands Spec. 


Option 1 

(QP model) 

Belgium Spec. 

F1F2 = 29 Code 

(Option 1) 

(QP model) 

Belgium Spec. 

F1F2 = 29 Code 

(Option 2) 

(QP model) 




STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET * 

SET ADOPTED 

RESET * 

SET ADOPTED 

RESET * 

SET ADOPTED 

RESET * 

SET ADOPTED 

RESET * 

SET ADOPTED 

RESET * 

SET ADOPTED 

RESET * 

SET Effective only for X1 = 0 to 3, 9 

RESET * 

SET Effective only for X1 = 5, 8 

NOTE 1: If RESET status is selected, the [ID] key depression will be allowed regardless of the date of birth entry. 

If SET status is selected, the [ID] key depression will be allowed only after the date of birth entry. 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 


page. 


page. 


page. 


page. 


page. 


page. 


page. 


page.


6-37 


NOTE 2: Bit 1:If SET, the Austria Spec. Standard is adopted and the process of the read code No. 8 is changed as follows. 

X1 to Xn: Merchandise Code, C/D: Check Digit (Unit Price, Whole), P1 to Pn: Unit Price, 

W1 to Wn: Weight or Unit Price, C1 to Cn: Quantity 

F1F2 = 20 F1F2X1X2X3X4X5X6X7X8X9X10C/D 

F1F2 = 21, 24, 27 F1F2X1X2X3X4C/DP1P2P3P4P5C/D With Unit Price Check Digit 

F1F2 = 25, 26 F1F2X1X2X3X4C/DC1C2C3C4C5C/D With Quantity Check Digit (C1C2 = 00) 

F1F2 = 28, 29 F1F2X1X2X3X4C/DW1W2W3W4W5C/D With Weight Check Digit 

Bit 2:If SET, the Austria Spec. Option 1 is adopted and the process of the read code No. 8 is changed as follows. 

X1 to Xn: Merchandise Code, C/D: Check Digit (Unit Price, Whole), P1 to Pn: Unit Price 



F1F2 = 21, 27 F1F2X1X2X3X4C/DP1P2P3P4P5C/D With Unit Price Check Digit 

F1F2 = 22, 23, 24 F1F2X1X2X3X4X5 P1P2P3P4P5C/D Without Unit Price Check Digit 







F1F2 = 21, 27 F1F2X1X2X3X4X5 W1W2W3W4W5C/D Without Weight Check Digit 








F1F2 = 21, 27 F1F2X1X2X3X4X5 W1W2W3W4W5C/D Without Weight Check Digit 



F1F2 = 28, 29 F1F2X1X2X3X4X5 C1C2C3C4C5C/D Without Quantity Check Digit (C1C2 = 00) 

Bit 5:If SET, the Netherlands Spec. Standard is adopted and the process of the read code No. 8 is changed as follows. 



F1F2 = 20, 25, 26 F1F2X1X2X3X4X5X6X7X8X9X10C/D 

F1F2 = 21, 22, 27 F1F2X1X2X3X4C/DP1P2P3P4P5C/D With 5-digit Unit Price Check Digit 

F1F2 = 24 F1F2X1X2X3X4X5C/DP1P2P3P4C/D With 4-digit Unit Price Check Digit 


Bit 6:If SET, the Netherlands Spec. Option 1 is adopted and the process of the read code No. 8 is changed as follows. 



F1F2 = 20, 25, 26 F1F2X1X2X3X4X5X6X7X8X9X10C/D 

F1F2 = 23 F1F2X1X2X3X4X5C/DP1P2P3P4C/D With 4-digit Unit Price Check Digit 


Bit 7:If SET, the Belgium Spec. Option 1 is adopted and the process of F1F2 = 29 of the read code No. 8 is changed as 

follows. 

This bit selection is effective when the Address 25 - Bit 3 is set. 



F1F2 = 29 F1F2X1X2X3X4X5 P1P2P3P4P5C/D Without Unit Price Check Digit 

Entry is allowed in case of X1 = 0 to 3, 9. 

Bit 8:If SET, the Belgium Spec. Option 2 is adopted and the process of F1F2 = 29 of the read code No. 8 is changed as 

follows. 

This bit selection is effective when the Address 25 - Bit 3 is set. 



F1F2 = 29 F1F2X1X2X3X4X5X6 P1P2P3P4C/D Without Unit Price Check Digit 

Entry is allowed in case of X1 = 5, 8.



6-38 



ADDRESS NO. CONTENTS US 

BIT 

NO. 

17 

PLU PRICE SHIFT 

(QP model only) 

STANDARD 

STATUS 


US QP 


RESET 

SET 

* 



4 Price Shift Function 





RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET HOLD 

SET ONE-TIME 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

* 

QP 4 

REMARKS 

NOTE below 

NOTE: RESET: When the [2nd PRICE] or [3rd PRICE] key is pressed, second or third price level is held until the [1st PRICE] key is 

pressed. 

SET: When the [2nd PRICE] or [3rd PRICE] key is pressed, second or third price level is active for the next PLU entry only. 

Then first price level is automatically regained. 

- - Address No. 18 is vacant. - -



6-39 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

19 

VALIDATION 


STANDARD 

STATUS 


US QP 

Single-Validation or 

RESET SINGLE-VALIDATION * 

Multi-Validation 

SET MULTI-VALIDATION 

2 Date Print 

3 

4 

Consecutive No. (of 

Receipt) Print 

Total Validation (after 

[TXBL TL] key) 

5 Cashier Name Print 

6 Register No. Print 

7 Time Print 


RESET PRINT * 

SET NON-PRINT 

RESET PRINT * 

SET NON-PRINT 

RESET NON-PRINT * 

SET PRINT 

RESET PRINT * 

SET NON-PRINT 

RESET PRINT * 

SET NON-PRINT 

RESET PRINT * 

SET NON-PRINT 

RESET * 

SET 

QP 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: “SINGLE-VALIDATION” means that validation of the same item can be printed only once. (A second attempt to print the same 

item will result in an error.) 

“MULTI-VALIDATION” means that validation of the same item may be printed any number of times by alternating the validation 

slip and re-depressing the [VALIDATE] key. 

NOTE 2: If RESET status (Prints TAXABLE TOTAL amount) is selected, the validation print operation after a [TXBL TL] key depression 

will print Taxable Total amount of the sale items so far entered on the validation slip, and thereafter additional items, if any, be 

entered. 

If SET status (Prints SALE TOTAL amount) is selected, the validation print operation after a [TXBL TL] key depression will print 

the Sale Total amount (including taxes) on the validation slip, and thereafter only the finalization of the sale is expected. (No other 

operations will be accepted.)



6-40 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

20 

TAX CONTROL I 


STANDARD 

STATUS 


US QP 

VAT 1 or Add-on Tax 1 

RESET CLOSE * 

Open/Close 

SET OPEN 


Open/Close 


Open/Close 


Open/Close 


Open/Close 


Open/Close 


Open/Close 


Open/Close 

RESET CLOSE * 

SET OPEN 

RESET CLOSE * 

SET OPEN 

RESET CLOSE * 

SET OPEN 

RESET CLOSE * 

SET OPEN 

RESET CLOSE * 

SET OPEN 

RESET CLOSE * 

SET OPEN 

RESET CLOSE * 

SET OPEN 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE: When SET status is selected on the register with Add-on Tax feature adopted, Tax 1 through Tax 8 are open. 

When Taxable status (SET status) is set to the [-], [%+], [%-], [VND CPN], and [BTL RTN] keys in the Key Status Programming, 

Tax 1 through Tax 8 are processed according to this bit status (Open/Close). VAT feature is not subject to this bit status.



6-41 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

21 TAX CONTROL II 

Multiple Taxes 

Consolidated or 

Separate Print on 

Receipt 


RESET CONSOLIDATED PRINT * 

SET SEPARATE PRINT 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 


SET SEPARATE PRINT 

Tax Total Amount on 

Receipt 


(QP model) SET PRINT 

Taxable Total Print on 

Receipt (for VAT 

feature) 

(QP model) 


SET PRINT 

Inclusive Tax 

Calculation Method 

RESET (Price x Rate) ÷ (1 + Rate) * 

(US model) SET (Price x Rate) 

VAT Calculation Method 

(VAT = ) 

RESET (Price x Rate) ÷ (1 + Rate) * 

(QP model) SET (Price x Rate) 

Tax Type: VAT or Addon 

TAX 

RESET VAT * 

(QP model) SET ADD-ON TAX 


7 

8 

VAT Status for 

Transaction Date 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET 4 VAT * 

SET 8 VAT 

NET Total Print on 

Receipt 


(QP model) SET PRINT 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

When Add-on Tax 

feature is selected at 

Bit No. 5, taxes always 

be printed. 

“Taxable Total” is the 

sale total portion in 

which VATs are 

contained. 

NOTE 2 below 


page 


page 

This bit status selection 

is effective only when 

VAT specification has 

been selected. 

NOTE 1: If RESET status is selected on the register with the inclusive tax feature adopted, amount of (exclusive tax + inclusive tax) will be 

printed. 

NOTE 2: This bit status selection is effective only when the inclusive tax feature has been selected.


6-42 


NOTE 3: When the Add-on Tax feature is selected: 

1) The [TX1/M], [TX2/M], [TX3/M], and [TX4/M] keys can reverse the respective Tax status of Departments and PLUs. 

Reversing the Tax status of [% +], [% -], and [ ] is also possible. (Neither the [TX1/M], [TX2/M], [TX3/M], nor [TX4/M] keys 

can be used when the VAT feature is selected.) 

2) When a taxable item (subject to any of Tax 1 to Tax 4) is entered in a sale, the symbol “T” is printed to the right of the item 

amount. 

NOTE 4: This bit status is applied to the Department/PLU, %, Amount Discount, Bottle Return, Store Coupon, and Vendor Coupon entries. 

RESET: 4-VAT status 

SET: 8-VAT status 

Bit 

RESET 

Selective Status 

SET 

0 VAT 1 (Tax 1) VAT 1 (Tax 1) 




4 VAT 5 (Tax 5) 

5 SI 1 (*2) VAT 6 (Tax 6) 

6 SI 1 (*2) VAT 7 (Tax 7) 

7 Negative Department (*2) VAT 8 (Tax 8) 

*1: Tax 1 through Tax 8: Add-on Tax feature is selected. 

*2: Applied to the Department/PLU entries only.



6-43 




BIT 

NO. 

22 

TAX CONTROL III 


STANDARD 

STATUS 


US QP 


RESET 

SET 

* 






7 Tax 3 Status 

8 Tax 4 Status 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET Exclusive Tax * 

SET Inclusive Tax 

RESET Exclusive Tax * 

SET Inclusive Tax 

NOTE: The inclusive tax feature is unavailable in the area where the food stamp is used. 

QP 

REMARKS 

NOTE below



6-44 




BIT 

NO. 

23 

OPTIONAL FUNCTION V 


STANDARD 

STATUS 


US QP 


RESET 

SET 

* 


3 

Foreign Currency 

Tendering Amount Print 

on Endorsement 

Slip/France Cheque 






RESET * 

SET 

RESET In Domestic Currency * 

SET In Foreign Currency 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE below 

NOTE: SET: When a foreign currency tendering operation is performed, the tendered foreign currency will be printed on an 

endorsement slip/France cheque by its tendered value. 

RESET: When a foreign currency tendering operation is performed, tendered foreign currency will be printed on an 

endorsement slip/France cheque by a value converted into the domestic currency.



6-45 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

24 SCANNING OPTION II 


Print Selection of PLU 

scanned code 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET NON-PRINT * * 

SET PRINT 

Correspondence with 

C/D from a scanner 

(UPC-E) SET With no C/D 


4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

RESET With C/D * * 

RESET * * 

SET 

Print Selection of PLU 

code (Receipt) 


(US model) SET PRINT 

France Spec. 

F1F2=20 Code Process 

RESET Unit Price Not Converted * 

(QP model) SET Obeys Bit 7 Status 

Germany Spec. 

414, 419 Code Process 

RESET No.3 * 

(QP model) SET No.16 

France Spec. 

Euro Conversion of 

RESET 

Not Converted to Euro 

(378 Code 5-digit Unit Price) 

Scanned Unit Price 

(QP model) 

SET 

Converted to Euro 

(378 Code 4-digit Unit Price) 

Euro Coupon Code 

Process 

RESET 

Follow Address 8 - Bit 6, 7 

Status 

(QP model) SET Effective only for 98 (0 to 2) 

* 

* 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 3 below 


page 

NOTE 1: If SET status is selected, the scanned code is printed on journal when the PLU is entered in a sale. 

For the sub-link PLU code of the link PLU entry, however, the scanned code is not printed. This bit selection is valid only when 

the PLU inquiry is selected in the RAM Allocation Setting (expansion memory used on the stand-alone terminal). 

NOTE 2: Bit 2: Check digit processing when the UPC-E is scanned. 

SET status: The scanned barcode is processed as “With no check digit” type, resulting in PLU code. 

RESET status: Since the scanned barcode is processed as “With check digit” type, the last digit is deleted from this code, 

resulting in PLU code. 

* The scanners PSC-QS6000 and PSC-QS2500 process a barcode as “With check digit” type, then send this code to the ECR. 

(Default) 


If SET status is selected, the PLU code is printed on receipt when the PLU is entered in a sale. 

For the sub-link PLU of the link PLU entry, however, the PLU code is not printed. 

*This bit selection is valid only when the PLU inquiry (3 [ST], Code 2) is selected in the RAM Allocation Setting (submode 79) 

(expansion memory used on the stand-alone terminal).


6-46 


NOTE 4: Bit 5: Unit Price Process of F1F2 = 20 for the France Spec. 

SET status: Unit price is converted into Euro, according to the Bit 7 status. 

RESET status: Unit price is not converted into Euro and the scanned unit price is directly entered. 

This bit selection is effective when 

F1F2 = 20 is selected for “Non-PLU” and Bit 7 is set. 

Bit 6: Code Process of F1F2X1 = 414, 419 for the Germany Spec. 

SET status: F1F2X1 = 414, 419 code is handled as the process No. 16. 

No. 16 = 41NX1X2X3X4X5P1P2P3P4C/D 

RESET status: F1F2X1 = 414, 419 code is handled as the EAN-13 process No. 3. 

Bit 7: Euro Conversion Process and GENCODE Scan Selection for the France Spec. 

SET status: 1. Unit price of the following code is converted into Euro, using the CUR1 rate. 

(Fraction rounding process is fixed to “Round Off”.) 

F1F2 = 02, 22, 24, 26, 28 

GENCODE = 379 

2. GENCODE = Processed by 378 code 4-digit unit price 

378X1X2X3X4X5P1P2P3P4C/D 

RESET status: 1. Scanned unit price (not converted into Euro) 

2. GENCODE = Processed by 378 code 5-digit unit price 

378X1X2X3X4P1P2P3P4P5C/D 

Bit 8: Euro EAN Coupon (F1F2 = 98,99) Process 

SET status: 980X1X2X3X4P1P2P3P4P5C/D = BTR 

981X1X2X3X4X5X6P1P2P3C/D = EAN Coupon & Unit Price x 10 

982X1X2X3X4X5X6P1P2P3C/D = EAN Coupon & Unit Price x 1 

983 to 989, 99 codes are defined as error. 

When this bit is set, the selection of Address 8 - Bit 6, 7 is not effective. 

RESET status: Follow Address 8 - Bit 6, 7 status.



6-47 




BIT 

NO. 

25 

SCANNING OPTION III 


STANDARD 

STATUS 


US QP 

1 France EAN 

RESET QP * 

SET France 

2 UK EAN 

3 Belgium EAN 

4 Germany EAN 

5 Denmark EAN 

6 Scandinavia (FN) EAN 

7 

8 

Type of processing for 

read code No.7 

RESET QP * 

SET UK 

RESET QP * 

SET Belgium 

RESET QP * 

SET Germany 

RESET QP * 

SET Denmark 

RESET QP * 

SET Scandinavia (FN) 

RESET Amount * 

SET Weight 

Type of processing for 

read code No.8 with 

RESET Non-PLU * 

F1F2=20 SET PLU 

NOTE 1: Bits 1 to 6 are applied to the Read Code Nos. 7, 8, and 9, and select the corresponding countries. 

• When all of Bits 1 to 6 are RESET, QP is effective. 

• When two or more Bits are SET, the Bits of lowest number has priority. 

ex.) When Bits 1 and 2 are SET, Bit 1 has priority over Bit 2. 

NOTE 2: Bits 7 and 8 are effective only when Bit 1 (FRANCE) of this Address is SET. 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below



6-48 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

26 

SCANNING OPTION IV 


STANDARD 

STATUS 


US QP 

The number of digits of 

the price for read code 

RESET Four * 

No.7 SET Five 

Price check digits for 

code Nos.7 and 8 with 

RESET Non-existence * 

the price of 5 digits SET Existence 

Processing of price 

check digit 

Selects use of read 

code No.8 or 9 

Processing of the price 

when registering 

coupon 

(read code Nos.5 and 6) 

RESET NOTE 3 below * 

SET CDV Error 

RESET No.8 * 

SET No.9 

RESET Price x 1 * 

SET Price x 10 

The number of the digits 

of the price for read 

RESET Four * 

code No.8 SET Five 

Price check digit for 

read code No.8 with the 

RESET Non-existence * 

price of 5 digits SET Existence 

Registering of coupon 

(read code No.5 and 6) 

RESET Allowed * 

SET Prohibited 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 4 below 

NOTE 1: Respective bits of this Address depend on the programmed contents of Address 25 (SCANNING OPTION III). Refer to the 

following: 

• Bit No. 1 is applied for QP, UK,GE, or DM. 

• Bit No. 2 is applied for QP, UK, BE, GE, or DM. 

• Bit Nos. 3 and 5 are applied for BE only. 

• Bit Nos. 4, 6, 7, and 8 are applied for QP or UK. 

NOTE 2: For QP, UK, GE, DM, or Scandinavia, this bit is applied for read code No. 7 with the price of 5 digits only when Bit 1 of this 

Address is SET. 

For BE, this bit is applied for read code No. 7 and 8 with F1 F2 = 27 of the 5-digit price. (Do not obey bit 1 status.) 

NOTE 3: This bit is effective only when Bit 2 of this Address is SET. 

The content of this bit is applied for read code No. 7, and read code No. 8 with F1 F2 = 27. 

SET: When error occurs through the price check digit, the check digit verification error results. 

RESET: Even if error occurs through the price check digit, the check digit verification error is ignored in the case of the 

price check digit = 0. 

NOTE 4: This bit selection is effective only when Bit 6 of this Address is set.



6-49 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

27 DRAWER OPTION 

Drawer Close 

Compulsory 

2 Drawer Warning Alarm 

3 


Single-drawer or Multidrawer 

4 Multi-drawer Control 

5 

6 

RESET NOT COMPULSORY 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

SET COMPULSORY * * 

RESET NON-ACTIVE * * 

SET ACTIVE 

RESET SINGLE DRAWER * * 

SET MULTI DRAWER 

RESET By Cashier * * 

SET By Currency 

Selection of Change at 

Tendering in Foreign 

Currencies SET In Foreign Currency 

Number of Drawers 

(if Multi-drawer spec.) 



RESET In Domestic Currency * * 

RESET 1 DRAWER * * 

SET 2 DRAWERS 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

QP 1 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 3 below 

NOTE 4 below 

NOTE 1: If SET, the Drawer-close Compulsory option is ON. In that case, when the drawer remains open, any operation except [RF], [JF], [C], numeric input for Sign-ON are 

prohibited. This rules is applied to REG, MGR, - , and LOCK modes; in other modes and during a Pick Up operation, the drawer may remain open. 

For US model programmed with the Drawer Close Compulsory feature, when the drawer remains open, the [DISPLAY 6], [COMMENT], [#], and numeric input operations 

are possible. 

NOTE 2: This status selection is effective only when Bit 1 is SET. If SET (ACTIVE), the setting in DRAWER WARNING TIME operation (Submode 38) will be effective. In that 

submode, a time value in seconds can be set for the time length with the drawer open until the Warning Alarm generated (the initial value is 15 seconds). 

NOTE 3: If SET, the Multi-drawer specification is selected. 

In case of Cashier Code Entry Method (using [LOG] or [LOG/RECEIPT] key), a drawer is to be designated in sale entries, and the number of drawers will be further selected 

at Bit 6. 

In case of Cashier Key Method, the drawer to be used will be fixed as in the following: 

Drawer 1 for Cashier 1 , Drawer 2 for Cashier 2 & all others. 


If RESET, both Drawers 1 and 2 will be opened to enable accesses to both Domestic and Foreign Currencies. 

If SET, only Drawer 2 will be opened to enable an access to Foreign Currencies only. 

QP model: 

This bit status selection is available regardless of the status selection for the bit 3 and the bit 4 in this address. 

If RESET, change is returned to a customer by the domestic currency in the foreign currency tendering operation. 

If SET, change is returned to a customer by the foreign currency, the symbol “ٱٱ ” is displayed in the leftmost 2 digits on the lower row portion of the display. 

• When change is returned to a customer by the foreign currency, the symbol “ٱٱ ” will be always displayed even if the option of the cashier No. display or the PLU price 

level display (Bits 5 and 6 of Address 4) has been selected. 

• When change is returned to a customer by the foreign currency, the Drawer 2 will open if both the bit 3 and the bit 4 in this address have been selected “SET”.



6-50 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

28 OPTIONAL FUNCTION VI 


No-sale Entry After 

Non-add # Entry 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET ALLOWED * * 

SET PROHIBITED 

Number of Times for 

Non-add # Entries 

Within a Receipt SET ONLY ONCE ALLOWED 

[RF] Operation During a 

Sale 

Consecutive No. on 

Receipt and Journal 

Consecutive No. 

Resetting 

Negative Mode ( - ) 

Operation 

RESET ANY NUMBER OF TIMES * * 




SET NON-PRINT 

RESET NON-RESETTABLE * * 

SET RESET ON Financial Daily Z 



Drawer Open when 

operating the [TRF] key 

RESET OPEN * 

(QP model) SET NOT OPEN 

Triple Multiplication feature 

or S.P.P. (Split Package 

RESET S.P.P. * 

Pricing Feature) 

(US model) SET TRIPLE MULTIPLICATION 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

[JF] is allowed anytime 

Even when NON-PRINT, 

the Consecutive No. is 

counted in memory 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: If SET status is selected, the Consecutive No. will start “0001” on the first receipt issued after every Financial Daily Reset Report. 


Triple Multiplication: QUANTITY 1 x QUANTITY 2 x UNIT PRICE (Quantity can be entered twice.)



6-51 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

29 OPTIONAL FUNCTION VII 


Preset Point for one 

decimal digit 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET Ordinary Digit Process * * 

SET Preset Point One Decimal Digit 

U.S. Balance or 

CANADA Balance 

RESET U.S. Balance * 

(US model) SET CANADA Balance 

CANADA TAX TYPE 

(US model) 

RESET QUEBEC Tax * 

SET ONTARIO Tax 

Taxable Total Display 

by [ST] key depression 

RESET SUBTOTAL Display * 

(US model) SET TAXABLE TOTAL Display 


6 Footer Logo Print 

7 

Journal Print on Power- 

ON 


RESET * * 

SET 

RESET PRINT 

SET NON-PRINT * * 

RESET PRINT 

SET NON-PRINT 

RESET * * 

SET 

* 

QP 67 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

Will not included tax 

amount in Hourly Range 

memory 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 3 below 

NOTE 1: This is the digit selection for the preset price value of Departments and PLUs: 

(This is applied only to those models with zero-suppress form of 0.00) 

ex.) RESET Status: ($ or €)0,01 to ($ or €)9999,99 

SET Status: ($ or €)0,001 to ($ or €)999,999 

When the SET status (Preset Point ALLOWED) is selected, neither scale entries nor Split Package Pricing on the register will be allowed. 


When SET status is selected: 

• Displays the sale total amount including taxes due while prints the subtotal amount (sale total amount pretaxed). 

Whether printing occurs or not is determined by the ST Print option (Address 1-Bit 3 RESET for Print or SET for Non-print). 

• If this option and the [TXBL TL] Key Compulsory option is selected, the [ST] key can replace the [TXBL TL] key before finalizing a sale. 

• When % or DOLL DISC is entered after the [ST] depression, the calculation will be made on the pretaxed amount. 

• When validation print is operated after a [ST] entry, the pretaxed sale total (subtotal) is printed on the slip. 

• The [ST] key can also be used before finalizing a sale with Foreign Currency tendering. 


When the power is turned ON (including Power Switch OFF to ON, AC power OFF to ON with the Power Switch to ON, Power Cord Plug OFF to ON 

the power outlet, and power recovery from a power failure), the Date, Time, and the Power-ON symbol are printed on journal. 

• When Power OFF to ON occurs during a receipt or report issuance, this printing will occur after issuing the receipt or report. 

• When the power is turned ON, the Power OFF/ON count in the Financial Report and Cashier Report memory will increment. (This 6-digit 

memory is cleared when the Daily Financial Report is printed. It is reset by a RAM CLEAR, and is counted up on a power-ON operation except 

for a power-ON with Status Clear.)



6-52 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

30 OPTIONAL FUNCTION VIII 


IPD or INPD on Journal 

in REG and MGR 

modes SET INPD 

CARD No. Entry for a 

sale finalized by [Chg] 

key 

(US model) 

2 CARD No. Entry for a 

sale finalized by [CRT] 

key 

(QP model) 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

LOAN and PICK UP 

operations 

LOAN and PICK UP 

Memory Process 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET IPD * * 





RESET PROHIBITED 

SET ALLOWED * * 

RESET To Cashier memory only * * 

SET To Cashier and Financial 

Previous Balance 

Manual Entry, or Check 

Track Memory feature SET Check Track Memory 

RESET Manual Entry * * 

Total Amount Print as 

the last line on Reports 


(US model) SET PRINT 

Cashier Interrupt 

(QP model) 

Key-in Tone 

(QP model) 

FOOD STAMP Process 

(US model) 

FOOD STAMP Process 

(US model) 

RESET PROHIBITED * 

SET ALLOWED 

RESET ON * 

SET OFF 

RESET * 

SET ILLINOIS Type 

RESET * 

SET NEW JERSEY Type 

QP 3 

REMARKS 


page. 


page. 


page. 


page. 


page. 

If both RESET, 

GENERAL Type 

If both SET, 

GENERAL Type


6-53 


NOTE 1: RESET Status: IPD(Items Printed Detail) – Prints on journal details of the sale entry, just as on receipts. 

SET Status: INPD (Items Not Printed Detail) — Skips positive Department or PLU items on journal. 

However, Negative items (Returned Merchandise, Item Correct, Negative Dept/PLU, Void, All Void, etc.) will be printed. 


If SET status (COMPULSORY) is selected, the sale cannot be finalized by [Chg] key until entering a CARD No. This option is 

applicable to the [Chg] key only but not those credit media keys of [CREDIT 1] to [CREDIT 4]. 

QP model: 

If SET status (COMPULSORY) is selected, the sale cannot be finalized by [CRT] key until entering a CARD No. This option is 

applicable to the [CRT] key only but not those credit media keys of [CREDIT 1] to [CREDIT 5]. 

NOTE 3: RESET Status: Charge posting is operated by manually entering previous balance. 

SET Status: Charge posting is operated by Check Track (Customer File) memory. 

NOTE 4: Even if SET Status (Total Amount Print) is selected, printing is not performed in Previous Balance (Manual Entry Type), Loan, 

Pick Up, Received-on-Account, Paid Out, and No-Sale operations. 

NOTE 5: RESET Status: Cashier Interrupt function is prohibited. 

SET Status: Cashier Interrupt function is allowed.



6-54 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

31 OPTIONAL FUNCTION IX 

Customer Display 

Method 


Check Track Code Print 

Date, day of week, and 

Register No. print on 

Journal by the [JP] key 

(QP model) 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET ORDINARY (Increment Type) * * 

SET PUT-AWAY (Holding Type) 

RESET 12-DIGIT FORM * * 

SET ZERO-SUPPRESSED FORM 


SET PRINT (Thailand Spec.) 

Selection of Print Data 

from Remote Slip 

RESET SLIP DATA * 

Printer (US model) SET JOURNAL DATA 

Selection of the 

message in Store 

Name/Message area on 

receipt 

RESET LOGO MESSAGE * * 

SET STORE MESSAGE 

Department and Minor 

Group Print Order in All 

Dept. Report SET DEPT and GROUP alternately 

Group Print in All 

Department Read 

Report SET PRINT 

Number of copies of 

Daily Financial Reset 

Report issued 

(QP model) 

RESET DEPTs first, then GROUPs * * 


RESET 1 copy * 

SET 2 copies 

QP 6 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 3 below 

NOTE 4 below 

NOTE 5 below 

NOTE 1: ORDINARY DISPLAY: The numeric data will be displayed as each digit is entered one by one (same as Operator Display). 

PUT-AWAY DISPLAY: The numeric data being entered will not be displayed until a function key is depressed. 

NOTE 2: This bit selection is applied to sales entry, programming operation, verification of programmed data, and report. 

NOTE 3 : QP model: 

In X and Z modes, date, day of week, and register No. are printed on the journal regardless of this bit selection. 


If SET status is selected, the data that is supposed to be printed on the remote slip printer will be journal data. 

When the INPD option has been selected (Address 30, BIT 1 is SET), printing is performed according to this option. 


If SET status (2 copies) is selected, one copy is first issued and cut, then the second copy is automatically printed and issued 

(The Reset Count is processed as the same as the “1 copy” status is selected.). 

This selection applies only to the report printed by the stand-alone terminal.



6-55 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

32 OPTIONAL FUNCTION X 


[%+] and [%-] after a 

Subtotal Within a Sale 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET ANY NUMBER OF TIMES * 

SET ONLY ONCE ALLOWED * 

Bottle Return Key ([BTL 

RTN]) Type 

RESET INSIDE-SALE TYPE * 

(QP model) SET OUTSIDE-SALE TYPE 

Automatic Cashier Sign 

OUT on finalizing a sale 

[% I] key Use (= SFKC 

70) 

[% II] key Use (= SFKC 

71) 

Amount Print on [Chg] 

or [CRT] Depression to 

Finalize a Sale including 

Previous Balance 

Salesperson Sign-ON 

Before Sale Item Entries 

Salesperson Sign-ON 

Anytime During a Sale 


SET ACTIVE 

RESET USED AS [%+] KEY * * 

SET USED AS [%-] KEY 

RESET USED AS [%-] KEY * * 

SET USED AS [%+] KEY 

RESET Sale Total Including PB * * 

SET Sale Total Excluding PB 




QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

Displays Sale Total 

amount including PB in 

either status 

NOTE 3 below 

Allowed any time during 

a sale 

SET PROHIBITED Allowed only at starting 

NOTE 1: SET (ACTIVE) status: The signed-ON or signed-IN cashier will automatically be signed OUT on finalizing each sale. However, 

when the ENDORSEMENT COMPULSORY status is on the finalizing media, the automatic sign-OUT will 

occur on performing the endorsement print of the media. The Automatic Cashier Sign-OUT will print 

neither on Receipt nor Journal. 

US model: 

When the VALIDATION COMPULSORY status is on the finalizing media, the automatic sign-OUT will 

occur on performing the validation print of the media. The Automatic Cashier Sign-OUT will print neither 

on Receipt nor Journal. 

NOTE 2: Bit No.4 and No.5 are provided in case your user wants two [%-] keys or two [%+] keys rather one for each. 

One [%+] and one [%-] (Standard Bit Status): Bit 4…..RESET (%I = %+), Bit5…..RESET (%II = %-) 

Two [%-] keys: Bit 4…..SET (%I = %-), Bit 5…..RESET(%II = %-) 

In this case, do not forget to change the Financial Total Name of the %I key. 

Two [%+] keys: Bit4…..RESET (%I = %+), Bit 5…..SET (%II = %+) 

In this case, do not forget to change the Financial Total Name of the %II key. 

NOTE 3 NOT COMPULSORY: A Salesperson Sign-ON may or may not be operated for sale entries. 

COMPULSORY: A Salesperson must sign ON first of all the sale items of Department, PLU, Amount Discount, Vendor 

Coupon, Bottle Return, PB+, PB-, or Check Track No. entries.



6-56 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

33 OPTIONAL FUNCTION XI 

Date Set and Print 

Order 

Date Set and Print 

Order 


STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 


SET MONTH-DAY-YEAR * 


SET DAY-MONTH-YEAR * 

Special Rounding on 

Sale Total 

RESET NON-ACTIVE * 

(QP model) SET ACTIVE 

Number of Digits 

Subject to Special 

Rounding 

(QP model) 

Denmark Special 

Rounding/Australia 

Special Rounding 

(QP model) 

TARE 2 Rounding 

(US model) 

Scale Spec. 

(QP model) 

Currency Selection for 

QP Scale 

RESET 1 DIGIT * 

SET 2 DIGITS 

RESET NORMAL SP. ROUND * 

SET 

DENMARK SP ROUND/ 

AUSTRALIA SP. ROUND 

RESET NON-ACTIVE 

SET ACTIVE * 

RESET ORDINARY SCALE 

SET QP SCALE 

RESET CURRENCY OTHER THAN £ * 

SET £ 

* 

QP 27 

REMARKS 


YEAR-MONTH-DAY 

order. (If both SET, it 

will result in MONTH- 

DAY-YEAR.) 

The digit selection (Bit 4) 

and SPECIAL 

ROUNDING PROCESS 

(Submode 36 or 37) are 

further necessary. 

NOTE 1 below 


page 


page 


To realize the Denmark Special Rounding feature or the Australia Special Rounding feature, set bit No.3 through No.5 in this 

address as follows. 

for Denmark Special Rounding feature 

System Option SET RESET Remarks 

Special rounding on sale total (bit No.3) O 

Number of digits subject to special rounding (bit No.4) O 2-digit type 

Denmark special rounding (bit No.5) O 

• Set the rounding table of the Denmark Special Rounding in accordance with SPECIAL ROUNDING PROCESS SETTING, 2digit 

type (Submode 37). 

for Australia Special Rounding feature 

System Option SET RESET Remarks 

Special rounding on sale total (bit No.3) O 

Number of digits subject to special rounding (bit No.4) O 1-digit type 

Australia special rounding (bit No.5) O 

• Set the rounding table of the Australia Special Rounding in accordance with SPECIAL ROUNDING PROCESS SETTING, 1digit 

type (Submode 36).


6-57 



If SET status is selected, the result of TARE 2 calculation will be rounded in 5g. In the following formula, the result of portions 

underlined will be rounded. 

Net weight = (Gross weight - TARE weight) - ((Gross weight - TARE weight) x TARE 2 % rate) 

Last digit of weight Result of rounding 

0 to 2 0 

3 to 7 5 

8 to 9 10 


RESET (Ordinary scale) Display test is not executed after turning on the power. 

SET (QP scale) Display test is executed after turning on the power. 

For registration using the scale, the unit price per unit weight is displayed on the dot display. If 

quantity extension is performed for an item that does not belong to scale DP or scale PLU, when this 

bit is SET, the quantity is displayed with the 7 segments (left 3 digits). Only an integer of the quantity 

is displayed, and decimals are not displayed.



6-58 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

34 OPTIONAL FUNCTION XII 

ITEM 

Decimal Point in Item 

Count and % Rate 

Amount Division Symbol 

between Main and 

Subsidiary digits for 

0.00 type 

SELECTIVE STATUS 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET (POINT) * -- ex) 1.5% 

SET (COMMA) * -- ex) 1,5% 

QP 126 

REMARKS 

RESET (POINT) * -- ex) €2.50 

SET (COMMA) * -- ex) $2,50 

Amount Division Symbol RESET (POINT) * -- ex) ¥1.000 

between 3rd and 4th 

digits for . - - 0 SET (COMMA) * -- ex) ¥1,000 



6 

7 

8 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

Weight Print Zero RESET Not Zero Suppressed * 

Suppress in Scale 

Entries SET Zero Suppress Form * 

Print order for Scales 

Item 

RESET 

(QP model) SET 

Dept./PLU Name, Weight, Price per 

Unit Weight 

Weight, Price per Unit Weight, 

Dept./PLU Name 

Item Correction for 

Scaled Item 


(QP model) SET ALLOWED 

. 

, 

. 

, 

. 

, 

* 

-- ex) 04.00 LB 

(for 4 LB) 

-- ex) 4.00 LB 

(for 4 LB)



6-59 




BIT 

NO. 

35 SCALE OPTION 

1 Scale Data 5 or 4 digits 


3 Weight Unit Selection 

4 

5 


ROUND UP 


DISCARD 


7 

8 


STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET 5 digits * * 

SET 4 digits 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET Kg * 

SET LB * 


SET ROUND UP 


SET DISCARD 

RESET * * 

SET 

Manual Weight Entry for 

Return or Void only (in 

REG or MGR mode) SET ALLOWED 

Manual Weight Entry for 

all kinds (in REG or 

MGR mode) SET ALLOWED 



NOTE 1: Special Rounding Process foe Scale Entries (when Bit 4 and Bit 5 are both SET): 

Fraction Resulting Least Effective Digit 

Post-rounded Value of the 

Least Effective Digit 

0 to 2 0 

ROUND OFF 

3 to 7 5 

8 to 9 10 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

This selection is effective 

when Bit 3 (Weight Unit Print 

Selection) is SET (Kg) 


ROUND OFF, 

If both SET, the fraction 

value is first ROUND 

OFF, then the least 

effective digit value is 

special-rounded: 

NOTE 1 below 

If both RESET, Manual 

Weight Entry will be 

prohibited by all means. 

If only Bit 7 is SET, only 

Return and Void entries 

are allowed for Manual 

Weight operations. 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 2: In the Negative Entry Mode ( - ), Manual Weight Entries are always allowed, regardless of these status selections. When 

anything is on the scale platter with the Scale-connection feature, no Manual Weight Entry will be accepted.



6-60 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

36 FOREIGN CURRENCY OPTION 


[CUR 1] (Foreign 

Currency 1) Zerosuppress 

Display SET . - - 0 (such as Japan yen) 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET 0.00 ($, €, £, etc.) * * 




RESET 0.00 ($, €, £, etc.) * * 




RESET 0.00 ($, €, £, etc.) * * 




RESET 0.00 ($, €, £, etc.) * * 





Tender Amount Print in 

payment of a sale SET PRINT 


Exchange Rate Print in 

payment or No-sale 

Exchange 

RESET 0.00 ($, €, £, etc.) * * 



SET PRINT 

No-sale Exchange from 

Domestic to Foreign 

Currencies SET ALLOWED 


QP 0 

REMARKS 

These bits selections 

are also applied to the 

print. 

Exchange from a 

Foreign Currency to the 

Domestic currency is 

always allowed.



6-61 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

37 OPTIONAL FUNCTION XIII 


PLU Tax/Food Stamp 

Status on PLU Entry 

(US model) SET 

Department Memory 

Process for %- on 

Department Item 

(QP model) 

RESET Obeys PLU Own Status * 

Obeys Status of the Linked 

Department 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET GROSS Process * 

SET NET Process 

PLU Memory Process 

for %- on PLU Item 

RESET GROSS Process * 

(QP model) SET NET Process 

Post-issue Receipt Print 

Form 

Post-issue Receipt After 

a normal Receipt 

issuance 

(US model) 

RESET ITEMIZED RECEIPT * * 

SET TOTAL-only RECEIPT 


SET ALLOWED 

Number of Post-issue 

Receipt copies to be 

issued SET Any Number of copies 

% Calculation on 

additional item entries 

after Subtotal and % 

entries 

PLU Code 6 digits or 13 

digits (14 digits) 

RESET Only ONE copy * * 

RESET Calculates on the entire sale * * 

SET 

Calculates on the additional 

items 

RESET Max. 6 digits * * 

SET Max. 13 (14) digits 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 3 below 


If RESET status (GROSS Process) is selected, %- calculation is performed on the subtotal amount but not processed into each item memory. 

If SET status (NET Process) is selected, %- calculation is performed on each entry item and processed into each item memory. 

NOTE 2: If RESET status is selected, a sale of maximum of 50 lines will be issued as an itemized receipt. Exceeding 50 lines, a total-only receipt will be 

issued. 

If SET status is selected, a total-only receipt will be always issued for the post-issue receipt operation. 

US model: 

If SET status is selected on US model, the post-issue receipt operation will be effective for the Received-on-Account and the Charge Posting 

transactions. 

• When the post-issue receipt operation is performed after the Received-on-Account transaction, the Received-on-Account total amount will 

be printed on a post-issue receipt. 

• When the post-issue receipt operation is performed after the [TRF] key is depressed during the Charge Posting transaction, sale total 

amount and new balance amount will be printed on a post-issue receipt. Whether or not sale total amount includes previous balance 

depends on the selection of Address 32-Bit 6. 

• When the post-issue receipt operation is performed after the [R/A] key is depressed during the Charge Posting transaction, received-onaccount 

total amount and new balance amount will be printed on a post-issue receipt. 

NOTE 3: If RESET status is selected, % calculation is performed on the additional items entered after the first Subtotal and % entries and before the second 

Subtotal and % entries (i.e., on the group subtotal) 

If SET status is selected, % calculation is performed on the additional items entered after the first Subtotal and % entries and before the second 

Subtotal and % entries (i.e., on the group subtotal) 

ex) Department Entries [ST] [%+] Department Entries [ST] [%-] .......... 

(A) (B) Calculates % on the amount of 

Group (B) not including Group (A).



6-62 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

38 OPTIONAL FUNCTION XIV 


Cashier Identifying 

Method Selection 1 


Method Selection 1 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET * * 

SET BARREL LOCK 

RESET * * 

SET 


Method: 

Push SFKC Keys SET SFKC Keys 






RESET Follow Bit 1 & 2 status * * 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

NOTE 1: Never program Bit 1 to RESET and Bit 2 to SET. 

NOTE 2: If Bit 3 is SET, it prevails the setting of Bits 1 and 2. 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

If both RESET: 

CODE ENTRT 

Method 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below



6-63 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

39 

OPTIONAL FUNCTION XV 


STANDARD 

STATUS 


US QP 

Money Declaration 


Operation 


Money Declaration is 

performed by: 

RESET EACH CASHIER * 

SET PERMITTED CASHIER 


for the use of [SI1/TL] 


key SET REQUIRED 


5 

RESET * 

SET 


for the use of [SI2/TL] 


key SET REQUIRED 




RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: The Money Declaration Operation Compulsory (SET) status may be selected only when the ECR adopts a Cashier Key Method 

(not CODE ENTRY method) and when the Standard Memory is used in the Stand-alone system or the Non-floating Cashier 

system is adopted in the Master-Satellite System. 

• Whether Money Declaration is to be operated by individual cashiers or totally by the permitted cashier is determined by the 

Bit 2 status selection. 

• With this option selected, the following reports cannot be taken: Media Sales and In-drawer Total Read, All Media 

Sales Total and Cash-in-Drawer Read, Daily All Cashier Read/Reset, Daily Individual Cashier Read/Reset. (However, when 

Bit 2 is set, the Daily All Cashier Read/Reset Report and the Daily Individual Cashier Read/Reset Report can be printed.) 

• When Bit 2 is reset, the Daily Financial Read/Reset Report can be issued only after a Money Declaration operation for all the 

cashiers. When Bit 2 is set, these reports can be printed by the permitted cashier after performing a Money Declaration 

operation. 

NOTE 2: If SET status (PERMITTED CASHIER) is selected, the in-drawer amount entries are totally performed by the permitted cashier. In 

this case, the media difference memory will not be processed in the Cashier Reports but the Financial Reports.



6-64 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

40 

EBT OPTION I 


STANDARD 

STATUS 


US QP 

[DISPLAY 1] Key 

RESET TENDER/TOTAL * 

Function 

SET TOTAL ONLY 


Function 


Function 


Function 


Function 












RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

QP 

REMARKS 

NOTE below 

NOTE: If SET status is selected, the operation of the [DISPLAY] key performed after tendering operation will be prohibited. 

Each bit status selection is effective only when “RESET” status has been selected for the corresponding bit of the next address 

(Address 41). 

If both this address and the next address are SET or RESET, the operation of total/over-tendering/ short-tendering will be allowed 

using each [DISPLAY] key.



6-65 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

41 

EBT OPTION II 



Over-tendering using 

the [DISPLY 1] Key 

RESET ALLOWED 

Function. SET PROHIBITED * 



RESET ALLOWED * 

Function. SET PROHIBITED 
















RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

NOTE 1: If SET status is selected, entry of tendering amount large than the food stampable total will be prohibited. 

QP 

REMARKS 

NOTE 2: If SET status is selected, entry of tendering amount large than the taxable total will be prohibited. 

Each status selection of bits 1 to 5 is effective only when “RESET” status has been selected for the corresponding bit of the 

preceding address (Address 40). 

If both this address and the preceding address are SET or RESET, the operation of total/over-tendering/ short-tendering will be 

allowed using each [DISPLAY] key.



6-66 




BIT 

NO. 

42 OPTIONAL FUNCTION XVI 

1 Combination Report 

2 

3 


Memories of Transfer 

Items on taking Check 

Track Reset Report 

Printing on Post-issue 

Receipt 





8 

Consecutive No. Print 

immediately after the 

previous daily financial 

reset (QP model) 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET Itemized report is issued * * 

SET One report is issued 

RESET NOT RESET TO ZERO * * 

SET RESET TO ZERO 

RESET Itemized Type * * 

SET Total and Finalization 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 


SET PRINT 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 


page 


page 

NOTE 1: If SET status is selected, a Combination Report will be issued in a string. The consecutive No. counts each report. 

NOTE 2: If SET status is selected, the following items provided to the daily/GT financial memory will be all reset to 0 on taking the All 

Check Track Reset report. 

• TRF TL, TRF (+) GT, TRF (-) GT, TRF (+) daily, TRF (-) daily, PB TL, PB R/A, PB PO 

Taking the Zone Check Track Reset report will not reset those to 0.


6-67 


NOTE 3: If SET status is selected, the post-issue receipt only for total amount and finalizing operation is issued. 

Department/PLU entries, subtotal, and tax are not printed. 

This bit status is effective only when the post-issue receipt after the issuance of ordinary receipt is allowed (Bit 5 of Address 37 is 

SET) and the itemized receipt is selected (Bit 4 of Address 37 is RESET). 

(Receipt sample when Bit 3 is SET) 

08-30-2003 SAT #3001 

∗∗COPY ∗∗ 

TOTAL $10.60 

CATEND $11.00 

CHANGE $0.40 

ITEM 3 

JONES 0316 17:58TM 

NOTE 4: QP model 

If SET status is selected, the consecutive No. immediately after the previous daily financial reset is printed on the daily financial 

reset report. (Columbia specification) 

After a RAM clear or Data clear, the consecutive No. will be cleared. 

- - Address No. 43 is vacant. - -



6-68 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

44 

EFT OPTION 


STANDARD 

STATUS 


US QP 

Return entry with the 

[EBT CASH] or [EBT 


F/S] key SET PROHIBITED 

Print of Store Receipt 

Title “MERCHANT 

RESET PRINT * 

COPY” SET NON-PRINT 

Issuance of the Store 

Receipt 

Card No., Expiry Date, 

and License No. 

protection 

(Customer receipt) 

Card No., Expiry Date, 

and License No. 

protection 

(Store receipt/Journal) 

Canada EFT command 

sending 

RESET ISSUED MANUALLY 

QP 

REMARKS 

SET ISSUED AUTOMATICALLY * NOTE 1 below 


SET ACTIVE * 


SET ACTIVE * 

RESET US Command * 

SET CA Command 

Authorization of sale 

finalization by the 

RESET Check Authorization * 

[CHECK] key SET Driver’s License Authorization 

Mode selection at the 

Balance Inquiry 

RESET MGR mode only * 

operation SET REG/MGR mode 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 3 below 

NOTE 4 below 

NOTES: 1. This bit status is also subject to the customer receipt 2 in the Gift Card specification. 

2. If SET status is selected, the last 4 digits of the Card No. will be printed. The other digits and the expiry date will be converted 

into “∗” then printed. This option is applied both when a credit card is swiped and when a manual card No. entry is performed. 

Example) When Card No. 1234567 is entered, printing is performed as follows. 

SET: Card No. ∗∗∗4567 RESET: Card No. 1234567 

EXP DATE ∗∗/∗∗ EXP DATE 09/03 

This option is applied to the LIC# (License No.) print also. 

Example) When License No. Z123456789012345A1B2 is entered, printing is performed as follows. 

SET: LIC# ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗A1B2 

RESET: LIC# Z123456789012345A1B2 

Bit 4 is applied to the customer receipt, and bit 5 is applied to both the store receipt and the journal. 

3. Command selection at the sale finalization by Debit card 

SET: Canada EFT command is sent with the data of cash back amount. 

(Only the [DEBIT] key is effective. Both the [EBT CASH] and the [EBT F/S] keys are not effective.) 

RESET: US EFT command is sent. 

4. Authorization of sale finalization by the [CHECK] key is selected. 

SET: On finalizing a sale with the [CHECK] key, the authorization process is performed with a driver’s license. 

RESET: On finalizing a sale with the [CHECK] key, the authorization process is performed with a check.



6-69 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

45 

EFT OPTION II 


STANDARD 

STATUS 


US QP 

Security Code input 

before Credit Manual 


Entry SET COMPULSORY 


for Gift Card Issue Void 


operation SET REQUIRED 


for Gift Card Sale Void 





6 

7 

8 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 


for Gift Card Reload 


Void operation SET REQUIRED 


for Gift Card Cash Out 



NSF Function for Gift 

Card Sale 

RESET NON-ACTIVE * 

SET ACTIVE 

QP 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1: SET: The input of the security code is compulsory in the manual card No. entry. 

RESET: The manual card No. entry is possible without the input of the security code. At this time, any message promoting 

the input of the security code is not displayed. After inputting the expiration date, an EFT approval will be 

executed. 

NOTE 2: SET: 

When the sale total of $20.00 is finalized with the [Gift Card Media] key and if the available fund on the Gift Card 

is $9.00, an authorization only for $9.00 is returned. After an authorization is returned, the remaining $11.00 

should be finalized with other media keys. 

RESET: 

When the sale total of $20.00 is finalized with the [Gift Card Media] key and if the available fund on the Gift Card 

is $9.00, an error is returned.



6-70 




BIT 

NO. 

46 IN-LINE OPTION 


1 Copying of Backup Data 

2 Retry for Collection 

3 Retry for DLL 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

Report Issuance on 

each Satellite at In-Line 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET Manual Copying only * * 

SET Auto Copying feature 

RESET Manual Retry only * * 

SET Auto Retry feature 

RESET Manual Retry only * * 

SET Auto Retry feature 

RESET ISSUE 

Reset Report taking SET NON-ISSUE * * 

Individual ECR 

Financial Reports from 

Master at In-Line Reset 

Report taking 

Individual ECR 

Financial Reports from 

Master at In-Line Read 

Report taking 

RESET ISSUE 

SET NON-ISSUE * * 

RESET ISSUE 

SET NON-ISSUE * * 

Reset Data protection in 

Communication Buffer 

RESET Rewriting Prohibited * 

(US model) SET Rewriting Allowed 

Financial and Cashier 

Daily Reports on each 

Satellite with Money 

Declaration feature 

(QP model) 

RESET Can be issued any Time * 

SET Only after Money Declaration 

QP 456 

REMARKS 

Bit 1 SET status: The Backup Data Auto Copying feature is adopted, in which case Manual Copying is allowed as well. 

Bit 2 SET status: In in-line read or reset report takings (including Terminal Open Check), when there is any uncollected ECRs and the 

operator’s Retry or Abort waiting lasts 10 seconds, an Auto Retry will be started and repeats the cycle of 10 seconds; 

Waiting and Retry. When the operator performs a manual Retry during that 10 seconds’ period or performed an Abort, 

the manual operation will be effective. When a power failure occurs in the 10 seconds; Waiting status, the count will 

be started from the remaining of the Wait time after the power recovery. 

Bit 3 SET status: Auto-retry is performed during DLL. For operation, refer to the explanation for Bit 2. 

Bit 4 This determines whether the reset report is issued on each Satellite terminal at the time of in-line Reset Report takings directed by the 

PC or Master terminal. 

When using PLU files, set the UDP Transmission Delay Timer to 1 (indicating 20ms) in the In-line/LAN Socket Programming 

(Submode 70). 

Bit 5 This determines whether reports of individual ECRs’ Financial Reports (Daily and GT) are issued from the Master Terminal at the time 

of in-line Reset Report takings. 

Bit 6 This determines whether reports of individual ECRs’ Financial Reports (Daily and GT) are issued from the Master Terminal at the time 

of in-line Read Report takings. 

Bit 8 This status selection is effective only when Address 39-Bit 1 is SET (Money Declaration COMPULSORY). 

RESET: Financial Read or Reset Daily Reports, Cashier Read or Reset Daily Reports can be issued any time. 

SET: Those reports can only be issued after performing Money Declaration.







BIT 

NO. 

47 PC OPTION 



3 

4 

5 

6 


6-71 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

Reset Report Issuance 

on Master Terminal 

started by PC SET ISSUE 

Data Transmission to 

PC 

Transaction Data 

Sending to PC 

Zero-skip of PLU Data 

when transmitting to PC 


8 

Reservation for Center 

File (PLU, CASHIER, 

and etc.) 

(US model) 

RESET NON-ISSUE * * 



RESET NOT SEND * * 

SET SEND 

RESET Print all PLU Data * * 

SET Zero-skip 

RESET * * 

SET 


SET ALLOWED 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 1: SET status: After issuing an In-line Reset Report (consolidation type only) on the Master Terminal, no In-line Services will be 

accepted until the reset data is sent to the PC. 

NOTE 2: SET status: Reset reports issuable on Master Terminal are as follows. 

• Reports of which data is stored in the Center File 

• Reports of which data is stored in the Consolidation Area 

When a reset operation directed by the PC is performed, the Master Terminal goes into a hold state (registration 

prohibited).







BIT 

NO. 

1 

48 OPTIONAL FUNCTION XVIII 


Receipt Printer Cutter 

Type 








RESET MANUAL CUT * 

SET AUTO CUT 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

RESET * 

SET 

6-72 

STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

QP 

REMARKS



6-73 




BIT 

NO. 

1 

49 OPTIONAL FUNCTION XVII 

Narrow Printing on 

Journal 


3 


Disconnection of the 

Journal Printer 






STANDARD 

STATUS 

US QP 

RESET Standard Printing * * 

SET Narrow Printing 

RESET * * 

SET 


SET ACTIVE 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

RESET * * 

SET 

NOTE 1: Narrow printing on journal 

SET: Journal print is performed with narrow printings. 

RESET: Journal print is performed with standard printings. 

QP 0 

REMARKS 

NOTE 1 below 

NOTE 2 below 

NOTE 2: If SET status is selected, the Journal Printer is disconnected. Only the receipt print will be performed. 

When this status is changed from SET (the Journal Printer is disconnected) to RESET (the Journal Printer is active), power off 

then on the ECR.


6.8 Store Name Message, Commercial Message, and Footer Logo Message Programming (Submode 1) 

6.8 Store Name Message, Commercial Message and Footer Logo 

Message Programming (Submode 1) 

Store Name Message, Commercial Message, and Footer Logo Message to be printed on the receipt 

can be programmed here. 

Prior to the Store Name Message Programming, be sure to select SET status for Address 31, Bit 5 of 

the system option. 

Prior to the Footer Logo Message Programming, be sure to select RESET status for Address 29, Bit 6 

of the system option. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 


Mode Lock: SET 

1 [X] |Line No.| [ST] 

1 digit (1 to 9) 

1 to 4: Store Name Message 

5 to 7: Commercial Message 

8 to 9: Footer Logo Message 

Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL] 

Max. 32 characters/line 

(See Section 4.2 Character 

Entry Method.) 

(For sequentially programming lines, the 

line number specification can be skipped.) 

NOTES: 1. For each line, a maximum of 32 regular-sized characters or 16 double-sized characters 

can be entered. A combination of both types is also available. 

2. When blanks are entered for the whole one line, it results in one line feed. 

3. If no commercial message is required on the receipt, program blanks for all three lines. 

As a result no extra lines will be fed. If any one of the three lines is programmed, the 

two other lines will cause line feeds. 

4. The 4-line range assigned for the store name/message will be either printed or fed, 

regardless of any system option selection. 

5. If the option “Footer Logo Message Print” is selected, the 2-line range assigned for the 

Footer Message will be fed even if no data is programmed. 

6. If any incorrect characters have been programmed, depress the [C] key to clear all the 

characters on a line and then re-enter characters from the beginning, or end the line with 

an [ST] and re-program the entire line. The new data will be active. 

7. When all the lines have been programmed, do a check by issuing a receipt. Only the 

lines with errors need to be re-programmed; other lines will not be affected. 

6-74 

Repeat for another line. 

To complete this line. To complete this 

programming 

operation.



8. Print format for each specification is as shown below. 

1) Store Name Logo specification 

When Commercial Message is SET When Commercial Message is RESET 

(Space) 

(Space) 

2) Store Name Message specification 

When Commercial Message is SET When Commercial Message is RESET 

(Space) 

(Space) 

3) Footer Logo Message specification 

(Space) 

Example) 

To program the following Store Message, Commercial Message, and Footer Logo Message 

(under the option “Footer Logo Message Print”) 

T E C S T O R E 

1 3 4 3 P E A C H D R I V E 

P H O N E : 8 7 - 6 4 3 7 

O p e n 8 : 0 0 a m t o 7 : 0 0 p m 

C l o s e d : e v e r y W e d n e s d a y 

T h a n k y o u 

Store Name Logo 

Commercial Message 

Date, Register No. 

Description 

Store Name Message 



Description 

Cashier Name, Consecutive No., Time 

Footer Logo Message 

C a l l a g a i n 

6-75 

(Space) 

(Space) 

(Space) 

Line No. 1 

Line No. 2 

Line No. 3 

Line No. 4 

Line No. 5 

Line No. 6 

Line No. 7 

Line No. 8 

Line No. 9 

Store Name Logo 


Description 



Description 


portion 


portion 

Footer Logo Message 

portion



Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 1 and depress the [X] key. 

1 [ST] (Line No. 1) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[X] [5] [0] [4] [#] (T) 

[X] [4] [0] [5] [#] (E) 

[X] [4] [0] [3] [#] (C) 

[X] [#] (Space) 

[X] [5] [0] [3] [#] (S) 

[X] [5] [0] [4] [#] (T) 

[X] [4] [1] [5] [#] (O) 

[X] [5] [0] [2] [#] (R) 

[X] [4] [0] [5] [#] (E) 

[ST] (to complete Line 1) 


[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[3] [0] [1] [#] (1) 

[3] [0] [3] [#] (3) 

[3] [0] [4] [#] (4) 

[3] [0] [3] [#] (3) 

[#] (Space) 

[5] [0] [0] [#] (P) 

[4] [0] [5] [#] (E) 

[4] [0] [1] [#] (A) 

[4] [0] [3] [#] (C) 

[4] [0] [8] [#] (H) 

[#] (Space) 

[4] [0] [4] [#] (D) 

[5] [0] [2] [#] (R) 

[4] [0] [9] [#] (I) 

[5] [0] [6] [#] (V) 

[4] [0] [5] [#] (E) 



[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[5] [0] [0] [#] (P) 

[4] [0] [8] [#] (H) 

[4] [1] [5] [#] (O) 

[4] [1] [4] [#] (N) 

[4] [0] [5] [#] (E) 

[3] [1] [0] [#] (:) 

[#] (Space) 

[3] [0] [8] [#] (8) 

[3] [0] [7] [#] (7) 

[2] [1] [3] [#] (-) 

[3] [0] [6] [#] (6) 

[3] [0] [4] [#] (4) 

[3] [0] [3] [#] (3) 

[3] [0] [7] [#] (7) 



[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[4] [1] [5] [#] (O) 

[7] [0] [0] [#] (p) 

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e) 

[6] [1] [4] [#] (n) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[3] [0] [8] [#] (8) 

[3] [1] [0] [#] (:) 

[3] [0] [0] [#] (0) 

[3] [0] [0] [#] (0) 

[6] [0] [1] [#] (a) 

[6] [1] [3] [#] (m) 

[#] (Space) 

[7] [0] [4] [#] (t) 

[6] [1] [5] [#] (o) 

[#] (Space) 

[3] [0] [7] [#] (7) 

[3] [1] [0] [#] (:) 

[3] [0] [0] [#] (0) 

[3] [0] [0] [#] (0) 

[7] [0] [0] [#] (p) 

[6] [1] [3] [#] (m) 



[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[4] [0] [3] [#] (C) 

[6] [1] [2] [#] (l) 

[6] [1] [5] [#] (o) 

[7] [0] [3] [#] (s) 

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e) 

[6] [0] [4] [#] (d) 

[3] [1] [0] [#] (:) 

[#] (Space) 

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e) 

[7] [0] [6] [#] (v) 

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e) 

[7] [0] [2] [#] (r) 

[7] [0] [9] [#] (y) 

[#] (Space) 

[5] [0] [7] [#] (W) 

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e) 

[6] [0] [4] [#] (d) 

[6] [1] [4] [#] (n) 

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e) 

[7] [0] [3] [#] (s) 

[6] [0] [4] [#] (d) 

[6] [0] [1] [#] (a) 

[7] [0] [9] [#] (y) 



[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

6-76 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[5] [0] [4] [#] (T) 

[6] [0] [8] [#] (h) 

[6] [0] [1] [#] (a) 

[6] [1] [4] [#] (n) 

[6] [1] [1] [#] (k) 

[#] (Space) 

[7] [0] [9] [#] (y) 

[6] [1] [5] [#] (o) 

[7] [0] [5] [#] (u) 



[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 

[4] [0] [3] [#] (C) 

[6] [0] [1] [#] (a 

[6] [1] [2] [#] (l) 

[6] [1] [2] [#] (l) 

[#] (Space) 

[6] [0] [1] [#] (a) 

[6] [0] [7] [#] (g) 

[6] [0] [1] [#] (a) 

[6] [0] [9] [#] (i) 

[6] [1] [4] [#] (n) 


[AT/TL] (to complete this submode) 

1 

2 

3 

5 

6 

8 

9 

08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P01 

TEC STORE 

1343 PEACH DRIVE 

PHONE: 87-6437 

Open 8:00am to 7:00pm 

Closed: every Wednesday 

Thank you 

Call again 

0022 14:21TM


6.9 Cashier Code and Name Programming (Submode 2) 

6-77 


Cashier Code and Name, Cashier Status, and Commission Rate (QP model only) for each cashier can 

be programmed here. 

6.9.1 Programming 

CONDITION Any time outside a sale 

OPERATION 


2 [X] |Cashier Code| [NS] 

Repeat for 

another cashier. 

[AT/TL] 

(See NOTE 1 below.) 

Address 1: Cashier Name 

1 [ST] Character entries [ST] 

Max. 12 characters 


Address 2: Cashier Status 

2 [ST] |Cashier Status| [#] 

Address 3: Commission Rate 


3 [ST] |Commission Rate| [#] 

(To complete this submode.) 

For sequentially programming the address, the 

Address number specification can be skipped. 

0: Cashier for sale entries 

1: Cashier for training entries (NOTE 3) 

2: Collective cashier for money declaration (QP model only) 

For sequentially programming the address, the 

Address number specification can be skipped. 

0 to 99.99 (%) 

(Use the [.] key if a decimal 

portion is contained in the rate.) 


NOTES: 

1. The following table shows the Cashier Codes that can be entered (the capacity is determined by the 

RAM Allocation Setting). 

Standard memory Expansion memory 

Code entry type 1 to 15 1 to 99 

Cashier key Barrel Lock (QP model only) 1 to 4, 99* --type 

[CLK] key 1 to 8, 99* --- 

* The Cashier Code 99 for the Cashier Key Type is fixed as a code of a cashier for Training Entries. 

2. For the name of each cashier, a maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters can be 

entered. A combination of both types is also available. 

3. Training entry status is available for every cashier. 

4. The following shows the way to calculate the commission amount: (QP model only) 

Commission Amount = (Net Sale Without Tax) x (Commission Rate) 

5. When adopting the Barrel Lock, the cashier key “OFF” status is required for this programming. 


6. When the center file is used, this programming cannot be performed on the Satellite Terminal. 

7. Prior to the change of cashier status (Normal cashier → Training cashier, or Training cashier → 

Normal Cashier), daily reports and GT reports of this cashier should be taken.


6-78 


Example) To program the following cashier data 

Cashier Code 1: Name JONES, Status 0 (for Sale Entries), Commission Rate 0% 

Cashier Code 2: Name SMITH, Status 0 (for Sale Entries), Commission Rate 5% 

Cashier Code 3: Name MEHL, Status 1 (for Training Entries), Commission Rate 0% 

Cashier Code 4: Name BROWN, Status 1 (for Training Entries), Commission Rate 0% 


1 [NS] (Cashier Code) 

1 [ST] (Address 1: Cashier Name) 

410 [#] (J) 

415 [#] (O) 

414 [#] (N) 

405 [#] (E) 

503 [#] (S) 

[ST] (to end Cashier Name 

setting) 

(2 [ST]) (Address 2: Cashier Status) 

0 [#] (for Sales Entries) 

(3 [ST]) (Address 3: Commission 

Rate) 

0 [#] (Rate = 0%) 



503 [#] (S) 

408 [#] (H) 

[ST] (to end Cashier Name 

setting) 


0 [#] (for Sales Entries) 

(3 [ST]) (Address 3: Commission 

Rate) 

6.9.2 Deletion 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

5 [#] (Rate = 5%) 



413 [#] (M) 

412 [#] (L) 

[ST] (to end Cashier Name setting) 


1 [#] (for Training Entries) 

(3 [ST]) (Address 3: Commission Rate) 

0 [#] (Rate = 0%) 



402 [#] (B) 

414 [#] (N) 

[ST] (to end Cashier Name setting) 


1 [#] (for Training Entries) 

(3 [ST]) (Address 3: Commission Rate) 

0 [#] (Rate = 0%) 

[AT/TL] (to end this submode.) 

After the Daily and GT Cashier’s Resets, (and his/her Sign OFF for Code Entry 

Type) 


Repeatable for another cashier to be deleted. 

2 [X] [ITEM CORR] |Cashier Code| [NS] [AT/TL] 

or 

[VOID] 

NOTES: 1. The Cashier Reset Report Count of the deleted cashier will 

be cleared. 

2. The Cashier Read Report Count of the deleted cashier will 

be cleared. (QP model only) 

3. The cashier key or cashier code of the deleted cashier 

cannot be used or signed-ON for sale entries. 

Example) 

To delete Cashier Code 1 with name “JONES” that has been 

programmed in the preceding page: 


[ITEM CORR] (for declaration of deletion) 


[AT/TL] (to end this program.) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P02 

01 

#01 JONES 

#02 0 

#03 0% 

04 

#01 BROWN 

#02 1 

#03 0% 

00004 



PHONE: 87-6437 

0027 14:37TM 



08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P02 

01 JONES 

-------------------------------- 

00003 

0028 14:39TM


6.10 Department Table Programming (Submode 3) 

6-79 


For each department, memory opening, department name and various statuses settings are performed 

here. 

6.10.1 Programming 

CONDITION To change the positive/negative status: 

After Department and PLU Daily and GT Resets 

To change any other programmed data or to newly program departments: 


OPERATION 


Repeat for 

other 

departments. 

As for details of each Address, 

refer to the following pages. 

3 [X] |Address Numbers| [#] |Department Code| [DP#] 

Repeat for 

any 

address 

within the 

same 

dept. by 

re-entry 

for 

correction. 

(NOTE 3) 

(See NOTE 1.) 

Address 1: Link Group 

1 [ST] |Major GP| |Minor GP| [#] 

Address 2: Department Name 

Address 3: Preset Price 

Address 4: Status Code 1 


2 [ST] Character Entries [ST] 

3 [ST] |Price| [#] 

4 [ST] |Status Codes to ON| [#] 


Address 6: Tax Status (US model) 

VAT or Add-on Tax Status (QP model) 

6 [ST] |Status Codes| [#] 

Address 7: High Amount Limit 

7 [ST] |High Amount to be locked out| [#] 

Address 8: Low Amount Limit 

8 [ST] |Low Amount to be locked out| [#] 

Address 9: Sub-link Dept. Code 

9 [ST] |Sub-link Dept. Code| [#] 

Address 10: Gross Profit Rate (QP model only) 

10 [ST] |Rate| [#] 

[AT/TL] 


(See NOTE 2.) 

[DEPT] 

for sequential-coded Dept. only 

(01 to 10) (01 to 30) 


(Max. 6 digits) 


(1 to 99) 

(0.01 to 100 (%)) 

(Max.7 digits) 

(Max.7 digits)


6-80 


NOTES: 1. The “Address Numbers” designation at the top after “3 [X]” can be skipped if not 

necessary. If entered, the designated Address(es) will automatically be accessed after 

the department designation. For example, if you enter |0204| [#] here (designate each 

address by entering a two-digit code; 01 for Address 1, 02 for Address 2, etc.), you will 

then enter: 

[DEPT] key, or Dept Code + [DP#] key, 

Character Entries [ST] (“2 [ST]” can be skipped), then 

Status Codes [#] (“4 [ST]” can be skipped), then 

may go on to another department setting for the same address designations. 

But still in this case, you can go to other addresses by first entering the Address No. and 

depressing [ST]. The Address Designation feature may be useful when you want to 

program or change contents of only one or two specific Addresses of multiple 

departments. (For example, when you want to change only the names, but not any other 

programmed contents, of 15 departments.) 

2. The “[DEPT]” key here means each of the individual department keys of Dept Presetcode 

type. For example, if you have [DEPT 1] (Department No.1) key, you can depress it, 

or you may enter 1 then depress [DP#] to start Department No.1 programming procedure. 

You can only enter the Dept Code and then depress [DP#] to start any other department 

than those installed as Dept Preset-code Keys. When you use a Flat Keyboard and the 

Setting Mode Key Layout sheet is inserted, any department may be accessed by using 

the [DP#] key in the SET mode operations. 

Up to 99 departments can be programmed. The [DP#] key should be used to program 

departments 61 to 99. (In SFKC programming, up to 60 departments can be 

programmed.) 

3. When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (and when the Address 

Designation feature has not been used), the Address No. and [ST] may be omitted. 

4. The programming contents of each address are further described in the DEPARTMENT 

TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS below. 

DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS 

Address No. Description of Programming Contents 

1 Linked Group Code 

Enter a 4-digit code, composed of a 2-digit Major Group Code and a 2-digit Minor Group 

Code. 

[#] 

Minor Group Code (01 to 30) 

Major Group Code (01 to 10) 

ex.) To link Major Group No. 1 and Minor Group No. 1: 

Enter: (0) 1 0 1 

Major Group Minor Group 

Code Code 

Enter 00 when the department is not 

linked to any Minor Group. 

Enter 0 (or 00) when the department is 

not linked to any Major Group. 

Enter 0 for linking neither Major nor Minor Groups (the preceding zeros may be omitted).


6-81 


DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS (continued) 


(1) NOTE: The “Major Group” and “Minor Group” here are merely namings for those two 

grouping total memories. In the memory process, those two totals are independent 

from the other and no logical check is made for a combination of the Major and Minor 

group codes to be linked to each department. In other words, you may regard them 

as “A” grouping and “B” grouping. See the examples below: 

Major-Minor Grouping Method Example: 

(In this case, you should check the logical linkage between the Major Groups and Minor 

Groups.) 

Major GP 01 Major GP 02 

Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor 

GP 01 GP 02 GP 03 GP 04 GP 05 

DP01 DP02 DP04 DP06 DP07 DP10 DP11 DP14 DP16 

0101 0101 0102 0103 0103 0204 0204 0205 0205 

Linked Group Code in setting 

“A” Grouping and “B” Grouping Method Example: 

(In this case, you may think that each department data are processed into max. 2 different 

types of groupings.) 

A-GP A-GP A-GP B-GP B-GP B-GP 

01 02 03 01 02 03 

DP01 DP02 DP04 DP06 DP07 DP10 DP11 DP14 DP16 DP17 

0100 0100 0201 0301 0300 0302 0002 0003 0003 0002 

Linked Group Code in setting 

2 Department Name (Descriptor) 

Enter a maximum of 16 regular-sized or 8 double-sized characters by referring Section 6.2 

Character Entries, then end with the [ST] key. 

When no name is programmed for a department, the following will be the auto-program name 

(default value) for printing: 

D P xx 

Department Code 01 to 99 

Double-sized characters 

3 Preset Price 

• For a preset department (preset-price department), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and 

depress the [#] key. 

1 to 999999 (result: 0.01 to 9999.99) 

When the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed” is selected, the decimal digit 

can be entered after entering a maximum of 5 integer digits and [.] key. 

1 to 99999 (result: 0.01 to 999.99) 

or 

0.1 to 99999.9 (result: 0.001 to 999.999) 

• A zero-price (0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation. 

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the department will be 

an open department (open-price department). 

• For a department handling gasoline, set the preset price per gallon (max. 999.999 = 999 

dollars 99.9 cents can be preset). (US model only) 

Be certain to enter the amount less than cent when programming the preset price of 

gasoline. 

ex.) To set the preset price of $1.25, enter the numeric value of 1250 and depress the [#] 

key.


6-82 




4 Status Code 1 Selection 

• Enter the Codes 1 to 8 whose status must be set to ON side. More than one code may be 

entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON. 

Code Item 


ON OFF 

1 Single-item or Itemized Receipt Single-item Itemized 

2 HASH or Ordinary Department HASH Ordinary 

3 Positive or Negative Department Negative Positive 

4 Food Stamp Status (US model) Yes No 

5 Scale Entry Optional Prohibited 

6 Department for Gasoline Sales (US model) Yes No 

7 Validation Compulsory (US model) Compulsory Optional 

8 Gift Card Department (US model) Gift Card Ordinary 

NOTE: Itemized, Single-item: 

Refer to DEPARTMENT KEY description in the Owner’s Manual (stand-alone level). 

• When Code 6 is set to ON (for Gasoline Sales), be sure to set a preset price in Address 3. 

(US model) 

• Code 5 (Scale Allowed) and Code 6 (Gasoline Sales) cannot be set to ON simultaneously 

for one department. 

• Validation Compulsory status is effective not for the PLU entry but for the department entry. 

(US model) 

• A PLU linked to a Gift Card department is Gift Card PLU. (US model) 

• Code 8 (Gift Card Department) should not be set to ON simultaneously with Code 3 

(Negative Department), Code 5 (Scale Allowed), or Code 6 (Gasoline Sales). (US model) 

5 

Setting Examples: 

To set only Code 2 to ON .............. Enter 2 [#] 

To set Codes 2, 3, 5 to ON .…....... Enter 235 [#] 

To set none of codes to ON .…...... Enter 0 [#] 

Status Code 2 Selection (US model only) 

• Enter Codes 1 to 8 whose status must be set to ON side. 

Code Item 


ON OFF 

1 Net to Selective Itemizer 1 Yes No 


3 

Tare 3 Entry (US model) 

Net to Selective Itemizer 4 (US model) 

Compulsory 

Yes 

Optional 

No 

4 Tax Symbol “F” Print (US model) Print Non-print 

5 Canada Non-taxable Quantity (US model) Objective Not objective 

6 Age Limit 2 Status (alcohol) (US model) Necessary Unnecessary 

7 Age Limit 1 Status (cigarette) (US model) Necessary Unnecessary 

8 Net to Selective Itemizer 3 (US model) Yes No 

NOTES: 1. “Net to S.I. 1, 2” 

Refer to Section 6.65 Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers. 

2. Tax symbol “F” is printed when this code has been set “ON” to a taxable 

department. If the Food Stamp feature has been selected, this symbol “F” will 

be always printed regardless of this code status when a food stamp taxable 

department is entered. 

In Canada, some area handles two kinds of tax; GST and PST. Status Code 4 

(Tax Symbol “F” Print) should be set at the GST status setting. 

Tax Symbol “T” ...... PST 

Tax Symbol “F” ...... GST


6-83 




(5) 3. When the Age Limit 1 or Age Limit 2 Status is set to ON, the age confirmation is 

always necessary before entering a sales item. Neither Code 6 (Age Limit 2 

Status) nor Code 7 (Age Limit 1 Status) can be combined with Codes 5 and 8 

on the Status Code 1 selection (Scale Allowed). 

4. On the application, the Age Limit 1 Status is applied to a sales item with the 

age limit younger than that of the Age Limit 2 Status. 

5. Code 3 item (Tare 3 Entry or Net to Selective Itemizer 4) is subject to the status 

of Address 7, Bit 5 of the system option. 

This code and Code 8 on the Status Code 1 selection (Gift Card Department) 

cannot be set simultaneously for a department. 

6 

Tax Status (US model) 

• Enter a one- to four-digit Status Code for applicable Taxes. Or enter 0 if the department 

handles non-taxable items. 

[#] 

0: Non-taxable 

1: Tax 1 (Tax 1 taxable) 




NOTES: 1. The rate of each Tax will be later be set and described in Section 6.68 Tax 

Table Programming. 

2. In case of inclusive tax, the combination of the tax status is unavailable. Only 

one inclusive tax status can be programmed for a department. (Tax 3 taxable or 

Tax 4 taxable) 

VAT or Add-on Tax Status (QP model) 

In System Option Address 21, Bit 5, the Tax Type has been selected to “VAT” or “ADD-ON 

TAX”. 

• Enter one- to eight-digit Status Codes for applicable VAT or Add-on Tax. 

[#] 

VAT or Add-on Status Type 

0: Non-VAT or Non-taxable 

1: VAT 1 or Tax 1 








(More than one code can be entered for 

combining Tax1 to Tax4 taxable status. 

For example, enter 12 to select Tax1 and Tax2 

taxable status.) 



For example, enter 12 to select VAT 1 and VAT 

2 (or Tax 1 and Tax 2) taxable status.) 

NOTES: 1. The rate of each VAT or Add-on Tax will be later be set and described in 

Section 6.18 VAT or Tax Rate Setting (Submode 12). 

2. The combination of the Add-on Tax and the VAT status is unavailable.


6-84 




7 High Amount Limit 

Enter a maximum of 7 digits to be set as the high amount to be locked out. 

Example) To prohibit any amount equal to or larger than 40.00: 

4000 [#] 

(Allows any amount equal to or smaller than 39.99.) 

NOTES: 1. To cancel the preset limit (i.e. to allow any amount), enter 0. 

2. The limit amount set here will be applied to entries in REG mode only, but not in 

MGR or - mode. 

3. Zeros must be entered as all the digits other than the highest digit. If any other 

value is entered, it will be regarded as a zero. 

ex.) Entering 4001 to 4999 will all result in setting 4000. 

8 Low Amount Limit 

Enter a maximum of 7 digits to be set as the low amount limit. 

Example) To prohibit any amount less than 4.00: 

400 [#] 

(Prohibits any amount less than 4.00.) 

NOTES: 1. To cancel the preset limit (i.e. to allow any amount), enter 0. 

2. The limit amount set here will be applied to entries in REG mode only, but not in 

MGR or - mode. 

3. Zeros must be entered as all the digits other than the highest digit. If any other 

value is entered, it will be regarded as a zero. 

ex.) Entering 401 to 499 will all result in setting 400. 

9 Sub-link Department Code 

• This entry is useful when the department item entry should always be followed by another 

department’s item sale. If the department is not applied to this case, skip this address entry. 

Refer to the following examples of applications. 

HEAD-LINK DEPT. SUB-LINK DEPT. 

Example 1) Dept. 1 (for Bottle Drink Dept. 2 (for Bottle Deposit entries) 

Net Content Sales entries) 

Example 2) Dept. 14 (Battery drive Dept. 27 (Batteries) 

Clocks) 

As shown in the examples, this feature prevents the cashier from forgetting to enter the Sublink 

Dept. item attached to the Head-link Dept. item. And at the same time, in reports, two 

Department Totals are separately read. 

• In setting, enter the Sub-link Department Code (1 to 99). (The Main-link Dept. is the dept. 

now being programmed.) 

[#] 

1 to 99 (Sub-link Department Code) 

• To cancel the sub-linking, enter 0 instead of the Sub-link Dept. Code before [#]. 

REMARKS: 

1) When the Head-link Dept. item is entered in a sale, an entry through the Sub-link Dept. 

will be required. No other operations will be accepted until the Sub-link Dept. is 

operated. 

2) The HEAD-to-SUB linkage is effective for only one step. If the Sub-link Dept. is further 

set with another Sub-link Dept., the first HEAD item will only require its own Sub-link 

Dept. entry.


6-85 




(9) 3) It is possible to set multiple departments are Head-link to one Sub-link Department. 

(For example, multiple departments are assigned for bottled drink entries but only one 

department is assigned for bottled-deposit entries.) 

4) The Sub-link Dept. alone may be operated for sale entries, skipping the Head-link 

Dept., without affecting the Head-link Dept. sales memory. 

5) Various declaration keys, multiplications, etc. may be operated on each of the Head-link 

and Sub-link depts., independently from the other. 

6) When the [ITEM CORR] key is operated immediately after the Head-link item entry, the 

Sub-link compulsory status will also be canceled. 

7) When the [ITEM CORR] key is operated immediately after the compulsory Sub-link 

item entry, an error will result. 

8) Repeat entries will not be allowed on either the Head-link or Sub-link item. 

9) Dollar Discount (US model), Amount Discount (QP model), %+, and %- may be 

operated on the Sub-link item as well as the Head-link item. 

10) When the Head-link dept. is programmed with “Single-item” status and a Single-item 

receipt has been issued accordingly, the Sub-link dept. entry will not be compulsory. 

11) An entry of any PLU linked to the Head-link dept will not require the Sub-link dept entry. 

12) If Store Coupon is entered through the Head-link dept, the Sub-link dept entry will not 

be compulsory. 

13) When the Sub-link dept entry is compulsory, Store Coupon may be entered through the 

Sub-link dept. 

14) When the Sub-link dept is not memory-opened, the Head-link dept entry will result in an 

error. 

10 Gross Profit Rate (QP model) 

• Enter the gross profit rate of the department in maximum 3 integer digits and 2 decimal 

digits. 

[#] or [ • ] [#] 

0 to 100 (%) 0,01 to 99,99 (%) 

• The calculated gross profit will be outputted to the DEPARTMENT GROSS PROFIT 

REPORT. 

• The fraction resulted from the profit calculation will be discarded. 

• To cancel the gross profit rate once set, enter 0 in place of a specific rate before [#]. The 

department whose gross profit rate has thus been canceled will not be outputted in the 

GROSS PROFIT REPORT.


Example) To program the following status and name for each department: 

Address 

1 

DEPT 

CODE Linked GP 

Maj, Minor 

Address 

2 

Dept. 

Name 

Address 

3 

Preset 

Price 

Address 

4 

Status ON- 

Codes 1 

Address 

5 

Status ON- 

Codes 2 

6-86 

Address 

6 

Tax Status 

(US model) 

VAT/Tax 

Status 

(QP model) 


Address 

7 

High 

Amount 

Limit 

Address 

8 

Low 

Amount 

Limit 

Address 

9 

Sub-link 

Dept. Code 

Address 

10 

Gross 

Profit Rate 

(QP model) 

1 01 01 VEGETABLE open 5 0 1 10000 10 0 10.00% 

2 01 01 FRUIT open 5 0 1 10000 50 0 12.50 

3 01 02 MEAT open 5 0 1 0 100 0 15.00 

4 01 02 FISH open 5 0 1 0 0 0 14.35 

5 01 03 DAIRY open 0 1 1 0 0 0 20.05 

6 01 04 BAKERY open 0 1 1 0 0 0 23.00 

7 02 05 CAN FOOD open 0 1 1 0 0 0 25.00 

8 02 05 BTL FOOD open 0 1 1 0 0 0 21.40 

9 02 06 DRINK open 0 1 1 0 0 10 18.00 

10 02 06 BTL DEPO open 0 0 0 100 10 0 0.00 

11 02 07 SNACK open 0 1 1 0 0 0 17.00 

12 02 07 SPICE open 0 1 1 0 0 0 11.00 

13 03 08 (DP13) open 2 0 0 0 0 0 15.00 

14 03 08 (DP14) open 1 0 0 0 0 0 19.00 

15 0 (DP15) open 3 0 0 0 0 0 0.00 

0: Non-linked to 

any GP 

DEPTs 13 to 15 will not 

have names programmed. 

(Standard-program names 

such as “DP 13” will be 

set in this case.) 

0: No ON-statuses 

1: Single-item Dept. 

2: HASH Dept. 

3: Negative Dept. 

4: Food stamp (US) 

5: Scale-allowed 

6: Gasoline sales (US) 

7: Validation compulsory (US) 

8: Gift Card Dept. (US) 

(US) 


1: Tax 1 

2: Tax 2 

3: Tax 3 

4: Tax 4 

(QP) 


1: VAT 1 or Add-on Tax 1 








0: No limit setting; 

The limit is ruled by 

the Common Dept 

Limit Amount later 

described. 

0: No ON-statuses 

1: Selective Itemizer 1 status 

2: Selective Itemizer 2 status 

3: Tare 3 entry compulsion or Selective Itemizer 4 status (US) 

4: Tax symbol “F” print (US) 

5: Canada non-taxable quantity (US) 

6: Age limit 2 status (US) 

7: Age limit 1 status (US) 

8: Selective Itemizer 3 status (US) 

-- Refer to the Key Operation on the next page for programming the above contents. -- 

0.00 (0%) for 

cancelling Gross 

Profit Rate (QP) 

0: Non-linked to any 

Department



1 [DP#] (Department 1) 

1 [ST] (Address 1: Link Group) 

0101 [#] (Major Group: 01, 

Minor Group: 01) 

2 [ST] (Address 2: Dept. Name) 

506 [#] (V) 

405 [#] (E) 

407 [#] (G) 

405 [#] (E) 

504 [#] (T) 

401 [#] (A) 

402 [#] (B) 

412 [#] (L) 

405 [#] (E) 

[ST] (to end Dept. Name setting) 

3 [ST] (Address 3: Preset Price) 

[#] (Open-price department) 

4 [ST] (Address 4: Status Code 1) 

5 [#] (Scale-allowed status) 


0 [#] (No ON-status) 

6 [ST] (Address 6: Tax (US)/ 

VAT or Add-on Tax Status 

(QP)) 

1 [#] (Tax 1 (US)/VAT 1 (QP)) 

7 [ST] (Address 7: High Amount 

Limit) 

10000 [#] (100.00) 

8 [ST] (Address 8: Low Amount 

Limit) 

10 [#] (0.10) 

9 [ST] (Address 9: Sub-link Dept. Code) 

0 [#] (No Sub-link Dept.) 

10 [ST] (Address 10: Gross Profit Rate (QP)) 

10 [#] (10%) 

15 [DP#] (Department 15) 

1 [ST] (Address 1: Link Group) 

0 [#] (No linked group) 

3 [ST] (Address 3: Preset Price) 

[#] (Open-price department) 


3 [#] (Negative Dept. status) 


0 [#] (No ON-status) 

6 [ST] (Address 6: Tax (US)/ 

VAT or Add-on Tax Status (QP)) 

0 [#] (Non-taxable) 

7 [ST] (Address 7: High Amount Limit) 

0 [#] (No limit) 

8 [ST] (Address 8: Low Amount Limit) 

0 [#] (No limit) 

9 [ST] (Address 9: Sub-link Dept. Code) 

0 [#] (No Sub-link Dept.) 

10 [ST] (Address 10: Gross Profit Rate (QP)) 

0 [#] (Gross profit cancel) 


NOTES: 1. In this example, the Address Designation feature is not used. 

2. In this example, the Dept. Code is entered through the [DP#] 

key; however, it can be replaced by depressing the actual 

Dept Code-preset key instead, if that Department Key exists 

on the keyboard (which is applicable to the Ordinary 

Keyboard Type). Only to open the memory of a department: 

3 [X] |Department Code| [DP#] [AT/TL] 

3. If the Dept. Code is sequential from the previous one, the 

Dept. Code before the [DP#] can be omitted. 

4. If the Address No. is sequential from the previous one, the 

Address No. + [ST] may be omitted. (In the above example, 

all address entries are not omitted for an easy understanding 

of the sample operation.) 

5. For the name setting (Address 2), the CHARACTER CODE 

ENTRY method has been used. But the DIRECT 

CHARACTER ENTRY method is also possible if you have 

any of FLAT KEYBOARD and PLU KEYBOARD (PK-2). 

Refer to Section 6.2 Character Entries. 

6-87 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P03 

01 DP01 

#01 

#02 VEGETABLE 

#03 

0101 

#04 5 

#05 0 

#06 1 

#07 100.00 

#08 0.10 

#09 00 

#10 10% 

15 DP15 

#01 0000 

#03 

#04 3 

#05 0 

#06 1 

#07 0.00 

#08 0.00 

#09 00 

#10 0% 

0028 14:39TM



CONDITION 

OPERATION 

After Department and PLU Daily and GT Resets 


Individual Department Deletion 

6-88 


[DEPT] 

3 [X] [ITEM CORR] [AT/TL] 

or |Department Code| [DP#] 

[VOID] 

All Department Deletion 

Repeatable for other departments to be deleted. 

3 [X] [ITEM CORR] [ALL VOID] [AT/TL] 

or 

[VOID]


6.11 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4) 

6-89 


This submode can be operated when new PLU items are to be added, PLU program data is to be 

changed, or PLUs are to be deleted. 

6.11.1 Programming or Changing 

(US model) 


Repeat for 

other PLUs. 

OPERATION 

Repeat for 

any address 

within the 

same PLU by 

re-entry for 

correction. 

(NOTE 3) 




(See NOTE 2.) 

Barcode Scanning 

4 [X] |Address Numbers| [#] 

(See NOTE 1.) 

Address 1: Link Department 

|PLU Code| 

for sequential-coded item only 

[PLU] 

1 [ST] 

Address 2: PLU Name 

|Department Code| [#] 

(1 to 99) 

2 [ST] 


Character Entries 


[ST] 

3 [ST] 


|Price| [#] 





Address 6: Tax Status 



Address 7: Unit Price of Individual Split Package 

7 [ST] |Unit Price| [#] 


Address 8: Whole Package Quantity 

8 [ST] |Whole Package Quantity| [#] 


Address 9: PLU Group No. 

9 [ST] |PLU Group No.| [#] 

(1 to 99; 0 to reset) 

Address 10: Link-PLU Table No. 

10 [ST] |Link-PLU Table No.| [#] 


Address 11: Tare Table No. 

11 [ST] |Tare Table No.| [#] 


Address 12: Unit Weight Code 

12 [ST] |Unit Weight Code| [#] 


Address 13: Mix & Match Group No. 

13 [ST] |Mix & Match Group No.| [#] 

(1 to 255; 0 to reset) 

Address 14: Tare 2 Rate 

14 [ST] |Tare 2 Rate| [#] 

(0.01 to 99.99%; 0 to reset) 

Address 15: Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code 

15 [ST] |Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code| [#] 


[AT/TL] 

(To complete this submode.)


(QP model) 

CONDITION 

Repeat for 

other PLUs. 

OPERATION 

Repeat for 

any address 

within the 

same PLU by 

re-entry for 

correction. 

(NOTE 3) 





Address 6: VAT/Tax Status 



Address 7: Stock Quantity 

7 [ST] |Stock Quantity| [#] 

(0 to 9999.99) 

6-90 




(See NOTE 2.) 



(See NOTE 1.) 


|PLU Code| 


[PLU] 

1 [ST] 



(1 to 99) 

2 [ST] 




[ST] 

3 [ST] 


|Price| [#] 



Address 8: Minimum Stock Quantity 

8 [ST] |Minimum Stock Quantity| [#] 

(0 to 9999.99) 













Address 13: 2nd Preset Price 

13 [ST] |2nd Preset Price| [#] 


Address 14: 3rd Preset Price 

14 [ST] |3rd Preset Price| [#] 


[AT/TL] 

(To complete this submode.)


6-91 


NOTES: 1. The “Address Numbers” designation at the top after “4 [X]” can be skipped if not 

necessary. If entered, the designated Address(es) will automatically be accessed after 

the PLU Code designation. (The idea is the same as the Address Numbers Designation in 

the DEPARTMENT PROGRAMMING operation.) 

2. A maximum of 65,000 PLUs (5,000 PLUs as standard when the Expansion Memory is 

installed) are programmable (varies depending on the capacity and allocation of the RAM). 

Also refer to the “CODING PLUs” to be described at the end of this section. The “[PLU]” 

key here indicates the key labeled simply as “PLU” but not any PLU Preset-code Keys. 

Prior to performing a Barcode Scanning, be sure to connect the Scanner to COM port 1 

and then perform a COM Port Setting. Regarding this setting, refer to Section 6.58 COM 

Port and R/J Printer Setting (Submode 71). 

3. When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (if the Address 

Designation feature has not been used), the Address No. and the following [ST] can be 

omitted. 

4. The programming contents of each address are further described in the PLU TABLE 

PROGRAMMING CONTENTS below. 

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS 


1 Linked Department Code 

Enter the 2-digit code of the department to which the PLU is linked. When the PLU is newly 

programmed, this entry is compulsory (an error will result if this entry is skipped.) 

1 to 99 

[#] 

2 PLU Name (Descriptor) 

Enter a maximum of 16 regular-sized or 8 double-sized characters by referring Section 6.2 

Character Entries, then end with the [ST] key. 

When no name is programmed for a PLU, the following will be the auto-program name for 

printing: 

PLUxxxxxx (for PLU Code Max. 6-digit feature) 

PLUxxxxxxxxxxxxx (for PLU Code Max. 13-digit feature) 

(The “PLU” portion is programmable in the PRINT LINE ITEM NAME 

PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 10. “xx ... x” is the PLU Code.) 

3 Preset Price 

• For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress the [#] 

key. 

1 to 999999 (result: 0.01 to 9999.99) 

When the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed” is selected, the decimal digit 

can be entered after entering a maximum of 5 integer digits and the [.] key. 

1 to 99999 (result: 0.01 to 999.99) 

or 

0.1 to 99999.9 (result: 0.001 to 999.999) 

• A zero-price (0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation. 

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an open 

PLU (open-price PLU).


PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS (continued) 

6-92 




• Enter Codes 1 to 8 whose status must be set to ON side. More than one code may be 


Code Item 


ON OFF 

1 

Quantity Entry (US model) 

Stock Process (QP model) 

Compulsory 

Stock 

Optional 

Non-stock 



4 Food Stamp Status (US model) Yes No 

5 Scale Entry Compulsory Prohibited 

6 HI-CONE Status (US model) Yes No 

7 Lock or Unlock Status Lock (not in use) Unlock (in use) 

8 Delete Status Yes No 

NOTES: 

Code 1: Quantity Entry Compulsion (US model) 

• When this status is selected, the quantity entry is always necessary for PLU item entry. 

However, if the [PACK] or [3rd PRICE] key is depressed, this status will be ignored. 

Stock Process (QP model) 

• When this status is selected, the quantity entry is always necessary for PLU item entry. 

• This status and the Scale Compulsory Status (Code 5) cannot be combined for one 

PLU. The Stock status is available for a stand-alone ECR but not for an in-line 

terminal. 

• When this status is reset, the stock memory is cleared. 

Code 2,3: Net to Selective Itemizer 1, 2 

• Refer to Section 6.65 Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers. 

Code 5: Scale Entry 

• This status and the HI-CONE Status (Code 6) cannot be combined for one PLU. 

• This status is unavailable for the Age Limits 1 and 2 (Codes 6 and 7 in status 2 

selection). 

• Do not set this status code ON if a PLU is linked to a Gift Card department. Doing so 

may cause an error at the item entry. 

Code 6: HI-CONE Status 

• This status requires setting of the Whole Package Quantity (Address 8). 

• Do not set this status code ON if a PLU is linked to a Gift Card department. Doing so 

may cause an error at the item entry. 

Code 7: Lock Status 

• When this status is set to a PLU, an entry of the PLU in a sale is prohibited. 

Code 8: Delete Status 

• This status can be set only to a PLU of sales data 0 in the stand-alone system with PLU 

expansion memory or the M/S system with “PLU to be inquired” feature. When this 

status is set to a PLU, an entry of the PLU in a sale is not allowed. PLU which has the 

this status is deleted from the PLU Table File when the PLU Merge is executed. 

• This status set is possible only when the PLU center file is selected. 

Setting Examples: 

To set only Status 2 to ON …........... Enter 2 [#] 

To set Statuses 2, 3, 5 to ON …....... Enter 235 [#] 

To set none of statuses to ON …..... Enter 0 [#]



6-93 




• Enter Codes 2 to 7 whose status must be set to ON side. More than one code may be 


For the QP model, none of item setting is required in this Address. 

Code Item 


ON OFF 

1 Price Print (US model) Non-print Print 

2 

Tare 3 Entry (US model) 

Net to Selective Itemizer 4 (US model) 

Compulsory 

Yes 

Optional 

No 

3 Net to Selective Itemizer 3 (US model) Yes No 

4 Tax Symbol “F” Print (US model) Print Non-print 

5 Canada Non-taxable Quantity (US model) Objective Not objective 

6 Age Limit 2 Status (alcohol) (US model) Necessary Unnecessary 

7 Age Limit 1 Status (cigarette) (US model) Necessary Unnecessary 

NOTES: 

Code 1: Price Print 

• When this status is set to ON (Non-print), PLU price will not be printed. However, when 

the Quantity Extension transaction is performed for the PLU, its price will be always 

printed regardless of this status selection. Do not set this status code ON. 

Code 2: Tare 3 Entry or Net to Selective Itemizer 4 (US model) 

• The item of the status is subject to the status of Address 7, Bit 5 of the system option. 

• Do not set the Tare 3 Entry status ON (Compulsory) if a PLU is linked to a Gift Card 

department. Doing so may cause an error at the item entry. 

Code 4: Tax Symbol “F’” Print (US model) 

• Tax symbol “F” is printed when this status code has been set “ON” to a taxable PLU. 

• If the Food Stamp feature has been selected, this symbol “F” will be always printed 

regardless of this code status when a food stamp taxable department is entered. 

* In Canada, some area handles two kinds of tax; GST and PST. Status Code 4 (Tax 

Symbol “F” Print) should be set at the GST status setting. 

Tax Symbol “T” ...... PST 

Tax Symbol “F” ...... GST 

Status Code 6,7: Age Limit Status 2, 1 

• When the Age Limit 1 or Age Limit 2 Status is set to ON, the age confirmation is always 

necessary before entering a sales item. 

• The Age Limit 2 or Age Limit 1 Status (Code 6 or 7) is unavailable for the Scale Entry 

Compulsory PLU (Code 5 in Status 1 Selection). 

• Do not set the status ON if a PLU is linked to a Gift Card department. Doing so may 

cause an error at the item entry. 

6 Tax Status (US model) 

• Enter one- to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Taxes. 

[#] 








For example, enter 12 to select Tax1 and Tax2 

taxable status.) 

NOTES: 1. The rate of each Tax will be later be set and described in Section 6.68 Tax 

Table Programming. 

2. In case of inclusive tax, the combination of the tax status is unavailable. Only 

one inclusive tax status can be programmed for a PLU. (Tax 3 taxable or Tax 4 

taxable)




(6) VAT or Add-on Tax Status (QP model) 

7 

6-94 


In System Option Address 21, Bit 5, the Tax Type has been selected to “VAT” or “ADD-ON 

TAX”. 

• Enter one- to eight-digit Status Codes for applicable VAT or Add-on Tax. 

[#] 

VAT or Add-on Status Type 












For example, enter 12 to select VAT 1 and VAT 

2 (or Tax 1 and Tax 2) taxable status.) 

NOTES: 1. The rate of each VAT or Add-on Tax will be later be set and described in 

Section 6.18 Tax Table Programming (Submode 12). 

2. The combination of the Add-on Tax and the VAT status is unavailable. 

Unit Price of Individual Split Package (US model) 

• The unit price of individual split package can be programmed regardless of the HI-CONE 

status. 

• For preset the unit price of individual split package, enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and 

depress [#]. 

• To cancel the unit price of individual split package, enter 0 and depress [#]. 

(When the unit price of individual split package is not preset (or 0), whole package price 

(Address 3 setting) will be used in the registration. 

• When HI-CONE PLU is entered as an open-price PLU, use the unit price of whole package 

instead of that of individual split package. 

Stock Quantity (QP model) 

(applicable to a stand-alone ECR when Status Code 1 has been entered in Address 4) 

• Enter the stock quantity of the PLU in max. 6 digits (0 to 9999,99). Use the [ . ] key if any 

decimal portion is contained. 

[ . ] [#] 

0 to 9999,99 

NOTES: 1. The entered quantity will replace the existing stock quantity value, if any. 

2. For the PLU Stock Loading or Changing (Submode 24), the stock quantity 

programmed here is used. 

8 Whole Package Quantity (for Split Package Pricing PLUs) (US model) 

[#] 

Enter the whole package quantity in max. 2 digits (1 to 99), or enter 0 to cancel the 

Split Package Pricing status. Be sure to set a whole package quantity here for PLUs 

with HI-CONE Status (Address 4 - Code 6) or Mix & Match Group No. (Address 13). 

NOTES: 1. This setting is not allowed for PLUs with the Scale-compulsory status. 

2. When the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit” is selected, this setting is 

not allowed to any PLUs.




(8) Minimum Stock Quantity (QP model) 

9 

6-95 


(applicable to a stand-alone ECR when Status Code 1 of Address 4 has been set to ON and 

the Stock Quantity of Address 7 has been entered.) 

• Enter the minimum stock quantity of the PLU in max. 6 digits (0 to 9999,99; use the [.] key if 

any decimal portion is contained.) 

[ . ] [#] 

0 to 9999,99 

NOTE: By setting a Minimum Stock Quantity value here, a short tone for warning will be 

generated on entering a sale entry of this PLU to turn the stock quantity less than 

the preset minimum stock quantity value. 

PLU Group No. (for purposes of reports) 

• Enter a 2-digit code (1 to 99) as a PLU Group No. to which the PLU belongs, and depress 

[#]. To cancel the Group No. once set, enter 0 and depress [#]. 

• For HASH PLU, the PLU Group No. setting is available. 

• The name of each PLU Group will be programmed in Submode 29. 

10 Link-PLU Table No. (for PLU-to-PLU linking requirement only) 

• This entry is useful, similar to the “Sub-link Dept.” feature in the Department Table 

Programming operation, when the PLU item entry should always be followed by another 

PLU item sale. If the PLU is not applied to this case, skip this address entry. Refer to the 

following examples of applications: 

HEAD-LINK PLU SUB-LINK PLU 

Example 1) PLU 1 (Coca-Cola Small PLU 2 (Bottle Deposit for the 

Bottle Net Content at 0.45 small bottle at 0.05 

Example 2) PLU 101 (Battery-drive PLU 202 (Battery-drive Pack 

Clock at 20.00) at 1.50) 

As shown in the examples, this feature prevents the cashier from forgetting to enter the Sublink 

PLU item attached to the Head-link PLU item. And at the same time, in reports, two 

PLU Totals are separately read. 

• In setting, enter the Link-PLU Table No. (1 to 99) and then depress [#]. 

[#] 

1 to 99 (Link-PLU Table No. The Sub-link PLU which link to the Link-PLU Table will be 

programmed in a separate programming operation later.) 

• To cancel the sub-linking, enter 0 instead of the Link-PLU Table No. before [#]. 

REMARKS: 

1) When the Head-link PLU is entered in a sale, the Sub-link PLU will automatically be 

entered. When the Sub-link PLU is an open-price PLU, the price entry and the [AMT] 

key depression should follow manually on the main keyboard. This manual operation 

sequence cannot be replaced by a PLU Preset-code Key on the main keyboard or on the 

PK-2 keyboard. 

2) The PLU-to-PLU linkage is effective even when the Head-link PLU is an open-price PLU.




6-96 


(10) 3) The linkage of the Sub-link PLU is as shown below. 

• Head-link PLU (one PLU) + Sub-link PLU (one PLU) 

… (QP model, V001.005-or-before US model) 

If the Sub-link PLU is further programmed with another Sub-link PLU (with a Link-PLU 

Table No.), the third PLU will be ignored at the item entry. 

• Head-link PLU (one PLU) + Sub-link PLU (Max. seven PLUs) 

… (V001.006-and-after US model) 

The linkage of the Sub-link PLU is effective so that up to seven Sub-link PLUs can be 

entered. If eight or more Sub-link PLUs are programmed, they will be ignored at the 

item entry. 

4) It is possible to set multiple PLUs as Head-link to one Sub-link PLU. (In Example 1 

described above, it may be extended to have more Head-link PLUs of similar items such 

as 7-up, which also link to the Bottle Deposit of the same amount.) 

5) Repeat, Item Correct, Dollar Discount (US model), Amount Discount (QP model), 

Vendor Coupon, Bottle Return, %+, or %- operations are not accepted for PLU-to-PLU 

link entries. But Return Merchandise or Void operation is possible for the Head-link 

(and the Sub-link PLU will be processed as returned or voided item automatically, in 

this case). 

6) The Sub-link PLU may be operated for sales entries, skipping the Head-link PLU, 

without affecting the Head-link PLU sales memory. 

7) Multiplication is possible on the Head-link PLU, and then the Sub-link PLU will 

automatically be multiplied with the same quantity. 

8) Modifier Keys (such as [SI/M]) will be effective for the Head-link PLU item only, and the 

modification will be disregarded for the Sub-link PLU. 

9) When an error occurs at the Sub-link PLU, only the Head-link PLU is entered but not 

the Sub-link PLU. (Errors such as Multiplication Product Over-limit Error, the Sub-link 

PLU has not been opened, the sale subtotal will turn into negative, etc.) 

10) When the Sub-link is a negative PLU, a Return Merchandise or Void entry through the 

Head-link PLU is not possible. 

11) None of Scale-Compulsory PLUs should be linked as Sub-link to another PLU of Headlink. 

An error will result on the Head-link item entry attempt in this case. 

12) When a price-change entry is made (using the [PR OPEN] or [OPEN] key) through the 

Head-link PLU, the Sub-link PLU will always require a manual amount entry (through 

[AMT]) even when the Sub-link is a preset-price PLU. 

13) PLU with the Age Limit Status or with the Quantity Entry Compulsion Status 

programmed cannot be used for Link-PLU. (US model) 

11 

Tare Table No. (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only) 

[#] 

Enter the Tare Table No. (1 to 9). The content of each Tare Table is set later in a separate 

operation (Submode 26). In a scale item entry of a PLU with a Tare Table No. set, the tare 

weight preset in the Tare Table will automatically be subtracted from the total weight read 

from the scale. Enter 0 to cancel a Tare Table No. once set. Or skip this address setting for 

PLUs not needing any tare weight calculations. 

NOTE: When selecting the QP scale feature, the Tare Table No. should not be 

programmed. (QP model)




12 Individual PLU Unit Weight Table Code (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only) 

13 

14 

[#] 

6-97 


LB unit Kg unit 

0: General Unit Weight (Set in Submode 26) 

1: 1 LB 1 Kg 

2: 2 LB 2 Kg 

3: 3 LB 3 Kg 

4: 4 LB 4 Kg 

5: 5 LB 5 Kg 

6: 6 LB 6 Kg 

7: 7 LB 7 Kg 

8: 8 LB 8 Kg 

9: 9 LB 9 Kg 

10: 1/2 LB 100 g 

11: 1/4 LB not applicable 

NOTE: Whether the ECR adopts the LB or Kg unit system is determined by a system 

option selection (Address 35, Bit No. 3). 

Mix & Match Group No. (US model) 

[#] 

Enter the Mix & Match Group No. (1 to 255). To cancel the Mix & Match Group 

once set, enter 0. 

NOTE: This Mix & Match Group No. setting is only possible when a Whole Package 

Quantity (Address 8) is set. 

2nd Preset Price (QP model) 

• For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#]. 

1 to 999999 (result: 0,01 to 9999,99) 

• A zero-price (0,00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation. 

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the second price of the 

PLU will be an open price. 

• If this address entry is skipped, 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as the 2nd 

preset price. 

Tare 2 Rate (US model) 

• Enter a Tare 2 Rate (0 to 9999; 0% to 99.99%), and depress [#]. To cancel the Tare 2 Rate 

once set, enter 0 and depress [#]. 

3rd Preset Price (QP model) 

• For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#]. 

1 to 999999 (result: 0,01 to 9999,99) 

• A zero-price (0,00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation. 

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the second price of the 

PLU will be an open price. 

• If this address entry is skipped, 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as the 3rd 

preset price. 

15 Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code (US model) 

• Enter the Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code (1 to 99), then depress the [#] key. Enter 0 as 

the Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code to reset the code once programmed. 

PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting can be performed in Submode 40.


6-98 


ADDITIONAL NOTES 

If a PLU is linked to a negative Department, the PLU is automatically set as negative PLU. If a PLU is linked to 

an HASH Department, the PLU is automatically set as HASH PLU. 

When a negative PLU is set with the Scale-Compulsory status, an error will result in a sale entry attempt of that 

PLU. 

The Amount Limits (High Amount, Low Amount) of each open-price PLU is ruled by that of its linked department. 

When a PLU is linked to a Gasoline Sales Department, an error will result in a sale entry attempt of that PLU. 

The system option allows you to select that the Tax Status and the Food Stamp Status of each PLU are 

determined by those of its link department. (US model) 

Amount Limits (High Amount, Low Amount) of each open-price PLU will be determined by those of its link 

department. (QP model) 

If a PLU is linked to a Gift Card Department, the PLU is automatically set as Gift Card PLU. (US model) 

(US model) 

Example) To program the following PLU data: 

PLU Code 10101 

Link Department (Address 1) Dept. 1 

PLU Name (Address 2) Tomato 

Preset Price (Address 3) $1.00 

Status Code 1 (Address 4) 4 (Food Stamp Status) 

Status Code 2 (Address 5) 4 (Tax Symbol “F” print) 

Tax Status (Address 6) 1 (Tax 1 taxable) 

Unit Price of Individual Split Package (Address 7) None 

Whole Package Quantity (Address 8) None 

PLU Group No. (Address 9) 1 

Link-PLU Table No. (Address 10) None 

Tare Table No. (Address 11) None 

Unit Weight Code (Address 12) None 

Mix & Match Group No. (Address 13) None 

Tare 2 Rate (Address 14) None 

Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code (Address 15) None 

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 4 and depress the [@/FOR] key. 

01020304050609 [#] Address Skip Information 

(Addresses 7,8,10 to 15 are skipped.) 

10101 [PLU] PLU Code 

(1 [ST]) (Address 1) 1 [#] (Linked Dept. No.) 

(2 [ST]) (Address 2) 504 [#] 615 [#] 613 [#] 

601 [#] 704 [#] 615 [#] 

[ST] (Name: Tomato) 

(3 [ST]) (Address 3) 100 [#] (Preset Price) 

(4 [ST]) (Address 4) 4 [#] (Status Code 1) 

(5 [ST]) (Address 5) 4 [#] (Status Code 2) 

(6 [ST]) (Address 6) 1 [#] (Tax Status) 

(9 [ST]) (Address 9) 1 [#] (PLU Group No.) 

[AT/TL] (Complete this submode) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P04 

010101 

PLU010101 

#01 01 

#02 Tomato 

#03 1.00@ 

#04 4 

#05 4 

#06 1 

#09 01 

00000 

00001 

0030 14:43TM


(QP model) 

Example) To program the following PLU data: 

PLU Code 10101 

Link Department (Address 1) Dept. 1 

PLU Name (Address 2) Tomato 

Preset Price (Address 3) 1.00 

Status Code 1 (Address 4) 1 (Stock Process) 

Status Code 2 (Address 5) None 

Tax Status (Address 6) 1 (VAT 1) 

Stock Quantity (Address 7) 100 

Minimum Stock Quantity (Address 8) 30 

PLU Group No. (Address 9) 1 

Link-PLU Table No. (Address 10) None 

Tare Table No. (Address 11) None 

Unit Weight Code (Address 12) None 

2nd Preset Price (Address 13) 1.20 

3rd Preset Price (Address 14) 1.50 


10101 [PLU] PLU Code 

1 [ST] (Address 1) 1 [#] (Linked Dept. No.) 

2 [ST] (Address 2) 504 [#] 615 [#] 613 [#] 

601 [#] 704 [#] 615 [#] 

[ST] (Name: Tomato) 

3 [ST] (Address 3) 100 [#] (Preset Price) 

4 [ST] (Address 4) 1 [#] (Status Code 1) 

6 [ST] (Address 6) 1 [#] (Tax Status) 

7 [ST] (Address 7) 100 [#] (Stock Quantity) 

8 [ST] (Address 8) 30 [#] (Minimum Stock Quantity) 

9 [ST] (Address 9) 1 [#] (PLU Group No.) 

13 [ST] (Address 13) 120 [#] (2nd Preset Price) 

14 [ST] (Address 14) 150 [#] (3rd Preset Price) 

[AT/TL] (Complete this submode) 

6-99 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P04 

010101 

PLU010101 

#01 

#02 Tomato 

01 

#03 1.00@ 

#04 1 

#06 1 

#07 100 

#08 30 

#09 01 

#13 1.20@ 

#14 1.50@ 

00000 

00001 

0030 14:43TM



CONDITION 

OPERATION 

Individual PLU Deletion 

To delete a PLU with sales data of zero: Any time outside a sale 

To delete a PLU with sales data of not zero: After PLU Reset 



6-100 


4 [X] [ITEM CORR] |PLU Code| [DP#] [AT/TL] 

or 

[VOID] 

Example) To delete PLU No. 90701 (Drink Small-B) that was once programmed: 

Key Operation Mode Lock: SET, enter 4, depress the [X] key. 

All PLU Deletion 

[ITEM CORR] 

90701 [PLU] 

[AT/TL] 

Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P04 

090701 

Drink Small-B 

-------------------------------- 

4 [X] [ITEM CORR] [ALL VOID] [AT/TL] 

or 

[VOID] 

NOTES: 1. If PLU items have been added to the PLU Additional File, these PLU items are also 

deleted by the All PLU Deletion operation. 

2. Prior to the All PLU Deletion operation, the PLU daily reset report and the PLU GT reset 

report should be taken. 

00000 

00002 

0032 14:47TM


6.11.3 PLU Programmed Data Copying 

6-101 


This operation is used to copy the programmed data of a PLU item and to use it in programming 

another PLU item, thus eliminating time in PLU programming operation. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

To program new PLUs or to change any programmed contents of PLUs: 

Any time outside a sale (except the following case) 

To change the PLU of the copy-destination with sales data not zero: 

After PLU Reset 

4 [X] |PLU Code of the copy-destination| [PLU] [NS] 

|PLU Code of the copy-source| [PLU] 

The programmed data of the copy-source PLU is now copied to the copydestination 

PLU (except the PLU Code). Then follow the procedure in 

Section 6.11.1 Programming or Changing to change data of any required 

Addresses. 

Example) To program PLU 90701 (Drink Small-B) again that was once programmed and then deleted, 

by copying the programmed data of PLU 90601 (Drink Small-A): 

Key Operation Mode Lock: SET, enter 4, depress the [X] key. 

90701 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-destination) 

[NS] 

90601 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-source) 

2 [ST] (Address 2, Name changed into: Drink Small-A) 

404 [#] (D) 

702 [#] (r) 

609 [#] (i) 

614 [#] (n) 

611 [#] (k) 

[#] (Space) 

503 [#] (S) 

613 [#] (m) 

601 [#] (a) 

612 [#] (l) 

612 [#] (l) 

213 [#] (-) 

402 [#] (B) 

[ST] 

9 [ST] 7 [#] (Address 9, PLU Group No. changed into: 7) 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P04 

090701 

Drink Small-A 

#00 090601 

#02 Drink Small-B 

#00 07 

00000 

00003 

0033 14:49TM


6.11.4 CODING PLUs (supplement to PLU programming operations) 

6-102 


A maximum of 6-digit or 13-digit No. may be assigned to each PLU as PLU Code, depending on the 

system option selection of the PLU Code digits. Any number within this limit may be assigned to each 

PLU. The following description is applied to the “Manual PLU Entry System Type”. When the 

“Scanning System Type” is selected, refer to the Scanning Specifications in the SYSTEM 

EXPLANATION separately issued. 

DIGIT LENGTH OF PLU CODES 

In determining the actual digit length of PLU codes, refer to the following factors: 

1) The smaller the digit length, the easier and quicker the PLU sales entries will be. 

2) The larger the digit length, the more precise analysis will be possible using various report functions. 

3) Some stores may adopt PLU Codes of more than 2 digits (while 1- or 2-digit codes are given to 

Departments), to prevent confusions or mistakes in key operations. 

4) Some stores may use smaller-digit codes for frequently sold PLU items while using larger-digit code 

for slow-sale items. 

CODING METHODS 

For the purpose of classifying merchandise and for convenience of PLU report applications, any of the 

following methods may be taken according to each store’s requirement: 

1. Coding With Linked Department Code 

In this method, the PLU’s linked Department Code should be contained in the PLU Code. 

Example) Department Code Its Linking PLU Codes 

1 100, 101, 102, 103 ... 199 

12 1200, 1201, 1202, 1203 ... 1299 

If the linked Department Code is contained in the top 2 digits of the PLU code, as in the above 

examples, the following merits are expected: 

1) The store cashiers and other clerks may easily see each PLU’s link Department. 

2) In PLU report takings, “Zone PLU Read/Reset” reports are effective, by designating the zone of all 

the PLUs that link to the same Department. 

Example) To read all the PLUs linked to Dept. 12: 

Zone-start PLU Code ..... 1200 

Zone-end PLU Code ...... 1299 

(For more details, refer to the report section in the Owner’s Manual.) 

2. Coding With Type ID for Each Digit 

This method is to give each digit numeric of the PLU code a certain meaning according to the 

merchandise, color, grade, size, wholesaler, etc. 

Example using 4-digit codes) -- in case of a clothing shop -- 

2 1 3 0 

Merchandise serial No. assigned under the same number of the preceding digits. 

Size ID (1 for Small, 2 for Medium, 3 for Large, etc.) 

Color ID (0 for White, 1 for Gray, 2 for Black, etc.) 

Wholesaler or Maker ID (1 for Company “A”, 2 for Company “B”, etc.)


6-103 


3. Using Bar codes (source-marking EAN or UPC bar codes) 

If most of the sale items in the store are printed with a source-marking UPC bar codes, the code (the 

human-readable numerics attached to the bar code print) may be entered as it is. Some items are 

printed with 13-digit code, and others with 8-digit code. Thus this method is possible only when the 

option “PLU Code max. 13 digits” is selected. 

The merit of this system is that you can simply read and enter the source-marked code rather than 

generating an original code for each PLU item. If the barcode No. is used, however, it is 

recommended to adopt the “Scanning System Type”. 

4. Combining Methods 1, 2, and 3 

When the option “PLU Code max. 13 digits” is selected, some combinations of the above three 

methods are possible. 

Example 1) Combining Methods 1 and 2: 

x x x x x x 

Type IDs described in Method 2 

Linked Department Code described in Method 1 

Example 2) Combining Methods 3, and Method 1 or 2: 

For source-marked items .…use the bar codes. 

For other items .……………generate codes in Method 1 or Method 2, in max. 6 or 7 

digits for example. 

After all, the methods described above are only suggestions. You may freely make up your own PLU 

coding method to suit each store’s merchandise controls.


6.12 Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5) 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

Anytime outside a sale 


5 [X] |Hour| |Minute| [AT/TL] 

(00 to 23) (00 to 59) 

6-104 

6.12 Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5) 

NOTE: If an hour value of more than 23 or a minute value of more than 59 is entered, the current data 

remains unchanged by setting or adjusting the time. 

Example) To set time “1:15 p.m. (13:15)”. 


[1] [3] [1] [5] [AT/TL] 

6.13 Date Setting or Adjustment (Submode 6) 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



6 [X] |Day-of-Week Code| |Day| |Month| |Year| [AT/TL] 

2 digits 2 digits 4 digits 

0: SUN (Sunday) (01 to 31) (01 to 12) (2003, 2004, etc.) 

1: MON (Monday) See NOTE 1 below 

2: TUE (Tuesday) 

3: WED (Wednesday) 

4: THU (Thursday) 

5: FRI (Friday) 

6: SAT (Saturday) 

NOTES: 

1. The date entry order may be Month-Day-Year or Year-Month 

-Day instead of Day-Month-Year if so selected in the program 

option. After RAM Clear, “Month-Day-Year” is set as default 

for US model and “Day- Month-Year” is set as default for QP 

model. 

2. If you do not want to print the Day-of Week on receipt, set 

blanks as characters of the name of each Day-of-Week in 

Submode 10. 

Example) To set date “August 25 (MON), 2003”. 


In case of US model: [1] [0] [8] [2] [5] [2] [0] [0] [3] [AT/TL] 

In case of QP model: [1] [2] [5] [0] [8] [2] [0] [0] [3] [AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P05 



PHONE: 87-6437 

13:15TM 

0032 13:15TM 



08-22-2003 FRI #0 

P06 

1 08-25-2003 

0033 13:15TM


6-105 

6.14 Hourly Range Table Setting (Submode 7) 

6.14 Hourly Range Table Setting (Submode 7) (for report purposes) 

By setting up-to 48 terms per day, sales data control for each term can be performed. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

After Hourly Range Reset 


7 [X] | Hour | | Minute | [#] [AT/TL] 

Enter the Time that ends 

Each hourly range, in the 

24-hour system. 

Repeat until all the hourly ranges are entered. (max. 24 hourly ranges) 

NOTES: 1. A maximum of 24 hourly ranges can be set. 

2. To change the table of hourly ranges once set, partially or entirely, do the entire setting 

operation over again. 

3. To reset the hourly range table once set, operate: 


7 [X] 0 [#] [AT/TL] 

4. Do not set an hourly range across 24:00, such as “23:00 to 1:00”. 

5. Even if an hour value of more than 24 or a minute value of more than 60 is entered, no 

error results. However, do the entire setting operation over again because the setting is 

not correct. 

6. After a RAM clear, no Hourly Ranges are set as initial data. 

Example) To set the following hourly range table: 

TABLE KEY OPERATION 

Mode Lock to SET 

Enter 7, depress [X] 

1) up to 8:00* Enter 800, depress [#] 

2) 8:00 t0 12:00 Enter 1200, depress [#] 

3) 12:00 to 15:00 Enter 1500, depress [#] 

4) 15:00 to 19:00 Enter 1900, depress [#] 

*(The first hourly range is Depress [AT/TL] to end this 

automatically continued Submode. 

From 19:00 of the preceding 

Day.) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P07 

08:00TM 

12:00TM 

15:00TM 

19:00TM 

0034 13:15TM


6.15 Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys (Submode 8) 

6-106 

6.15 Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys (Submode 8) 

This submode sets the high amount limit in finalizing transactions by tendering through each media key 

and also sets the high and low amount limits in entering amount through departments. 


OPERATION 


8 [X] | Key Code | [ST] | Amount Limit Set Value | [#] [AT/TL] 

Max. 2 digits Max. 8 digits; 0 to reset 

(See the table below) 

Repeat for another key. 

US model QP model 

Key 

Code 

Item or Key to be applied 

Key 

Code 

Item or Key to be applied 

1 [AT/TL] (Cash Tender) 1 [AT/TL] (Cash Tender) 

2 [CHK TEND] (Check Tender) 2 [CHK TEND] (Cheque Tender) 

3 [Chg] (Charge Tender) 3 [CRT] (Credit Tender) 

4 [MISC TEND] (Misc. Tender) 4 [MISC TEND] (Misc. Tender) 

5 [CREDIT 1] (Credit 1 Tender) 5 [CPN] (Media-Coupon Tender) 

6 [CREDIT 2] (Credit 2 Tender) 6 [CREDIT 1] (Credit 1 Tender) 

7 [DEBIT] 7 [CREDIT 2] (Credit 2 Tender) 

8 [EBT CASH] 8 [CREDIT 3] (Credit 3 Tender) 

9 [EBT F/S] 9 [CREDIT 4] (Credit 4 Tender) 

10 [FSTL/TEND] (Food Stamp Tender) 10 [CREDIT 5] (Credit 5 Tender) 

11 Common High Limit for all depts. 11 Common High Limit for all depts. 

12 Common Low Limit for all depts.. 12 Common Low Limit for all depts.. 

NOTES: 1. As for “Common High Limit for all depts.” and “Common Low limit for all depts.”, the 

same is applied as Address 7 and 8 of DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING 

(Submode 3). 

2. If the individual High or Low Amount Limit of department has been set (in Submode 3), it 

prevails over the Common High or Low Limit for all departments here. 

3. The Amount Limit set value of each tender media is the high amount limit and is 

effective only when the media key is used for tendering but not when used as total key. 

Different from amount limit setting of departments, an exact value on all the digits can be 

set for tendering media. For example, if you enter 1234[#], an amount up to 12.34 can 

be tendered. 

Example) To set the Amount Limits of the following items: 

Key Code Amount Limit Set Values 

2 ([CHK TND]) 99.99 9999 

11 (Common High) 999.99 100000 

12 (Common Low) 0.01 1 


2 [ST] Item Code for Check Media Key 

9999 [#] Amount Limit Set Value 

11 [ST] Item Code for Common High Limit for all depts. 


12 [ST] Item Code for Common Low Limit for all depts. 


[AT/TL] To complete this submode 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P08 

#02 CHECK 99.99 

#11 1000.00 

#12 0.01 

0035 13:16TM


6-107 

6.16 Financial Report Item Name Programming (Submode 9) 


Item Names printed on Financial Report are programmed here. Many of them are also printed on 

sales receipts. Other Line Item Names will be programmed in 6.17 Print Line Item Name 

Programming (Submode 10). 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

After Financial Reset 


9 [X] |Item Code|[ST] Character entry [ST] [AT/TL] 

(See the table on the 

following pages.) 

Repeat for other items. 



NOTES: 1. As for most items, a maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters may be 

programmed for one item name. 

2. As shown in the table on the following pages, the Standard program data are preprogrammed 

(which is auto-set after a RAM Clear). Therefore, program only the items 

that need to be changed. 

Example) 

To program “NET GT” instead of “NET GT” for Item Code 2 (NET GT) all in double-sized characters. 


[2] [ST] (Item Code) 

[X] [X] All Double-sized Declaration 

[4] [1] [4] [#] (N) 

[4] [0] [5] [#] (E) 

[5] [0] [4] [#] 

[2] [0] [0] [#] 

(T) 

(Space) 

(Item Name) 

[4] [0] [7] [#] (G) 

[5] [0] [4] [#] 

[ST] 

(T) 

[AT/TL] (To complete this submode) 

* For sequentially programming items, the item 

code specification can be skipped. 

Indicates the end of each 

item name. (Any 

unprogrammed parts will 

be filled with blanks.) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P09 

#002 NET GT 

0036 13:17TM


Financial Report Item Name Table (US model) 

6-108 


Item 

Code 

Item Name Standard Program 

1 Ground Total G T 

2 NET GT N E T G T 

3 Gross Sale G S 

4 %+ (% I) % + 

5 %+ (% II) % + 

6 Net Sale without Tax N S 

7 -- VACANT -- 

8 Tax 1 T A X 1 

9 Tax 2 T A X 2 

10 Tax 3 T A X 3 

11 Tax 4 T A X 4 

12 Manual Tax (Tax 5) T A X 5 

13 Net Sale with Tax N S 

14 Positive HASH Depts. H A S H D P 

15 Negative HASH Depts. - H A S H D P 

16 %- on Subtotal (% I) % - 

17 %- on Subtotal (% II) % - 

18 Vendor Coupon V . C P N 

19 Discount on Subtotal D I S C 

20 Bottle Return B T R 

21 All Media Sales T O T A L 

22 Cash Sales (AT/TL) C A S H 

23 Media 1 Sales (CHECK) C H E C K 

24 Media 2 Sales (Chg) C h g 

25 Media 3 Sales (MISC) M I S C 

26 Media 4 Sales (Credit 1) C R E D I T 1 


28 Media 6 Sales (Debit) D E B I T 

29 -- vacant -- 

30 -- vacant -- 

31 Media 9 Sales (Food Stamp) F S T L 

32 Received-on-Account R / A 

33 Paid-Out P O 

34 Loan L O A N 

35 Pick Up P I C K U P 

36 Cash-in-drawer C A S H I D 

37 Media 1-in-drawer (CHECK) C H E C K I D 

38 Media 2-in-drawer (Chg) C h g I D 

39 Media 3-in-drawer (MISC) M I S C I D 

40 Media 4-in-drawer (Credit 1) C R T I D 1 


42 Media 6-in-drawer (Debit) D E B I T I D 

43 -- VACANT -- 

44 -- VACANT -- 

45 Food Stamp-in-drawer F S I D 

46 Food Stamp CHANGE F S C G


6-109 


Financial Report Item Name Table (US model) (Continued) 

Item 

Code 


47 Item Correct C O R R 

48 Void V O I D 

49 Misc. Void M I S C V D 

50 All Void A L L V D 

51 %- on Line Items (% I) % - 

52 %- on Line Items (% II) % - 

53 Dollar Discount on Line Items D I S C 

54 Store Coupon S . C P N 

55 Negative Depts. Total - D P T L 

56 Returned Merchandise R T N 

57 Negative Tax - T A X 

58 Negative Sales Total - S A L E 

59 Negative Mode Total R E G - 

60 Transfer Balance GT T R F T L 

61 Transfer + GT T R F + G T 

62 Transfer – GT T R F - G T 

63 Transfer + Daily T R F + 

64 Transfer – Daily T R F - 

65 PB (Previous Balance) Sales P B T L 

66 PB R/A (PB Paid) P B R / A 

67 PB PO (PB Refunded) P B P O 

68 -- VACANT -- 

69 Taxable Total 1 T X B L 1 




73 Selective Itemizer Total 1 S I 1 T L 


75 Tax-exempt Customer T A X E X 

76 -- VACANT -- 

77 Tax 1 Exempted Sales T A X 1 E X 




81 FS Amount Tax 1 Exempt F S E X 1 




85 Foreign Currency 1 C U R 1 





90 SP. Round for Foreign Currencies C U R R N D 

91 Sales Item Count per Customer I T E M / C U S 

92 Net Sale per Customer N S / C U S


6-110 


Financial Report Item Name Table (US model) (Continued) 

Item 

Code 

Total/Counter Name Standard Program 

93 No-Sale Counter N O S A L E 

94 Validation Counter V A L I C T R 

95 Hold Counter H O L D C T R 

96 -- VACANT -- 

97 Off-line Authorization O F F L I N E 

98 %- on Subtotal (% III) % - 

99 %- on Subtotal (% IV) % - 

100 %- on Subtotal (% V) % - 

101 %- on Subtotal (% VI) % - 

102 %- on Line Items (% III) % - 

103 %- on Line Items (% IV) % - 

104 %- on Line Items (% V) % - 

105 %- on Line Items (% VI) % - 



108 -- VACANT -- 

109 -- VACANT -- 

110 -- VACANT -- 

111 -- VACANT -- 

112 -- VACANT -- 

113 -- VACANT -- 

114 -- VACANT -- 

115 -- VACANT -- 

116 -- VACANT -- 

117 -- VACANT -- 

118 -- VACANT -- 

119 -- VACANT -- 

120 -- VACANT --


Financial Report Item Name Table (QP model) 

6-111 


Item 

Code 




3 NEG GT N E G G T 


5 Tax 1 (Add-on Tax 1) T A X 1 








13 Tax Total T A X T L 




17 % I (usually %+) % + 

18 % II (usually %-) % - 


20 Amount Discount D I S C 

21 EAN Coupon E A N C P N 

22 Bottle Return (Inside-sale) B T R 


24 Special Round Fractions S P . R N D 

25 Net Sale (All-Media Sales) N S 


27 Media 1 Sales (CHK) C H E C K 

28 Media 2 Sales (CRT) C R T 


30 Media 4 Sales (CPN) C P N 

31 Media 5 Sales (Credit 1) C R T T L 1 







38 Bottle Return (Outside-sale) B T R 




42 Cash-in-drawer (Foreign Currency 1) C A S H C U R 1 I D 




46 Cash-in-drawer (Foreign Currency 5) C A S H C U R 5 I D


6-112 


Financial Report Item Name Table (QP model) (Continued) 

Item 

Code 


47 Media 1-in-drawer (CHK) C H E C K I D 

48 Cheque-in-drawer (Foreign Currency 1) C K C U R 1 I D 





53 Media 2-in-drawer (CRT) C R T I D 

54 Credit-in-drawer (Foreign Currency 1) C R T C U R 1 I D 






60 MISC-in-drawer (Foreign Currency 1) M I S C C U R 1 I D 





65 Media 4-in-drawer (CPN) C P N I D 

66 Coupon-in-drawer (Foreign Currency 1) C P N C U R 1 I D 










76 Cash-in-drawer Difference C A S H D I F 

77 Media 1-in-drawer Difference C K D I F 

78 Media 2-in-drawer Difference C R T D I F 

79 Media 3-in-drawer Difference M I S C D I F 

80 Media 4-in-drawer Difference C P N D I F 

81 Media 5-in-drawer Difference C R T 1 D I F 











92 Negative-Balance Sales - S A L E


6-113 



Item 

Code 



94 Haus Bon 1 H A U S B O N 1 


96 %- on Line Items % - 

97 Amount Discount on Line Items D I S C 










107 VAT 1 or Tax 1 V A T 1 















122 VAT Total V A T T L 

123 Net Sale Without Tax N . N S 



126 Tax-exempt Customer V A T E X 

127 VAT 1 or Tax 1 Exempt V A T 1 E X 








135 SP. Round for Foreign Currency C U R R N D 


137 Sales Amount per Customer T L / C U S 

138 No-Sale Counter N O S A L E



6-114 

6.17 Print Line Item Name Programming (Submode 10) 

Item 

Code 


139 [C] key Counter C L E A R 

140 Power OFF/ON Counter P F C T R 

141 Money Declaration Counter M . D C R 

142 

143 

Commission C O M M I S S I O N 

to 

150 

-- VACANT -- 


Print Line Item Names not listed in 6.16 Financial Report Item Name Programming (Submode 9) 

can be programmed here. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



10 [X] | Item Code | [ST] Character entry [ST] [AT/TL] 




NOTES: 

1. The maximum number of characters programmable for each item is in the table on the next page. 

Please note that some items require their name entries as one set. The maximum number of 

characters in the table shows the capacity in regular-sized characters. One double-sized character 

occupies two regular-sized characters’ space. (Also refer to CHARACTER ENTRIES at the 

beginning of this chapter.) 

2. As shown in the table on the next pages, the Standard Program data are preprogrammed (which is 

auto-set after a RAM Clear). Therefore, program only the items that need to be changed. 

Example) 

To program the amount mark “$” in Item Code 7: (The amount mark has not been preset as the 

standard program data). 

Meanwhile, other names for two other items in the same Item Code 7 should remain the same as the 

Standard Program data (i.e. “@” for Unit Price and “ITEM” for Sale Item Count). 


[7] [ST] (Item Code) 

[4] [0] [0] [#] (@) 

[2] [0] [4] [#] ($) 

[4] [0] [9] [#] (I) 

[5] [0] [4] [#] (T) 

[4] [0] [5] [#] (E) 

[4] [1] [3] [#] (M) 

[ST] (To complete character setting) 


* For sequentially programming items, the item 

code specification can be skipped. 



Indicates the end of 

each item name. 

(Any unprogrammed 

parts will be filled 

with blanks.) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

#007 @$ITEM 

P10 

0037 13:19TM


Item 

Code 

Print Line Item Name Table 

6-115 


Max. Number of Characters 

Item Name or Application Standard program 

1 Subtotal in transactions S U B T L 8 

2 Cash Tendered in transactions C A T E N D 8 

3 Sale Total of each transaction T O T A L 8 

4 Change due in transactions C H A N G E 8 

5 Cash Refunded C A S H 8 

6 Negative Department Total - T O T A L 8 

The following items must to be set together. (NOTE 1) @ I T E M 7 

Unit Price Symbol 1 

7 

Amount Mark ($, €, etc.) 1 

Sale Item Count Symbol on Receipt 4 

Unit Price Symbol for multiplication 

(QP model: V001.002 and after) 1 

The following items must to be set together. (NOTE 2) # C L T M 6 

Register No. Symbol 2 

8 

Cashier/Clerk Symbol 2 

Time Symbol 2 

9 Customer Count (on reports) C U 2 

The following items must to be set together. (US model) l b lb g Kg $ 6 

LB Weight (for scale entry, Tare Weight, and General Unit Weight) 2 

10 

LB Weight (for PLU reports) 

Gram Weight (for Tare weight, and General Unit Weight) 

1 

2 

Kg Weight (for PLU reports and General Unit Weight) 1 

Amount Mark (at scale entry) 1 

The following items must to be set together. (QP model) K g Kg g 7 

Scale Weight Symbol (at Entry) 2 

10 Scale Item Price Amount Mark 2 

Unit Weight in PLU report 1 

Unit Weight Symbol (gram) 2 

11 Previous Balance (Credit) (NOTE 5) P B + 8 

12 Previous Balance (Debit) (NOTE 5) P B - 8 

13 Transferred Amount in Charge Posting N E W B A L 8 

14 Item Correct C O R R ↑ 8 

The following items must to be set together. O N O F F 8 

15 ON portion of Training ON/OFF 4 

OFF portion of Training ON/OFF 4 

16 -- vacant -- --- 

17 Check No. Symbol C H E C K N o 8 

18 

Manual Scale Header on Receipt 

Manual Scale Header on Receipt 

(US model) 

(QP model) 

M A N W T 8 

8 

19 Post-issue Receipt Header C O P Y 8 

20 PLU Symbol (when no name is programmed for the PLU) P L U 8 

21 Taxable Total (by [TXBL TL] key) T X B L T L 8 

22 Food Stampable Total (by [FSTL TEND] key (US model) F S / T L 8 

23 Food Stamp (US model) F - S T M P 8 

24 Food Stamp Change (US model) F S C H G 8 

25 Gallon (Gasoline Entry) (US model) G a L 3 

26 Hold Operation (US model) H O L D 10 

27 Recall Operation (US model) R E C A L L 10 

Sunday, Monday (as part of the date print line) S U N M O N 8 

28 Sunday 4 

Monday 4 

Tuesday, Wednesday (as part of the date print line) T U E W E D 8 

29 Tuesday 4 

Wednesday 4


Print Line Item Name Table (Continued) 

6-116 


Max. Number of Characters 

Item 

Code 

Item Name or Application Standard program 

30 

Thursday, Friday (as part of the date print line) 

Thursday 

T H U F R I 8 

4 

Friday 4 

31 Saturday (as part of the date print line) S A T 4 

32 Training ON/OFF operation, Cashier Report T R A I N I N G 10 

33 Cashier Sign ON S I G N O N 10 

34 Cashier Sign OFF S I G N O F F 10 

35 Cashier Sign IN S I G N I N 10 

36 Cashier Sign OUT S I G N O U T 10 

37 

Scanning Entry by Coupons 

Scanning Entry by Coupons 

(US model) 

(QP model) 

U 

E 

P 

A 

C 

N 

C 

C 

P 

P 

N 

N 

12 

12 

38 % calculation on Additional Item Entries after Subtotal and % entries G R P . S T 8 

39 -- VACANT -- --- 

40 -- VACANT -- --- 

41 -- VACANT -- --- 

42 -- VACANT -- --- 

43 -- VACANT -- --- 

44 -- VACANT -- --- 

45 EFT Manual Card No. Entries (US model) M A N U A L C A R D # 12 

46 -- VACANT -- --- 

47 -- VACANT -- --- 

48 -- VACANT -- --- 

49 -- VACANT -- --- 

50 

Foreign Currency 1 (for Sales Entry, Programming, 

C U R 1 12 

51 

52 

53 

Program Data Read) (QP model) 









C U R 2 12 

C U R 3 12 

C U R 4 12 

54 

C U R 5 12 

55 EFT Expiring Date (US model) E X P D A T E 12 

56 EFT Authorization Amount (US model) C A R D : 12 

57 EFT Void Credit, Void Credit Return Amount (US model) V O I D : 12 

58 EFT Refund Amount (US model) R E F U N D 12 

59 EFT Post Authorization Amount (US model) P O S T A U T H : 12 

60 EFT Authorization Code (US model) A P P # 12 

61 EFT Reference Number (US model) R E F # 12 

62 EFT Response data Error (US model) R E S D A T A E R R 12 

63 Reserved (US model) R E S E R V E D 12 

64 Birthday Check (US model) I D C H E C K 12 

65 NET Total (QP model) N E T T L 12 

66 

TAX 

VAT/TAX 

(US model) 

(QP model) 

T 

V 

A 

A 

X 

T 

8 

8 

67 EBT F/S Balance Amount (US model) E B T F S B A L : 12 

68 EBT Cash Balance Amount (US model) E B T B A L : 12 

69 EBT F/S Voucher Amount (US model) V O U C H A U T H : 12 

70 EBT F/S Voucher Number (US model) V O U C H E R # 12 

71 EBT Balance Inquiry Title (US model) E B T B A L I N Q 12 

72 EBT Balance Inquiry Amount (US model) B A L A N C E 12 

73 EFT License Number (US model) L I C # 10 

74 Gift Card Number (US model) A C C T # : 6 

75 Gift Card Authorization Code (US model) A P P : 4 

76 Gift Card Reference Number (US model) R E F # 5 

77 

Amount deducted from Gift Card 

(US model) 

B A L : 4 

78 Gift Card Cash Out (US model) C A S H O U T 12 

79 Gift Card Balance (US model) G I F T B A L A N C E 12


6-117 


NOTES: 1. The name in Standard Program for the Amount Mark in Item Code 7 is set with a blank 

after a RAM Clear. When the specific Amount Mark for the domestic currency is 

required on sales receipts (such as £, ¥, $), you must program the entire contents of 

Item Code 7. 

2. The Cashier Symbol to be set in Item Code 8 (“CL” in Standard Program) will be used 

to print the 2-digit Cashier ID code on a validation slip. On receipts, the name of each 

cashier programmed in the CASHIER CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING operation 

will be printed. 

3. If no programming is performed for an item, the name in the ”Standard Program” 

column will automatically be active. Therefore, program only the items that require 

changes from the standard print data. 

4. On the following page, two tables are placed for other fixed or auto-preset data for 

printing various symbols, items, or descriptors. 

5. When the Check Track option is selected, Item Codes 11 and 12 are used to print 

when [PICK UP BAL] and [CODE OPEN] keys are used respectively. Therefore, both 

of them should be changed into a different name, such as “CUS CODE #”, ”FILE NO.”, 

etc. (followed by the actual Customer File Code No. on receipts). 

OTHER AUTO-PRESET DATA (programmable) 

The following data are automatically preset in program memory. However, when the corresponding 

items’ names are programmed in the corresponding Submodes, the programmed name will be active 

instead of the preset data. 

Item Preset Data Remarks (Corresponding Submode No.) 

Major Group MGPxx xx = Major Group Code (14) 

Minor Group GPxx xx = Minor Group Code (13) 

Department DPxx xx = Department Code (3) 

Credit Card Company ID CRTxx xx = Credit Company Code (14) 

Cashier Symbol xxCL xx = Cashier ID Code (14) 

Salesperson Symbol SPxx xx = Salesperson Code (14) 

PLU Group PLU GPxx xx = PLU Group Code (14) 

OTHER FIXED DATA (unchangeable) 

Item Fixed Data Remarks 

RAM Clear RAM-C 

Data Clear DATA-C 

Status Clear STATUS-C 

Program Mode Symbol P Used as header in “SET” or “BLIND” mode print 

System Option Address # 

Percent Rate Symbol % 

Non-add Number Symbol # 

Taxable Status Mark T 

Food Stampable Status Mark F (US model) 

Negative Amount Mark - 

Quantity Extension Mark X 

Manual Scale Item Mark � 

Sub-link Dept/PLU Mark For Dept-to-Dept or PLU-to-PLU link entries 

SI-net Status Mark S (SI = Selective Itemizer 1 and/or 2) 

Power OFF/ON Count Mark �� Prints on Journal (QP model) 

Misc MISC Report Print for Master Satellite System 

Result of EFT Batch OK For EFT Batch operation (US model) 

Result of EFT Batch NG For EFT Batch operation (US model)


6-118 

6.18 VAT or Tax Rate Setting (Submode 12) (QP model) 

6.18 VAT or Add-on Tax Rate Setting (Submode12) (QP model) 

In this operation, the rates of VATs or Add-on Taxes are set. (Which VAT or Add-on Tax is applicable 

to each Department or PLU has already been set in the DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING 

operation, Submode 3, and PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 4). 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

After Financial daily Reset 


12 [X] | VAT or Add-on Tax Code | [ST] | Rate | [#] [AT/TL] 

1: VAT 1 1: Tax 1 

2: VAT 2 2: Tax 2 

3: VAT 3 3: Tax 3 

4: VAT 4 4: Tax 4 

5: VAT 5 5: Tax 5 

6: VAT 6 6: Tax 6 

7: VAT 7 7: Tax 7 

8: VAT 8 8: Tax 8 

(for Add-on Tax) 

Repeat for other VAT or Tax rate 

NOTES: 1. Prior to the Rate setting, VAT or Add-on Tax Code (1 to 8) should be entered. When the 

code 0 is entered, the rate setting causes an error. 

2. Either VAT or Add-on Tax can be used. Tax feature is according to the selected status 

for Address 21, Bit 5 of the system option. 

Example) To set the following VAT rate: 

VAT 1: 10% 

VAT 2: 20% 


[1] [ST] VAT Code 1 

[1] [0] [#] VAT 1 rate (10%) 

[2] [ST] VAT Code 2 

[2] [0] [#] VAT 2 rate (20%) 


0 to 99,99 (%); 

use the [.] key if 

a decimal portion 

is contained. 

* (For sequentially programming 

VAT or Add-on Tax Codes and 

Rates, the code specification 

can be skipped.) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P12 

VAT1 10.00% 

VAT2 20.00% 

0038 13:20TM


6-119 

6.19 Non-Taxable Amount Limit Setting (Submode 12) (US model) 

6.19 Non-Taxable Amount Limit Setting (Submode 12) (US model) 

This submode is applied only to the provinces of Quebec and Ontario, Canada. 

(When SET status has been selected for Address 29, Bit 2 of the system option, this submode is 

available.) 

If the programmed data in this submode is carried out: 

Tax1 will automatically be exempted from the sale total when the sum of the sale portion subject to 

Tax 1 and the sale portion subject to Tax 2 is equal to or less than the set limit amount. Meanwhile 

Tax 2 to Tax 4 due are always taxed regardless of the Tax 1 exemption. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

After Financial Daily Reset 

Control Lock: SET 

12 [X] 1 [ST] | Non-taxable Limit Amount | [#] 

* 

** 

2 [ST] | Non-taxable Quantity | [#] [AT/TL] 

* When the Non-Taxable quantity only is changed. 

** When the Non-taxable quantity is programmed immediately after programming the Non-taxable 

limit amount, the key operation “2 [ST]” can be omitted. 

NOTES: 1. This program is not applicable in areas where Food Stamps are handled in sale entries. 

2. When the Canada Tax feature has been selected, neither the [FS/M] nor the 

[FSTL/TEND] key operation is possible. 

3. Even if the memory of the [FS/M] or [FSTL/TEND] key is open, the Non-Taxable 

Amount Limit Setting can be performed. 

Example) To set the following Non-taxable Limit Amount and Non-taxable Quantity: 

Non-taxable Limit Amount: $5.00 

Non-taxable Quantity: 20 


[1] [ST] 

[5] [0] [0] [#] Non-taxable Limit Amount 

[2] [ST] 

[2] [0] [#] Non-taxable Quantity 



(1 to 9999¢; 0 to reset the limit) 


(1 to 99; 0 to reset the quantity) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P12 

#01 $5.00 

#02 20 

0038 13:20TM


6.20 Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13) 

6-120 

6.20 Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13) 

In this operation, the name of each Minor Group is programmed. Which Departments and Minor 

Groups are linked to each Major Group has already been set in the DEPARTMENT TABLE 

PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 3. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



13 [X] | Minor Group Code | [ST] Character entry [ST] [AT/TL] 


(1 to 30) 

NOTE: A maximum of 12 regular-sized characters may be set for each Minor Group name. One 

double-sized character occupies two regular-sized characters’ space. Also see the 

CHARACTER ENTRIES at the beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a 

Minor Group, an auto-preset data is assigned as the Minor Group Name (GPxx; xx = Minor 

Group Code 01 to 30). 

Example) To program the following names to the respective Minor Groups: 

Minor Group 1 V E & F R 

Minor Group 2 M E & F I 

: 

: 

Minor Group 8 O T H E R S 


1 [ST] (Minor Group Code) 

[X] 506 [#] 405 [#] [#] 206 [#] [#] [X] 406 [#] 

502 [#] [ST] (Name: VE & FR) 


[X] 413 [#] 405 [#] [#] 206 [#] [#] [X] 406 [#] 

409 [#] [ST] (Name: ME & FI) 

: 

: 


[X] 415 [#] 504 [#] 408 [#] 405 [#] 502 [#] 

503 [#] [ST] (Name: OTHERS) 


* 


(See NOTE) 

Repeat for other Groups (max. 30 Groups) * (For sequentially programming Group 

Codes and Names, the code 

specification can be skipped.) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

01 VE & FR 

02 ME & FI 

08 OTHERS 

P13 

0040 13:23TM


6.21 Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14) 

6-121 

6.21 Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14) 

In this operation, the name of each Major Group is programmed. Which Departments and Minor 

Groups are linked to each Major Group has already been set in the DEPARTMENT TABLE 

PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 3. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



14 [X] | Major Group Code | [ST] Character entry [ST] [AT/TL] 


(1 to 10) 

NOTE: A maximum of 12 regular-sized characters may be set for each Major Group name. One 



Major Group, an auto-preset data is assigned as the Major Group Name (GPxx; xx = Major 

Group Code 01 to 10). 

Example) To program the following names to the respective Major Groups: 

Major Group 1 F R E S H 

Major Group 2 M A N U F 

: 

Major Group 3 O T H E R 


1 [ST] (Major Group Code) 

[X] [X] (all double-sized declaration) 

406 [#] 502 [#] 405 [#] 503 [#] 408 [#] 

[ST] (Name: FRESH) 



413 [#] 401 [#] 414 [#] 505 [#] 406 [#] 

[ST] (Name: MANUF) 



415 [#] 504 [#] 408 [#] 405 [#] 502 [#] 

[ST] (Name: OTHER) 


* 


(See NOTE) 

Repeat for other Groups (max. 30 Groups) * (For sequentially programming Group 

Codes and Names, the code 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P14 

01 FRESH 

02 MANUF 

03 OTHER 

0041 13:25TM


6.22 Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting (Submode 15) 

6.22 Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting 

(Submode 15) 

This submode creates files for customers whose sales are to be processed using the check track 

memory. When SET status has been selected for Address 30, Bit 5 of the system option, this 

submode is available.) 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



15 [X] | Customer File Code | [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL] 


(1 to 999999999999) 

NOTES: 

1. The Customer File codes that are programmed in this submode will be accessed by entering the 

code and depressing the [PICK UP BAL] key for a sale entry in a charge posting operation in the 

REG or MGR mode. At this time, the balance of the new customer assigned with the code will show 

zero which will be printed as the previous balance line. On finalizing the sale, the new balance will 

be printed at the bottom of the receipt, which will be stored in the same Customer File Code 

memory area. Thus the operator always use the [PICK UP BAL] key for both starting a new 

customer’s account and at recalling the customer’s balance. 

2. If all the programmed Customer File Codes are used up and a new customer file code is required to 

be opened during the business hours, the [CODE OPEN] key may be used. When a new code is 

entered, followed by [CODE OPEN], the code is printed as the previous balance line item with the 

balance zero on the receipt, and at the same time, the code is added to the list of the Customer File 

Codes programmed in the above operation of Submode 15. However, the use of the [CODE 

OPEN] key can be programmed to require Manager Intervention, which can control the operator’s 

opening of a new customer file code outside the list of the Customer File Codes programmed in 

Submode 15. 

3. When the Standard Memory is used, a maximum of 1000 Customer File Codes can be programmed. 

When the Expansion Memory is used, a maximum of 3,000 Customer File Codes can be 

programmed. However, the actual maximum number of Customer Files varies depending on the 

RAM allocation. 

Deletion of Individual Customer File Codes 

[ITEM CORR] 

15 [X] or | Customer File Code | [ST] [AT/TL] 

[VOID] Max. 12 digits 

Deletion of All Customer File Codes 

Repeat for other codes 

Repeat for other codes to be deleted. 

* For sequentially programming codes, 

the code specification can be skipped.) 

[ITEM CORR] 

15 [X] or [ALL VOID] [AT/TL] 

[VOID] 

NOTE: If the balance of the deleted code is not zero, the Transfer memory (TRF TL, TRF +GT, TRF - 

GT) will automatically be adjusted to zero. At that time, the previous balance to be reset will 

be printed. 

6-122 

Max. 16 characters for 

the Customer’s Name 

When no name is to be 

programmed for the code


6.22 Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting (Submode 15) 

Example) To program the following Customer File Codes with Customer Names: 


CODE NAME Enter 15 and depress the [X] 

1 JAMES HAILY 1 [ST] (Customer File Code) 

: 410 [#] 401 [#] 413 [#] 405 [#] 

: 503 [#] [#] 408 [#] 401 [#] 409 [#] 

: 412 [#] 509 [#] [ST] 

: (NAME: JAMES HAILY) 

: : 

: : 

: : 

: : 

: : 

: : 

: : 

105 HELEN REED 105 [ST] (Customer File Code) 

408 [#] 405 [#] 412 [#] 405 [#] 

414 [#] [#] 502 [#] 405 [#] 405 [#] 

404 [#] [ST] 

[AT/TL] 

Example) To delete the Customer File Code 104 that has 

once been programmed. 

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 15 and depress the [X]. 

[ITEM CORR] 104 [ST] (Customer File Code) 

[AT/TL] 

6-123 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P15 

#000000000001 

JAMES HAILY 

#000000000105 

00002 

HELEN REED 



PHONE: 87-6437 

0042 13:27TM 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P15 

#000000000104 

-------------------------------- 

00002 

0043 13:29TM


6-124 

6.23 Display Upper-Row Message Programming (Submode 17) 


This submode programs the message content to be displayed, when certain items are entered, on the 

upper row of the Operator Display. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for other messages. 

* (For sequentially programming items, 

the item code specification can be 

skipped.) 

17 [X] |Item Code| [ST] Character entry [ST] [AT/TL] 

(See table below.) 


(See NOTE below.) 


each item name. 

(Any unprogrammed 

parts will be filled with 

blanks.) 

NOTES: 1. A maximum of 16 characters can be programmed as the message for each Item Code. 

Only regular-sized characters are effective. 

2. As shown in the table above, the Standard Program Message is prepared for each Item 

Code. (which is auto-set after a RAM Clear). Therefore, program only the message 

that needs to be changed. 

Item 

Code 

Application Standard Program Message 

1 Scale Entry S C A L E 

2 

Signed-OFF or Signed-OUT condition 

(in REG, MGR, or - mode) 

3 Balance due after a short tendered T O T A L 

4 

After [C] key depression for an Inquiry 

Error occurrence (M/S System) 

R E T R Y ? 

5 PLU addition to PLU additional table file P L U A D D 

6 to 9 -- vacant -- 

10 Price Shift 1 Operation (QP model) P R I C E S H I F T 1 



13 PLU Stock Read Operation (QP model) S T O C K 

14 PLU Price Read operation 

[DISPLAY 1] Depression (Sale Finalization 

R E A D 

15 by the EBT Card; for Food Stamp) 

(US model) 

E B T A U T H 

16 


by the Debit Card) (US model) 

D E B I T A U T H 

17 


by the Check) (US model) 

C H E C K A U T H 

18 


by the Credit Card) (US model) 

C R E D I T A U T H 

19 


by the Cash EBT Card) (US model) 

C A S H E B T 

20 

[DISPLAY 6] Depression (For issue of the 

2nd Receipt; Store Copy) (US model) 

R E C E I P T 

21 

Age Confirmation for Cigarette or Alcoholic 

Beverage Entry (US model) 

C H E C K I D 

L O G


6-125 


Item 

Code 


22 [PACK] Depression (US model) P A C K 

23 [3rd PRICE] Depression (US model) 3 R D P R I C E 

24 to 30 -- vacant -- 

31 

Card Swipe Request for EFT (US 

model) 

S W I P E C A R D 

32 EFT is under process (US model) P R O C E S S I N G 

33 EFT was approved (US model) A P P R O V E D 

34 EFT was not approved (US model) D E C L I N E 

35 PIN Entry Request for EFT (US model) E N T E R P I N # 

36 

Authorized Code Entry Request for EFT 

(US model) 

E N T A U T C D 

37 

Reference No. Entry Request for EFT 

(US model) 

E N T R E F . N O 

38 

Card No. Manual Entry for EFT 

(US model) 

M A N U A L C D 

39 

Card No. Entry Request for EFT 

(US model) 

E N T C A R D # 

40 

Expiration Date Entry Request for EFT 

(US model) 

E X P D A T E 

41 -- vacant -- 

42 

Amount Entry Request for EFT 

(US model) 

E N T A M O U N T 

43 EFT Cancel (US model) E F T C A N C E L 

44 Slip Printer Connection Check S L I P D I S C O N N E C T ? 

45 

EFT is waiting to be processed 

(US model) 

W A I T I N G 

46 VAT Total (QP model) V A T . T O T A L 

47 Preset Price Open P R O P E N 

48 Listing Capacity Open L C O P E N 

49 [OPEN] Key Depression O P E N 

50 

Multiplication 

Multiplication 

(QP model) X 

(US model) @ / F O R 

51 [SI1/M] Key Depression S I 1 / M 

52 [SI2/M] Key Depression S I 2 / M 

53 [FS/M] Key Depression (US model) F S / M 

54 [TX1/M] Key Depression T X 1 / M 




58 [TX5/M] Key Depression (QP model) T X 5 / M 




62 

Data backup is being performed on 

the Backup Master Terminal 

B A C K U P C O P Y 

63 

[ITEM CORR] key depression 

during a scale error 

S C A L E D I S C O N E C T ? 

64 

Account No. Request for EFT 

(US model) 

E N T A C C T N U M B E R 

65 

Voucher No. Request for EFT 

(US model) 

E N T V O U C H E R #


6-126 


Item 

Code 


66 

Routing No. Request for EFT 

(US model) 

R O U T I N G N O 

67 

State Code Request for EFT 

(US model) 

S T A T E C O D E 

68 

License No. Request for EFT 

(US model) 

L I C E N S E N U M B E R 

69 

Birthday Entry Request for EFT 

(US model) 

B I R T H D A T E 

70 

[BALACE INQUIRY] key depression 

during an EFT operation (US model) 

B A L A N C E I N Q U I R Y 

71 

[CHECK] key depression during an 

EFT operation (US model) 

[ITEM CORR] key is depressed when a 

slip printer error occurred during the 

S L I D E C H E C K 

72 validation compulsory status or 

endorsement compulsory status. 

(US model) 

C O M P C A N C E L ? 

73 Open Batch for EFT (US model) B A T C H O P E N E D 

74 Close Batch for EFT (US model) B A T C H C L O S E D 

75 -- vacant -- 

76 

Gift Card Reload for EFT 

(US model) 

G I F T C A R D R E L O A D 

77 

Gift Card Cash Out for EFT 

(US model) 

G I F T C A R D C A O U T 

78 

Security Code Entry Request for 

EFT (US model) 

E N T S E C U R I T Y # 

Example) 

To program “BALANCE DUE” instead of Standard Program Message “TOTAL” for Item Code 3. 


[3] [ST] (Item Code 3) 

[4] [0] [2] [#] (B) 

[4] [0] [1] [#] (A) 

[4] [1] [2] [#] (L) 

[4] [0] [1] [#] (A) 

[4] [1] [4] [#] (N) 

[4] [0] [3] [#] (C) 

[4] [0] [5] [#] (E) 

[#] (Space) 

[4] [0] [4] [#] (D) 

[5] [0] [5] [#] (U) 

[4] [0] [5] [#] (E) 

[ST] (to complete this item) 

[AT/TL] To complete this submode. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P17 

#003 BALANCE DUE 

0044 13:31TM


6-127 

6.24 Combination Report Table Programming (Submode 19) 


In this operation, a maximum of three sets of reports to be issued on the individual terminal may be 

programmed. Thus, in report taking, those reports contained in one set will be outputted in a string by 

a simple key operation. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for other tables. 

19 [X] |Table No.| [ST] | Report Code | [#] [ST] [AT/TL] 

1 digits (1 to 3) 

Report Code Table 

Report 

Code 

Report Name 

X 

Mode for output 

Z GTX GTZ 

3 Financial ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ 

4 All Individual Cashier ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ 

5 All Salesperson ∗ ∗ 

6 

Credit Card Company Sales (All Individual 

∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ 

Companies) 

* (For sequentially programming Tables, the 

Table No. specification can be skipped. 

3 to 24 (See the 

REPORT CODE TABLE 

below), or 0 to delete the 

table. 

Repeatable for max. five different reports combination 

7 Department Gross Profit (QP model) ∗ ∗ 

8 Department Group ∗ ∗ 

9 Each Media Sales and In-drawer Total ∗ 

10 Hourly Range ∗ ∗ 

11 All Department ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ 

12 All Media Sales and Cash-in-drawer ∗ 

13 All PLU Sales ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ 

14 All PLU Stock (QP model) ∗ 

15 All Customer File ∗ ∗ 

24 PLU Group ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ 

∗: output 

Blank: no output 

NOTES: 1. In report takings using a Combination Report Table, only those marked with “∗” (output) 

will be outputted of all the contained reports in accordance with the mode set at that time. 

Example: When Reports 8 (Department Group), 10 (Hourly Range), and 11 (All 

Department) are programmed in a table: 

Reports outputted in each mode 

X: Department Group, Hourly Range, All Department 

Z: Hourly Range, All Department 

GTX: Department Group, All Department 

GTZ: All Department


6-128 


2. For designating each Combination Report Table in report takings in X or Z mode, 

operate as in the table below: 

Combination Report 

Daily Report 

GT Reports 

Table Output 

(Read or Reset) 

(Read or Reset) 

Table 1 [AT/TL] 200 [AT/TL] 

Table 2 1 [AT/TL] 201 [AT/TL] 

Table 3 2 [AT/TL] 202 [AT/TL] 

3. When changes are made on report combination in a table, entirely or partially, pro-gram 

all the reports in that table again. 

4. An error will result if a Report Code that has already been entered is attempted to enter 

again in the same table. 

5. In Table No. 1, auto-preset report combination of Report 11 (All Depts) and Report 3 

(Financial) is programmed. It will be active as Table No. 1 content unless no data are 

programmed for Table No. 1. 

6. For QP model, when the compulsory operation of Money Declaration has been selected 

in the system option the following report is not issued. 

Each Cashier Permitted 

Report 

Type Cashier Type 

Media Sales & In-drawer Report x x 

All Media Sales and Cash-in drawer Report x x 

Daily All Cashier Report x o 

GT All Cashier Report o o 

Example) To program the following report combinations: 

Table No. Report Code: Report Name 

1 6: Credit Card Company 

8: Dept Group 

9: Each Media Sales and In-drawer 

2 5: All Salesperson 

10: Hourly Range 

11: All Dept 


1 [ST] (Table No. 1) 

6 [#] (Credit Card Company) 

8 [#] (Dept Group) 

9 [#] (Each Media Sales and In-drawer) 

[ST] (to complete Table No. 1) 

2 [ST] (Table No. 2) 

5 [#] (All Salesperson) 

10 [#] (Hourly Range) 

11 [#] (All Dept) 

[ST] (to complete Table No. 2) 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

O: Issued 

X: Not issued 

P19 

#1 0608090000 

#2 0510110000 

0045 13:33TM


6-129 

6.25 Salesperson Code and Name Programming (Submode 20) 


By programming Salesperson Codes here, those codes may be used in sales entries. In addition, the 

name of each salesperson can be programmed in maximum 12 characters. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for other Salespersons 

20 [X] | Salesperson Code | [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL] 

1 to 99 Max. 12 characters 


NOTES: 1. A maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters may be programmed for a 

name. A combination of both types is also available. 

2. Even if no name is programmed (i.e. skipping the Character Entries before the second 

[ST] key) for a Salesperson Code, that code can be used in sale entries. Then, autopreset 

ID symbol “SP xx” (xx = Salesperson Code) will be printed instead of a name in 

this case, for his/her ID in receipt print, etc. 

Example) To program the following salesperson code and name: 

Code Name 

1 White 

2 Stacy 

3 Jansen 


1 [ST] (Salesperson Code 1) 

507 [#] (W) 

608 [#] (h) 

609 [#] (i) 

704 [#] (t) 

605 [#] (e) 

[ST] 


503 [#] (S) 

704 [#] (t) 

601 [#] (a) 

603 [#] (c) 

709 [#] (y) 

[ST] 


410 [#] (J) 

601 [#] (a) 

614 [#] (n) 

703 [#] (s) 

605 [#] (e) 

614 [#] (n) 

[ST] 


* (For sequentially programming codes, the 

code number specification can be skipped.) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

01 White 

02 Stacy 

03 Jansen 

P20 

0046 13:35TM


Deletion 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

After Daily Salesperson Reset 


6-130 


20 [X] [ITEM CORR] | Salesperson Code | [ST] [AT/TL] 

or 1 to 99 

[VOID] 

NOTE: When a Salesperson Code is deleted in the above operation, no entries using that code will 

be accepted until the code is again opened in the “Programming” operation already described. 

Example) To delete Salesperson Code 3 (name: Jansen) that was once programmed: 


[ITEM CORR] 

3 [ST] 

[AT/TL] 

Repeat for other salesperson to be deleted. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P20 

03 Jansen 

-------------------------------- 

0047 13:37TM


6.26 Credit Card Company ID Code and Name Programming (Submode 21) 


This operation programs the name of each credit card company. In sales entries, credit cards of 

maximum 12 different companies may be used by entering the ID code for the company (1 to 12) and 

then depressing the [CARD No.] key prior to the [Chg] (US model)/[CRT] (QP model) key for finalizing 

a sale. If no name is programmed for the company ID code, the initial program name will be printed as 

the credit card company name on sale receipts and reports. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for other companies. 

21 [X] | Company ID Code | [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL] 

1 to 12 

assigned by the store 

(See NOTE 1 below) 

* (For sequentially programming codes, the 

ID code specification can be skipped.) 

NOTES: 1. The names shown on the table below are initially programmed for credit company 

names. 

Company 

ID Code 

Initial Program 


Remarks 

1 VISA CRT01 

2 MASTER CARD CRT02 

3 AMEX CRT03 

4 DISCOVER CRT04 

5 DINERS CLUB CRT05 

6 JCB CRT06 

7 CRT07 CRT07 

8 CRT08 CRT08 

9 CRT09 CRT09 

10 CRT10 CRT10 

11 CRT11 CRT11 

12 AUTH PROCESS CRT12 Used for the EBT feature (US model) 

2. A maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters may be entered for a 

company name. A combination of both types is also available. 

6-131 


(See NOTE 2 below)


Example) To assign the ID codes and program the names as follows: 

ID Code Company Name 

1 ABC 

2 LMN 

3 OPQ 

4 XYZ 


1 [ST] (Company ID Code 1) 

401 [#] (A) 

402 [#] (B) 

403 [#] (C) 

[ST] 


412 [#] (L) 

413 [#] (M) 

414 [#] (N) 

[ST] 


415 [#] (O) 

500 [#] (P) 

501 [#] (Q) 

[ST] 


508 [#] (X) 

509 [#] (Y) 

510 [#] (Z) 

[ST] 



6-132 

01 ABC 

02 LMN 

03 OPQ 

04 XYZ 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P21 

0048 13:39TM


6.27 Endorsement (or France Cheque Print) Message Programming (Submode 22) 

6.27 Endorsement (or France Cheque Print) Message Programming 

(Submode 22) 

Up to 90 characters of message programmed here (30 characters x 3 lines) will be printed on the 

check as endorsement message by the Remote Slip Printer (hardware option). The print will be 

activated by depressing the [CHECK No.] key after finalizing the sale. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



22 [X] | Line No. | [ST] Character Entries [ST] | Line Feed Value | [AT/TL] 

NOTES: 1. When all the three lines are programmed with all blanks, no empty line feeding will occur 

in actual printing on the remote slip printer. But when only one line is programmed with 

any character and the other two lines are programmed with all blanks, two empty line 

feeding will occur. 

2. A maximum of 30 characters may be entered for each line. When a double-sized 

character is entered, it occupies two regular-sized characters’ space. 

3. When a value is entered for “Line Feed Value,” printing of data actually starts after 

feeding the number of lines of the entered value. 

4. The number of the fed lines after RAM clear is programmed to 4. 

Example) To program the following endorsement message: 

T E C S T O R E Line No. 1 

1 3 4 3 P E A C H D R I V E , L I V E R P O O L , Line No. 2 

E N G L A N D Line No. 3 

Feed Line Value: 3 lines 

1 digit 

(1 to 3) 

Repeat for other lines. 




* 

1 [ST] (Line No.1) [#] (space) 415 [#] (O) 

[X] [X] (all double) 504 [#] (P) 415 [#] (O) 

504 [#] (T) 405 [#] (E) 412 [#] (L) 

405 [#] (E) 401 [#] (A) 212 [#] (,) 

403 [#] (C) 403 [#] (C) [ST] (to complete Line 2) 

[#] (space) 408 [#] (H) 

503 [#] (S) [#] (space) (3 [ST]) (Line No.3) 

504 [#] (T) 404 [#] (D) 405 [#] (E) 

415 [#] (O) 502 [#] (R) 414 [#] (N) 

502 [#] (R) 409 [#] (I) 407 [#] (G) 

405 [#] (E) 506 [#] (V) 412 [#] (L) 

[ST] (to complete Line 1) 405 [#] (E) 401 [#] (A) 

212 [#] (,) 414 [#] (N) 

(2 [ST]) (Line No.2) [#] (space) 404 [#] (D) 

301 [#] (1) 412 [#] (L) [ST] (to complete Line 3) 

303 [#] (3) 409 [#] (I) 

304 [#] (4) 506 [#] (V) 3 (Feed Line Value) 

303 [#] (3) 405 [#] (E) [AT/TL] to complete this submode 

503 [#] (R) 

500 [#] (P) 

6-133 


(0 to 16) 


* (For sequentially programming lines, the 

Line No. specification can be skipped.) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P22 

1 


2 

1343 PEACH DRIVE, LIVERPOOL, 

3 

ENGLAND 

03 

0049 13:41TM


6.28 Key Status Programming (Submode 23) 

6-134 


This submode programs the various selective statuses of media keys and other function keys. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



23 [X] | Key Code | [ST] | Bit Nos for SET status | [#] [AT/TL] 

1 to 50 (see the table 

on the next page.) 

Repeat for other key codes. 

Example) To program the following key with the statuses listed below (refer to the Key Status Table 

on the next page). 

Key Required Status 

[CHK TEND] Key Code 3 

Bit 

1: Follow Bit 2 (RESET) 

2: TENDER only (SET) 

4: Short-tendering Allowed (RESET) 

5: Over-tendering Allowed (RESET) 

7: No-purchase Cashing Allowed (SET) 

8: Finalizing R/A Allowed (RESET) 

Key Code 4 

Bit 

2: Endorsement Compulsory (SET) 

3: Drawer Open/Not-open: not applicable because the key is set as 

TENDER key (RESET) 

5: Negative Check Free (RESET) (US model only) 


3 [ST] (Key Code 3) 

27 [#] (“SET” bit Nos) 


2 [#] (“SET” bit Nos) 

[AT/TL] to complete this submode 

* 

Combination of Bit Nos 1 to 8; enter 

0 for all bits to RESET status; see 

the table on the next page. 

* (For sequentially 

programming key code, 

the key code specification 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P23 

#03---------------------------27 

#04----------------------------2 

0050 13:43TM


US model Key Status Table (Key Code 1 to 20) 

6-135 


Bit No. Function SET RESET 

1 Total-only TOTAL-only key 

2 TENDER-only Tender-only key 

If both SET or RESET: 

TOTAL and TENDER 

3 Validation print after tendering Tendered amount Amount total 

4 SHORT TENDERING Prohibited Allowed 

5 OVER TENDERING Prohibited Allowed 

6 Gift Card Media (see NOTE 1 below) Gift Card Media key Ordinary Media key 

7 NO-PURCHASE CASHING Allowed Prohibited 

8 FINALIZING R/A ITEMS Prohibited Allowed 

1 VALIDATION Compulsory Free 

2 ENDORSEMENT Compulsory Free 

3 

DRAWER OPEN THE KEY OPERATION 

(see NOTE 2 below) 

Not Open Open 

4 -- vacant bit -- 

5 NEGATIVE CHECK Compulsory Free 

KEY NAME 

KEY 

CODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 

[AT/TL] 

1 

2 

R R R 

R R 

[CHK TEND] 

3 

4 

R S S R R R S R 

R R R R 

[Chg] 

5 

6 

S R S R R R S 

R R R R 

[MISC TEND] 

7 

8 

R S S R R R R 

R R R R 

[CREDIT 1] 

9 

10 

R R S R S R R S 

R R S R 

[CREDIT 2] 

11 

12 

R R S R S R R S 

R R S R 

[DEBIT] 

13 

14 

R R S R R R R S 

R R R R 

[EBT CASH] 

15 

16 

R R S R R R R S 

R R R R 

[EBT F/S] *1 

17 

18 

R S S R S R R S 

R R S R 

[EBT F/S] *2 

17 

18 R R 

[FSTL TEND] 

19 

20 R R 

*1: Taxable total payment type 

*2: Food stamp payment type 

NOTES: 1. SET status is effective only for the media key that has been programmed with EFT Media status (Bit 1 is SET) 

in the EFT Key Status Programming (Submode 65). 

2. Regardless of this bit status selection, the drawers opens on Over-tendering, and does not open on Shorttendering. 

Description of Symbol in above table: 

R = RESET Status 

S = SET Status 

Standard Bit status selection auto-preset after a RAM Clear. 

Those bits marked with either “R” or “S” may be SET or RESET according to your requirements. 

= Bit not applicable to the key (Those bits can be SET or RESET.)



6-136 



1 VALIDATION Compulsory Free 

2 MGR INTERVENTION (in REG mode) Compulsory Free 

3 TAX 1 STATUS (see NOTE below) Taxable Non-taxable 




7 FOOD STAMP STATUS (see NOTE below) Taxable Non-taxable 


KEY NAME 

KEY 

CODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

[DOLL DISC] 21 R R R R R R R 

[VND CPN] 22 R R R R R R R 

[STR CPN] 23 R R S S S S S 

[BTL RTN] 24 R R R R R R R 

[% I] 25 R R R R R R R 

[% II] 26 R R R R R R R 

[RTN MDSE] 27 R R 

[ITEM CORR] 28 R 

[VOID] 29 R R 

[R/A] 30 R 

[PO] 31 R R 

[NS] 32 R 

[PB-] 33 R 

[EX] 34 R 

[TRF] 35 R 

[ALL VOID] 36 R 

[RTR] 37 R 

[SI1/TL] 38 R R R R R* 

[SI2/TL] 39 R R R R R* 

[SI3/TL] 40 R R R R R 

[SI4/TL] 41 R R R R R 

[% III] 42 R R R R R R R 

[% IV] 43 R R R R R R R 

[% V] 44 R R R R R R R 

[% VI] 45 R R R R R R R 

NOTE: If RESET status is selected for the [STR CPN] key, the key will always be Non-taxable 

regardless of the Department tax status. As for the [SI1/TL] and [SI2/TL] keys, the addition or 

subtraction is performed corresponding to the special charge/special discount option for the 

respective keys. 





The status selection for [PB-] key is 

effective for [CODE OPEN] when 

the Check Track Memory option is 

selected. 

* This status selection is 

available only when the food 

stamp feature has been 

selected. 





6-137 









7 Special Rounding for Foreign Currency Applicable (1 digit) NOTE Not applicable 

8 Special Rounding for Foreign Currency Applicable (2 digits) NOTE Follow Bit 7 

KEY NAME 

KEY 

CODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

[CUR 1] 46 R R 

[CUR 2] 47 R R 

[CUR 3] 48 R R 

[CUR 4] 49 R R 

[CUR 5] 50 R R 

NOTE: To apply the 2-digit Special Rounding process for Foreign Currency, select SET status for 

both Bit 7 and Bit 8. 








KEY NAME 

[AT/TL] 

[CHK TEND] 

[CRT] 

[MISK TEND] 

[CPN] 

[CREDIT 1] 

[CREDIT 2] 

[CREDIT 3] 

[CREDIT 4] 

[CREDIT 5] 

QP model Key Status Table (Key Code 1 to 20) 

6-138 



1 Total-only TOTAL-only key 

2 TENDER-only Tender-only key 

If both SET or RESET: 

TOTAL and TENDER 


4 SHORT TENDERING Prohibited Allowed 

5 OVER TENDERING Prohibited Allowed 


7 NO-PURCHASE CASHING Allowed Prohibited 

8 FINALIZING R/A ITEMS Prohibited Allowed 


2 ENDORSEMENT Compulsory Free 

3 

DRAWER OPEN THE KEY 

OPERATION (see NOTE below) 

Not Open Open 

KEY 

CODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 

1 

2 

R R R 

3 R S R R S R 

4 R R 

5 S R R R R S 

6 R R 

7 R S R R R R 

8 R R 

9 R S R S R R 

10 R R 

11 S R R R R S 

12 R R 


14 R R 


16 R R 


18 R R 


20 R R 

NOTE: Regardless of this bit status selection, the drawers opens on Over-tendering, and does not 

open on Short-tendering. 









6-139 




2 MGR INTERVENTION (in REG mode) Compulsory Free 

3 ADD-ON TAX/VAT STATUS All Taxes Taxable Non-taxable 






KEY NAME 

KEY 

CODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

[ - ] (Disc) 21 R S 

[VND CPN] 22 R S 

[STR CPN] 23 R S 

[BTL RTN] 24 R R 

[% I] 25 R S 

[% II] 26 R S 

[RTN MDSE] 27 R 

[ITEM CORR] 28 

[VOID] 29 R 

[R/A] 30 

[PO] 31 R 

[NS] 32 R 

[PB-] 33 R 

[EX] 34 R 

[TRF] 35 

[ALL VOID] 36 R 

[RTR] 37 R 

[HAUS BON 1] 38 R 

[HAUS BON 2] 39 R 

[1st PRICE] 40 R 

[2nd PRICE] 41 R 

[3rd PRICE] 42 R 

Key Code 43 to 45 are vacant. 

NOTE: If RESET status is selected for the [STR CPN] key, the key will always be Non-taxable 

regardless of the Department tax status. 





The status selection for [PB-] key is 

effective for [CODE OPEN] when 

the Check Track Memory option is 

selected. 





6-140 









7 Special Rounding for Foreign Currency Applicable (1 digit) NOTE Not applicable 

8 Special Rounding for Foreign Currency Applicable (2 digits) NOTE Follow Bit 7 

KEY NAME 

KEY 

CODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

[CUR 1] 46 R R 

[CUR 2] 47 R R 

[CUR 3] 48 R R 

[CUR 4] 49 R R 

[CUR 5] 50 R R 

NOTE: To apply the 2-digit Special Rounding process for Foreign Currency, select SET status for 

both Bit 7 and Bit 8. 








6-141 

6.29 PLU Stock Loading or Changing (Submode 24) (QP model only) 

6.29 PLU Stock Loading or Changing (Submode 24) (QP model only) 

This submode loads or changes the stock quantities of PLUs With the Stock-process status, as part of 

stock controls. The stock of a PLU may be entered as initial loading the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING 

operation (Submode 4), and may be adjusted in this operation, from day to day, as the stock increases 

due to delivery from wholesalers, etc. or as the stock decreases due to damages or losses. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 




24 [X] | PLU Code | [PLU] | Adding Quantity | [STOCK] [AT/TL] 

* (Repeatable for the 

PLU of the next 

sequential code) 

0 to 9999,99 

[RTN MDSE] | Subtracting Quantity | 

NOTES: 1. On the “| PLU Code | [PLU]” entry, the current stock quantity is displayed. 

2. The total stock quantity of a PLU after the addition or subtraction must not exceed the 

value range from 0 through 9999,99. Otherwise, the Adding or Subtracting Quantity 

entry will result in an error. Use the [ . ] key if decimal portion is contained . 

3. The PLU Code here must exist in the PLU Table file and the PLU must be set with 

Stock-process status. (The current stock quantity may be zero or other than zero.) 

Example) To change the stock quantities of the following PLUs: 

PLU Code Stock Add/Subtract 

80502 Add 1200 

70502 Subtract 200 


80502 [PLU] (PLU Code) 

1200 [STOCK] (Adding Quantity) 


[RTN MDSE] (Subtract declaration) 

200 [STOCK] (Subtracting Quantity) 


* 

Repeat for other PLUs for stock changed. 

0 to 9999,99 

Additional Quantity 

Total stock Quantity after the addition 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

08502 

Kiwi Jam 

07502 

Soup Can 

P24 

1200 

2160 

-200 

3400 

0051 13:46TM


6.30 Link-PLU Table Programming (Submode 25) 

6-142 

6.30 Link-PLU Table Programming (Submode 25) 

This submode programs Link-PLU Tables and their respective Sub-link PLUs. When a PLU is 

programmed with a Link-PLU Table No. (Address 10 of the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation 

(Submode 4)), an entry of the PLU will automatically enter the Sub-link PLU that is programmed in the 

Link-PLU Table No. Refer to the “Link-PLU Table No.” description in the PLU TABLE 

PROGRAMMING, Submode 4, as to details of PLU-to-PLU Iinkage. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 




25 [X] | Link-PLU Table No. | [ST] | Sub-link PLU Code | [PLU] [AT/TL] 

1 to 99 

(Enter the Table No. programmed in the 

Head-link PLU item in Submode 4) 

Repeat for other tables. 

NOTES: 1. Only one Sub-link PLU can be programmed in the Link-PLU Table. 

2. The ITF, CODE128, and RSS-14 barcodes cannot be programmed in the Link-PLU Table. 

3. The linkage of the Sub-link PLU is as shown below. 

• Head-link PLU (one PLU) + Sub-link PLU (one PLU) 

… (QP model, V001.005-or-before US model) 

If the Sub-link PLU is further programmed with another Sub-link PLU (with a Link-PLU 

Table No.), the third PLU will be ignored at the item entry. 

• Head-link PLU (one PLU) + Sub-link PLU (Max. seven PLUs) 

… (V001.006-and-after US model) 

The linkage of the Sub-link PLU is effective so that up to seven Sub-link PLUs can be 

entered. If eight or more Sub-link PLUs are programmed, they will be ignored at the 

item entry. 

Example) To set the following Link-PLU Table and its Sub-link PLU: 

Link-PLU Table No. Sub-link PLU Code 

1 101301 


1 [ST] (Link-PLU Table No.) 

101301 [PLU] (Sub-link PLU Code) 


NOTE: In this example, Link-PLU Table No. has already been set in 

PLU 90601 (Drink Small-A) and PLU 90701 (Drink Small-B) 

as Head-link items in the PLU PROGRAMMING operation, 

Submode 4. The Sub-link PLU 101301 here has been 

programmed as a bottle-deposit PLU (Small-Btl Depo) in the 

same submode. 

6 or 13 digits 

(Enter the code of the PLU to be autoentered 

when the Head-link PLU is 

entered in a sale.) 

* (For sequentially programming tables, the 

Table No. specification can be skipped.) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

#01 101301 

P25 

0052 13:47TM


Deletion of Link-PLU Tables 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



6-143 

6.31 Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26) 

25 [X] [ITEM CORR] | Link-PLU Table No. | [ST] [AT/TL] 

or 1 to 99 

[VOID] 


In the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation (Submode 4), some of Scale-compulsory PLUs may be 

set with a Tare Table No. The actual tare weight is set to each Tare Table here. Also, the General Unit 

Weight is set here so that the Unit Weight may be effective to scale items entered through departments 

or PLUs without any Individual Unit Weight designation. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

• Tare Table Setting 



26 [X] | Tare Table No. | [ST] | Tare Weight | [#] [AT/TL] 

• General Unit Weight Setting 

Repeatable for other tables to be deleted. 


26 [X] | General Unit Weight Code | [AT/TL] 

• Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting 

Repeat for other tables 


tables, the Table No. 


1 to 11 (NOTE 1 below) 

0 to 999 

(Unit: 1/00 LB or gram.) 

(Example: enter 13 for 

0.13 LB or 13 grams.) 

Repeat for other tables * (For sequentially programming 

* 

tables, the Table No. 


26 [X] | Tare Table No. | [ST] | Tare Weight | [#] | General Unit Weight Code | [AT/TL] 

1 digit (1 to 9) 0 to 999 

(Unit: 1/00 LB or gram.) 

(Example: enter 13 for 

0.13 LB or 13 grams.) 

1 to 11 (NOTE 1 below)


NOTES: 1. General Unit Weight Code as follows. 

General Unit 

Weight Code 

LB Unit Kg Unit 

1 1LB 1Kg 

2 2LB 2Kg 

3 3LB 3Kg 

4 4LB 4Kg 

5 5LB 5Kg 

6 6LB 6Kg 

7 7LB 7Kg 

8 8LB 8Kg 

9 9LB 9Kg 

10 1/2LB 100g 

11 1/4LB 

6-144 


2. The initial value for the General Unit Weight is set to Code 1 (1LB or 1Kg). 

3. For QP model, when selecting the QP scale feature, the programming of tare weight is 

unavailable. 

4. Whether the ECR adopts the LB or Kg unit system is determined by a system option 

selection (Address 35, Bit No. 3). 

Example) To set the following: 

Tare Table No. 1 with Tare Weight 13 grams, 

General Weight 100 grams (Code 10). 


1 [ST] (Tare Table No.) 

13 [#] (Tare Weight) 

10 (General Weight Code) 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P26 

#1 13g 

100g 

0053 13:49TM


6.32 PLU Preset-Code Key Setting (Submode 27) 

6-145 


When there are any keys programmed as PLU Preset-code Keys (SFKC 96) on the ECR Keyboard 

(Ordinary or Flat Type), and/or when the PLU Keyboard PK-2 (hardware option) is connected to the 

ECR, a PLU code may be preset to each of those keys in this operation. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 




27 [X] | PLU Code | [KEY] [AT/TL] 

NOTES: 1. If the PLU Code entry is skipped and a [KEY] is simply depressed in the above 

sequence, the preprogrammed PLU Code of the KEY will be displayed. 

2. A non-opened PLU Code (i.e. PLU non-existent in the PLU table file) can be set on a 

KEY; however, pressing the KEY in sale entries will result in an error unless the code is 

opened in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 4. 

3. If “0” is entered as PLU Code in the above sequence, the KEY will be closed. Pressing 

the closed KEY in sale entry will cause an error. 

Example) To set following PLU Codes to KEYs (of SFKC 96) on the ECR keyboard: 

PLU Code 

Repeat for other keys. 

Enter through Numeric Keys on 

the ECR Keyboard 

(Enter 0 to close the key); 

Max. 6 or 13 digits 

Mode Lock to SET 

27 [X] 

50321 50321 [required key] 

50322 50322 [required key] 

[AT/TL] 

Location Code (left side); refer to REMARKS 1 and 2 on the next page. 

PLU code assigned to the key (right side) 

Depress the required key 

on the ECR keyboard or 

on the PK-2 keyboard. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

#073 050321 

#074 050322 

P27 

0054 13:51TM


PK-2 KEYBOARD 

6-146 


1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91 101 111 121 

2 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 92 102 112 122 

3 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 93 103 113 123 

4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 94 104 114 124 

5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 115 125 

6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 96 106 116 126 

7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 97 107 117 127 

8 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 98 108 118 128 

9 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 99 109 119 129 

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 

REMARKS: 1. The Nos 1 through 130 marked on the PK-2 Keyboard are the KEY Nos to be 

printed on the left side of the program receipt issued in the operation on the 

preceding page. If each KEY is not set with a PLU Code, the auto-preset PLU Code 

identical to the initial KEY No. in the above figure will be active as its preset PLU 

Code 

ex.) KEY No.1 ............... PLU Code 1 

KEY No.130 ........... PLU Code 130 

2. When a PLU code is assigned to a PLU Preset-code Key on the ECR Keyboard in 

the operation on the preceding page, the Hardware Key Code which indicates the 

absolute location of the key will be printed to the left of the assigned PLU Code. 

The Hardware Key Codes of the ECR keyboards of Ordinary Type and Flat Type 

are shown on the next page.


ECR Ordinary Type Keyboard 

6-147 


1 7 13 19 25 31 37 43 49 55 61 67 73 79 85 

2 8 14 20 26 32 38 44 50 56 62 68 74 80 86 

3 9 15 21 27 33 39 45 51 57 63 69 75 81 87 

4 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 52 58 64 70 76 82 88 

5 11 17 23 29 35 41 47 53 59 65 71 77 83 89 

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 

ECR Flat Type Keyboard 

1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 65 73 81 89 97 105 113 

2 10 18 26 34 42 50 58 66 74 82 90 98 106 114 

3 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 67 75 83 91 99 107 115 

4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 68 76 84 92 100 108 116 

5 13 21 29 37 45 53 61 69 77 85 93 101 109 117 

6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 70 78 86 94 102 110 118 

7 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 71 79 87 95 103 111 119 

8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120


6.33 Report Item Print/Non-Print Setting (Submode 28) 

This submode programs the items to be printed out on reports. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



6-148 


28 [X] | Item Code | [ST] | Print/Non-Print Selection | [#] [AT/TL] 


next page.) 


* (For sequentially programming items, the 

item code specification can be skipped. 

0: Print 

1: Non-print 

NOTES: 1. Print/Non-print status programmed here prevails the open/close status set in the SFKC 

programming operation. 

2. The name of each item on reports are to be programmed in FINANCIAL REPORT ITEM 

NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 9). 

3. After a RAM Clear, all items are set to print as initial setting. 

Example) To set the following item to be non-printed on reports 

(presumed that all the items have been set to print): 


Tax 3 (Item Code 10) Add-on Tax 3 (Item Code 7) 

Tax 4 (Item Code 11) Add-on Tax 4 (Item Code 8) 



10 [ST] (Item Code 10) 7 [ST] (Item Code 7) 

1 [#] (Non-print) 1 [#] (Non-print) 

11 [ST] (Item Code 11) 8 [ST] (Item Code 8) 

1 [#] (Non-print) 1 [#] (Non-print) 

[AT/TL] to complete this submode [AT/TL] to complete this submode 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P28 

#010 TAX3 1 

#011 TAX4 1 

0055 13:53TM 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P28 

#007 TAX3 1 

#008 TAX4 1 

0056 13:55TM


Report Item Name Table (US model) 

6-149 


Item 

Code 





4 %+ (% I) % + 

5 %+ (% II) % + 

6 Net Sale without Tax N S 

7 -- VACANT -- 

8 Tax 1 T A X 1 

9 Tax 2 T A X 2 

10 Tax 3 T A X 3 

11 Tax 4 T A X 4 

12 Manual Tax (Tax 5) T A X 5 




16 %- on Subtotal (% I) % - 

17 %- on Subtotal (% II) % - 


19 Discount on Subtotal D I S C 

20 Bottle Return B T R 

21 All Media Sales T O T A L 


23 Media 1 Sales (CHECK) C H E C K 

24 Media 2 Sales (Chg) C h g 




28 Media 6 Sales (Debit) D E B I T 

29 -- VACANT -- 

30 -- VACANT -- 

31 Media 9 Sales (Food Stamp) F S T L 






37 Media 1-in-drawer (CHECK) C H E C K I D 

38 Media 2-in-drawer (Chg) C h g I D 


40 Media 4-in-drawer (Credit 1) C R E D I T I D 1 

41 Media 5-in-drawer (Credit 2) C R E D I T I D 2 

42 Media 6-in-drawer (Debit) D E B I T I D 

43 -- VACANT -- 

44 -- VACANT -- 

45 Food Stamp-in-drawer F S I D 

46 Food Stamp CHANGE F S C G


Report Item Name Table (US model) (Continued) 

6-150 


Item 

Code 






51 %- on Line Items (% I) % - 

52 %- on Line Items (% II) % - 

53 Dollar Discount on Line Items D I S C 




57 Negative Tax - T A X 

58 Negative Sales Total - S A L E 










68 -- VACANT -- 







75 Tax-exempt Customer T A X E X 

76 -- VACANT -- 














90 SP. Round for Foreign Currencies C U R R N D 


92 Net Sale per Customer N S / C U S


Report Item Name Table (US model) (Continued) 

6-151 


Item 

Code 


93 No-Sale Counter N O S A L E 

94 Validation Counter V A L I C T R 

95 Hold Counter H O L D C T R 

96 -- VACANT -- 

97 Off-line Authorization O F F L I N E A U T H 

98 %- on Subtotal (% III) % - 

99 %- on Subtotal (% IV) % - 

100 %- on Subtotal (% V) % - 

101 %- on Subtotal (% VI) % - 

102 %- on Line Items (% III) % - 

103 %- on Line Items (% IV) % - 

104 %- on Line Items (% V) % - 

105 %- on Line Items (% VI) % - 



108 -- VACANT -- 

109 -- VACANT -- 

110 -- VACANT -- 

111 -- VACANT -- 

112 -- VACANT -- 

113 -- VACANT -- 

114 -- VACANT -- 

115 -- VACANT -- 

116 -- VACANT -- 

117 -- VACANT -- 

118 -- VACANT -- 

119 -- VACANT -- 

120 -- VACANT --


Report Item Name Table (QP model) 

6-152 


Item 

Code 




3 NEG GT N E G G T 










13 Tax Total T A X T L 




17 % I (usually %+) % + 

18 % II (usually %-) % - 


20 Amount Discount D I S C 

21 EAN Coupon E A N C P N 

22 Bottle Return (Inside-sale) B T R 


24 Special Round Fractions S P . R N D 

25 Net Sale (All-Media Sales) N S 


27 Media 1 Sales (CHK) C H E C K 

28 Media 2 Sales (CRT) C R T 


30 Media 4 Sales (CPN) C P N 








38 Bottle Return (Outside-sale) B T R 








46 Cash-in-drawer (Foreign Currency 5) C A S H C U R 5 I D


Report Item Name Table (QP model) (Continued) 

6-153 


Item 

Code 


47 Media 1-in-drawer (CHK) C H E C K I D 






53 Media 2-in-drawer (CRT) C R T I D 












65 Media 4-in-drawer (CPN) C P N I D 











76 Cash-in-drawer Difference C A S H D I F 

77 Media 1-in-drawer Difference C K D I F 

78 Media 2-in-drawer Difference C R T D I F 

79 Media 3-in-drawer Difference M I S C D I F 

80 Media 4-in-drawer Difference C P N D I F 












92 Negative-Balance Sales - S A L E



6-154 


Item 

Code 





96 %- on Line Items % - 

97 Amount Discount on Line Items D I S C 

























122 VAT Total V A T T L 

123 Net Sale Without Tax N . N S 



126 Tax-exempt Customer V A T E X 









135 SP. Round for Foreign Currency C U R R N D 


137 Sales Amount per Customer T L / C U S 

138 No-Sale Counter N O S A L E



6-155 

6.34 PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29) 

Item 

Code 


139 [C] key Counter C L E A R 

140 Power OFF/ON Counter P F C T R 

141 Money Declaration Counter M . C T R 

142 

143 

Commission C O M M I S S I O N 

to 

150 

-- VACANT -- 

6.34 PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29) 

This submode programs the name of each PLU Group. Which PLUs are linked to which PLU Groups 

has already been set in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 4. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for other groups (max. 99 groups) 

29 [X] |PLU Group Code|[ST] Character entry [ST] [AT/TL] 


1 to 99 


Group Codes and Names, the code 



(See NOTE) 

NOTE: A maximum of 16 regular-sized characters may be set for each PLU Group name. One 



PLU Group, an auto-preset data is assigned as the PLU Group Name (PLU GPxx; xx = 

PLU Group Code 01 to 99). 

Example) To program the following names to the respective PLU Groups: 

PLU Group 1 G R O C E R Y P L U G P 1 

PLU Group 2 G R O C E R Y P L U G P 2



1 [ST] (PLU Group Code) 407 [#] (G) 

407 [#] (G) 502 [#] (R) 

502 [#] (R) 415 [#] (O) 

415 [#] (O) 403 [#] (C) 

403 [#] (C) 405 [#] (E) 

405 [#] (E) 502 [#] (R) 

502 [#] (R) 509 [#] (Y) 

509 [#] (Y) [#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 500 [#] (P) 

500 [#] (P) 412 [#] (L) 

412 [#] (L) 505 [#] (U) 

505 [#] (U) [#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 407 [#] (G) 

407 [#] (G) 500 [#] (P) 

500 [#] (P) [#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 302 [#] (2) 

301 [#] (1) [ST] 

[ST] [AT/TL] to complete this submode 

2 [ST] (PLU Group Code) 

6-156 

6.35 Comment Message Programming (Submode 30) (US model only) 

6.35 Comment Message Programming (Submode 30) (US model only) 

This submode programs various 10 comment messages. Up to 32 characters are programmable for a 

comment message. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 


Control Lock: SET 

Repeat for another comment message (max. 10 messages) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P29 

01 GROCERY PLU GP 1 

02 GROCERY PLU GP 2 

30 [X] | Massage Code | [ST] Character Entries [AT/TL] 

(1 to 10) 


Message Code and Messages, 

the code specification can be 

skipped.) 

(Max. 32 characters for 

each message) 

0057 13:57TM 

The messages shown on the table below are initially programmed for comment messages. 

Code Initial Program Remarks 

1 

2 

X _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ NOTE 

3 A U T H O R I Z A T I O N N O . 

4 D E C L I N E D 

5 C A N C E L L E D 

6 A P P R O V E D 

7 R E F E R E N C E N O . 

8 E B T B A L A N C E 

9 I N T E R F A C E F A I L 

10 S T O R E C O P Y 

NOTES: 1. _: Character Code 155 

2. Initial Program shown above is used when EBT feature has been selected.


6.36 Display Message Programming (Submode 31) 

6-157 


The “DISPLAY MESSAGE” here means the message to be displayed in the 16-digit dot windows of the 

Operator Display panel while the Mode Lock of the terminal is in the “LOCK” position. This display 

message may be used as information, commercial message, welcoming greeting, etc. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for other lines. 

* Allowed for sequential Line No. only 

31 [X] | Message Line No. | [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL] 

(1 to 4; max. 4 lines) (Max. 16 characters per 

line. Regular-size only.) 

NOTES: 1. When the option “Store Message SCROLLING DISPLAY” is selected, four lines (Line 

Nos 1 to 4) are available. Even when the option “Store Message 16 CHARACTERS 

HELD” is selected, four lines (Line Nos. 1 to 4) are available. In this case, refer to the 

“Store Message Display” operation to display the respective message lines. 

2. When the “SCROLLING DISPLAY” option is selected, a maximum of 64 characters can 

be entered consecutively after designating Line No.1 at first and depressing [ST] for 

each line end. 

3. The character must be regular-sized only. 

4. The DISPLAY MESSAGE set here will also appear in the REG or MGR mode if so 

designated by system option. 

Example) To program the following display message under the “SCROLLING DISPLAY” option: 

T H I S C O U N T E R I S Line No. 1 

C L O S E D . P L E A S E Line No. 2 

G O T O A N O T H E R , T Line No. 3 

H A N K Y O U . . . Line No. 4



1 [ST] (Line No. 1) (3 [ST]) (Line No. 3) 

504 [#] (T) 407 [#] (G) 

408 [#] (H) 415 [#] (O) 

409 [#] (I) [#] (Space) 

503 [#] (S) 504 [#] (T) 

[#] (Space) 415 [#] (O) 

403 [#] (C) [#] (Space) 

415 [#] (O) 401 [#] (A) 

505 [#] (U) 414 [#] (N) 

414 [#] (N) 415 [#] (O) 

504 [#] (T) 504 [#] (T) 

405 [#] (E) 408 [#] (H) 

502 [#] (R) 405 [#] (E) 

[#] (Space) 502 [#] (R) 

409 [#] (I) 212 [#] (,) 

503 [#] (S) [#] (Space) 

[#] (Space) 504 [#] (T) 

[ST] (to complete Line 1) [ST] (to complete Line 3) 

(2 [ST]) (Line No. 2) (4 [ST]) (Line No. 4) 

403 [#] (C) 408 [#] (H) 

412 [#] (L) 401 [#] (A) 

415 [#] (O) 414 [#] (N) 

503 [#] (S) 411 [#] (K) 

405 [#] (E) [#] (Space) 

404 [#] (D) 509 [#] (Y) 

214 [#] (.) 415 [#] (O) 

[#] (Space) 505 [#] (U) 

[#] (Space) 214 [#] (.) 

500 [#] (P) 214 [#] (.) 

412 [#] (L) 214 [#] (.) 

405 [#] (E) [ST] (to complete Line 4) 

401 [#] (A) 

503 [#] (S) [AT/TL] to complete this submode 

405 [#] (E) 

[#] (Space) 


6-158 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P31 

1 

THIS COUNTER IS 

2 

CLOSED. PLEASE 

3 

GO TO ANOTHER, T 

4 

HANK YOU... 

0058 13:59TM


6.37 Error Message Programming (Submode 32) 

6-159 


The messages to be set programmed here will be displayed when errors occur. Each error will be 

indicated with an error tone, and the Error Message (to be set here) is displayed in maximum 16 

characters. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for another error code 

32 [X] | Error Code | [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL] 

(See the table on 

the next page.) 

NOTES: 1. A maximum of 16 characters can be programmed for each error message. Enter all the 

characters in regular size. 

2. As shown in the table on the next page, the Standard Program data are prepared (which 

is auto-set after a RAM Clear). Therefore, program only the error messages that need to 

be changed. 

Example) To change the following items: 

Error Code STANDARD DATA CHANGE 

17 MASTER IS BUSY MASTER BUSY 


17 [ST] (Error Code No.) 

413 [#] (M) 

401 [#] (A) 

503 [#] (S) 

504 [#] (T) 

405 [#] (E) 

502 [#] (R) 

[#] (Space) 

402 [#] (B) 

505 [#] (U) 

503 [#] (S) 

509 [#] (Y) 

[ST] (to complete Code 17) 



messages, the error code specification 



for each message 

Indicates the end of each error message 

(any unprogrammed parts will be filled 

with blanks). 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P32 

017 MASTER BUSY 

0059 14:01TM


ERROR CODE AND MESSAGE TABLE 

6-160 


Error 

Code 

Content or Cause of Error Standard Program Message 

1 Operation or Key Sequence error O P E R A T I O N E R R O R 

2 Manager Intervention required M A N A G E R R E Q U I R E D 

3 

Validation Compulsory error 

V A L I D A T I O N C M P 

(US model) 

4 Drawer-close Compulsory error C L O S E D R A W E R 

5 Code Entry Compulsory error C O M P U L S O R Y C O D E 

6 Sub-link Department Entry required C O M P D E P O S I T 

7 Scale Entry Compulsory error S C A L E R E Q U I R E D 

8 The Scale is malfunctioning S C A L E O U T 

9 Other miscellaneous errors M I S C E R R O R 

10 File Receive error (with PC Feature) P C C O M M E R R O R 

11 Undefined Code or Code Duplicated error C O D E E R R O R 

12 Programming error P R O G R A M E R R O R 

13 

The inquired file is in use by others 

(in M-S System) F I L E B U S Y 

14 Connection error (in M-S System) I R C C O N N E C T E R R 

15 

The card is not acceptable as result of Negative 

Card Check (US model) 

C A L L M A N A G E R 

16 Limit Over warning (in Media Pick Up) D R A W E R L I M I T 

17 Master Terminal is busy (in M-S System) M A S T E R I S B U S Y 

18 Backup error (in M/S System) P L E A S E B A C K U P 

19 

Satellite Transaction Buffer is full 

(in M-S System) 

T R A N S B U F F F U L L 

20 Link PLU programming error L I N K P L U E R R O R 

21 -- vacant -- 

22 Endorsement print compulsory error C O M P U L S O R Y S L I P 

23 Check Digit Value error C D V E R R O R 

24 

Negative check compulsory error 

(US model) 

C O M P C H E C K N O . 

25 

Data in communication buffer is consolidated 

X / Z I N P R O G R E S S 

26 

27 

28 

(US model) 

Rewriting the reset data in communication 

buffer is prohibited (US model) 

Underage person has attempted to buy 

cigarette or alcoholic beverage (US model) 

Quantity Entry compulsory error (when this 

compulsion status is programmed to a PLU 

item) (US model) 

A L R E A D Y R E S E R V E D 

U N D E R A G E 

C O M P Q U A N T I T Y 

29 MAC address error M A C A D R S E R R O R 

30 MAC address over error M A C A D R S F U L L 

31 The LAN PC Board is malfunctioning L A N B O A R D E R R O R 

32 IP address programming error T C P / I P P R G E R R 

33 Printer Paper out P A P E R E N D 

34 Printer Receipt Cutter error C U T T E R E R R O R 

35 Printer Head Open H E A D O P E N E R R O R 

36 Printer Head temperature error H E A D T E M P E R R O R 

37 Printer Head Voltage error V O L T A G E E R R O R 

38 Waiting for printer recovery W A I T P R R E C O V E R Y 

39 The Printer is malfunctioning P R I N T E R E R R O R 

40 Slip Printer is offline status S L I P O F F L I N E 

41 Slip Printer Paper out S L I P P A P E R O U T 

42 EFT Pin Pad error (US model) P I N E R R O R 

43 

Time-out condition on the EFT terminal 

N O R E S P O N S 

44 

45 

(US model) 

Entry of new sale transaction is attempted 

before issuing the store receipt (US model) 

Communication error between the ECR and the 

EFT terminal (US model) 

R E C E I P T R E Q U I R E D 

R E S P O N S N G


ERROR CODE AND MESSAGE TABLE (continued) 

6-161 


Error 

Code 

Content or Cause of Error Standard Program Message 

46 PC Data Transmission Compulsory error P C D A T A C O M P 

47 

[ST] Key Entry Compulsory error 

(QP model) 

S T C O M P 

48 

[TXBL TL] Key Entry Compulsory error 

T X B L T L C O M P 

(US model) 

49 [SI/TL] Key Entry Compulsory error S I / T L C O M P 

50 Check No. Entry Compulsory error C H E C K N O C O M P 

51 Card No. Entry Compulsory error C A R D C O M P 

52 Salesperson Entry Compulsory error S A L E S P E R S O N C O M P 

53 

Salesperson Sign-ON prohibit Error 

S A L E S - P P R O H I B I T 

during a sale 

54 Total Only error T O T A L O N L Y 

55 Tender Only error T E N D E R O N L Y 

56 Short Tendering Prohibition error S H _ T E N D P R O H I B I T 

57 Over Tendering Prohibition error O V _ T E N D P R O H I B I T 

58 No-Sale Exchange Prohibition error C A S H I N G P R O H I B I T 

59 Finalization of the R/A entry is prohibited. F I N R / A P R O H I B I T 

60 Manual Scale Entry Prohibition error M _ S C A L E E R R O R 

61 Negative Balance error N E G A T I V E N U M B E R 

62 

Date of Birth Entry Compulsory error 

(US model) 

B I R T H D A T E C O M P 

63 

Reservation Prohibition error 

(US model) 

R E S E R V E P R O H I B I T 

64 MDR Compulsory error (US model) M D R C O M P 

65 Condition error C O N D I T I O N E R R O R 

Finalization of Food Stamp is prohibited 

(US model) 

66 

F S T L P R O H I B I T 

67 Food Stamp Only error (US model) F S T L O N L Y 

68 [RTR] Key On error R T R O N E R R O R 

69 

Scale Communication error 

(QP model) 

S C A L E E R R O R 

70 

EBT Return entry is prohibited. 

(US model) 

R E T U R N P R O H I B I T 

71 

The number of item entries exceeds the upper 

limit when discount process for the dollar 

discount/%- on subtotal and SI/TL (special 

discount) operations is available. (US model) 

I T E M L I M I T O V E R


6.38 Media Pick-up Warning Setting (Submode 33) 

6-162 

6.38 Media Pick-up Warning Setting (Submode 33) 

This submode sets the limit of the amount-in-drawer of each media key. When a transaction is finalized 

and each media-in-drawer amount exceeds the limit value set here, the message “DRAWER LIMIT” 

(programmable in Submode 32) is displayed with an error tone generated (NOTE). 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for other Media Codes. 

33 [X] | Media Key Code | [ST] | Limit Amount | [#] [AT/TL] 

1 to 10 


MEDIA CODE AND KEY TABLE 

Key 

Key 

Code US model QP model 

1 [AT/TL] [AT/TL] 

2 [CHK TEND] [CHK TEND] 

3 [Chg] [CRT] 

4 [MISC] [MISC] 

5 [CREDIT 1] [CPN] 

6 [CREDIT 2] [CREDIT 1] 

7 [DEBIT] [CREDIT 2] 

8 [EBT CASH] [CREDIT 3] 

9 [EBT F/S] [CREDIT 4] 

10 [FSTL TEND] [CREDIT 5] 

NOTE: The error status can be indicated by both Error Tone and Message or by Message only, by a 

system option selection. (The Error Tone lasts for 2 seconds.) 

Example) To set the following preset amount on the keys below: 

Error Code KEY Limit Amount 

1 [AT/TL] 9,999.99 

2 [CHK TEND] 999.99 


1 [ST] (Key Code) 

999999 [#] (Limit Amount) 




* (Repeatable from here for sequentially 

programming Media Codes.) 


(1 to 99999999; result: 

0.01 to 999,999.99) 

Enter 0 to reset the limit 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P33 

CASH ID 9999.99 

CHECK ID 999.99 

0060 14:03TM


6.39 Function Key (Combination Key) Setting (Submode 34) 

6-163 

6.39 Function Key (Combination Key) Setting (Submode 34) 

This submode programs a string of keys on each FUNCTION key ([FUNCTION 1] to [FUNCTION 10]). 

Using such programmed [FUNCTION] keys, the operator can eliminate time in various routine 

operation procedures. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for other FUNCTION keys. 

34 [X] [FUNCTION] [KEY]• ••••••[KEY] [FUNCTION] [AT/TL] 

Depress one of the 

FUNCTION keys 

(FUNCTION 1 to 

FUNCTION 10) 

NOTES: 1. To delete a string of keys once set on a FUNCTION key, operate: 

34 [X] [FUNCTION] [FUNCTION] [AT/TL] 

Same key 

2. Neither [RF] nor [JF] keys can be set in a string of keys in the setting operation above. 

3. None of [FUNCTION] keys themselves can be contained in a string of keys for any 

[FUNCTION] key. 

4. No keys on the PK-2 keyboard can be contained in a key string. 

5. Up to 10 key operations can be programmed on a FUNCTION key. Entering 11 key 

operations causes an error. In this case, re-program the [FUNCTION] key. 

6. The FUNCTION key No. and key location codes are displayed during the setting, then the 

key location codes will be printed. 

Example) To set the following key operations as [FUNCTION 1]: 

Key: 100 [DEPT 1] [ST] [AT/TL] 

Depress the keys to 

contained in the key 

string. (max. 10 keys) 

Repeatable for other FUNCTION keys whose 

string of keys are to be deleted. 


[FUNCTION 1] 

[1] [0] [0] 

[DEPT 1] 

[ST] 

[AT/TL] 

[FUNCTION 1] 


Depress the same 

FUNCTION key that 

was pressed at the 

declaration. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P34 

#01 023 

024 

024 

048 

060 

0061 14:05TM 

Key Location 

Code


6-164 

6.40 Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting (Submode 35) 

6.40 Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting (Submode 35) 

This submode sets the limit amount to be entered through each of the negative-amount keys [VND 

CPN], [STR CPN], [BTL RTN], and [DOLL DISC] (US model), [ - ] (QP model). 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for other Media Codes. 

35 [X] | Key Code | [ST] | Limit Amount | [#] [AT/TL] 

1 to 4 


MEDIA CODE AND KEY TABLE 

Key 

Key 

Code US model QP model 

1 [VND CPN] [VND CPN] 

2 [STR CPN] [STR CPN] 

3 [BTL RTN] [BTL RTN] 

4 [DOLL DISC] [ - ] 

NOTES: 1. The [VND CPN] key will not be restricted by the limit amount set here but the amount up 

to 7 digits will be entered in MGR or - mode. 

2. The limit set here cannot be released by the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key in transaction 

entries. 

Example) To set the following preset amount on the keys below: 

Error Code KEY Limit Amount 

1 [VND CPN] 10.00 

2 [STR CPN] 20.00 








programming Media Codes.) 


(1 to 999999; result: 

0.01 to 9,999.99) 

Enter 0 to reset the limit 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P35 

V.CPN 10.00 

S.CPN 20.00 

0062 14:07TM


6.41 Special Rounding Process Setting, 1-digit type (Submode 36) (QP model only) 

6.41 Special Rounding Process Setting, 1-digit type (Submode 36) 


This submode is effective when the option “Special Rounding ACTIVE” and “1 digit subject to Special 

Rounding” are selected (System Option Address 33, Bit 3 SET & Bit 4 RESET). 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



36 [X] 

Maximum Value of the 

range of the digit subject | Post-rounded Value | [#] [AT/TL] 

to rounding 

2 digits; 00 to 09 

NOTES: 1. The values shown in the example below is set as the initial set values after a RAM Clear. 

2. When the “Post-rounded Value” is to be 10 (i.e. the final break point) the break entry is 

automatically set (refer to the example below); therefore, it does not need to be entered. 

Entering a value larger 9 for the Post-rounded Value will not cause an error. However, 

the rounding process will occur only on the least effective digit in sales entries. 

3. A maximum of 10 breaks can be programmed. 

Example) To set the following rounding table: 

Pre-rounded 

value of the least 

effective digit 

Repeat for the next break entries (max. 10 breaks). 

1 digit; 0 to 9 

Post-rounded 

value 

0 to 2 0 (=00) 

3 to 7 5 (=05) 

8 to 9 10 


200 [#] 

705 [#] 


6-165 

Ignore in setting 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P36 

200 

705 

0063 14:08TM


6.42 Special Rounding Process Setting, 2-digit type (Submode 37) (QP model only) 

6.42 Special Rounding Process Setting, 2-digit type (Submode 37) 


This submode is effective when the option “Special Rounding ACTIVE” and “2 digits subject to Special 

Rounding” are selected (System Option Address 33, Bit 3 SET & Bit 4 SET). 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



37 [X] 


range of the digit subject | Post-rounded Value | [#] [AT/TL] 

to rounding 


NOTES: 1. The values shown in the example below is set as the initial set values after a RAM Clear. 

2. When the “Post-rounded Value” is to be 100 (i.e. the final break point) the break entry is 



the rounding process will occur only on the two least effective digits in sales entries. 


Example) To set the following rounding table: 

Pre-rounded 



Repeat for the next break entries (max. 10 breaks). 


Post-rounded 

value 

00 to 24 00 

25 to 74 50 

75 to 99 100 


2400 [#] 

7450 [#] 


6-166 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P37 

2200 

7450 

0064 14:10TM


6.43 Drawer Warning Time Setting (Submode 38) 

6-167 

6.43 Drawer Warning Time Setting (Submode 38) 

This submode sets the number of seconds as the period of time for the cash drawer remaining open 

until the alarm buzzer is generated to warn operator to close the drawer. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



38 [X] | Time to Drawer Warning Buzzer Start | [AT/TL] 

Max. 2 digits; 1 to 99 (seconds) 

NOTES: 1. The value of 0 second cannot be set. (To cancel the drawer warning function, reset the 

Warning option itself.) 

2. After a RAM Clear, the value of 15 seconds is set as the initial setting. 

3. The setting here is effective only when the following are both selected in System Option 

Programming: 

Address 27 - Bit 1 SET: Drawer-close Compulsory 

Address 27 - Bit 2 SET: Drawer Warning Alarm ACTIVE 

4. The drawer warning error is cleared only by closing the drawer. This error cannot be 

cleared by turning the Mode Lock to any position. 

Example) To set 20 seconds for the Drawer Warning time: 


20 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P38 

20 

0065 14:13TM


6.44 Read/Reset Report Name Programming (Submode 39) 

6-168 


This submode programs the report names to be printed at the top of each READ/RESET reports. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for other Report No. 

39 [X] | Report No.| [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL] 

NOTES: 1. Enter all characters in regular size. In actually printing on reports, they will be printed in 

all double-sized characters. 

2. As shown in the table on the next pages, the Standard Program data is prepared (which 

is auto-set after a RAM Clear). Therefore, program only the report names that need to 

be changed. 

3. The data of Report No. 65 and thereafter in the table on the next pages are applicable 

only when the Master-Satellite System is adopted. 

Example) To change the names of the following reports: 

Report No. Type Standard Program New Name 

23 X X_GROUP X DP GROUP 

24 GTX GTX_Group GTX DP GROUP 


23 [ST] (Report No.) [#] (Space) 

508 [#] (X) 407 [#] (G) 

[#] (Space) 502 [#] (R) 

404 [#] (D) 415 [#] (O) 

500 [#] (P) 505 [#] (U) 

[#] (Space) 500 [#] (P) 

407 [#] (G) [ST] (to complete Code 24) 

502 [#] (R) 

415 [#] (O) [AT/TL] to complete this submode 

505 [#] (U) 

500 [#] (P) 

[ST] (to complete Code 23) 

24 [ST] (Report No.) 

407 [#] (G) 

504 [#] (T) 

508 [#] (X) 

[#] (Space) 

404 [#] (D) 

500 [#] (P) 

1 to 99 

(see the table on the 


* (For sequentially programming the Report No., 

the Report No. specification can be skipped. 

Max.12 characters 

(see NOTE 1) 


each item name (the 

unprogrammed part 

thereafter will be filled 

with blanks.) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P39 

#23 

X DP GROUP 

#24 

GTX DP GROUP 

0066 14:15TM


Report 

No. 

1 

2 

Financial 

3 

4 

5 

6 

All Cashier 

7 

8 

9 

10 

Individual Cashier 

11 

12 

13 

All Salesperson 

14 

15, 16 -- vacant -- 

17 

18 

Credit Card Company Sales 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

Department Group 

24 

READ/RESET REPORT NAME TABLE 

6-169 


X: Daily Read 

Z: Daily Reset 

GTX: GT Read 

GTZ: GT Reset 

Report Type Standard Program 

X X _ F I N A N C I A L 

Z Z _ F I N A N C I A L 

GTX G T X F I N A N C I A L 

GTZ G T Z F I N A N C I A L 

X X _ C L E R K 

Z Z _ C L E R K 

GTX G T X _ C L E R K 

GTZ G T Z _ C L E R K 

X X _ C L E R K 

Z Z _ C L E R K 

GTX G T X _ C L E R K 

GTZ G T Z _ C L E R K 

X X _ S L S P E R S O N 

Z Z _ S L S P E R S O N 

X X _ C R E D I T 

Z Z _ C R E D I T 

GTX G T X _ C R E D I T 

GTZ G T Z _ C R E D I T 

X X _ P R O F I T 

Department Gross Profit (QP model) 

GTX G T X _ P R O F I T 

X X _ G R O U P 

GTX G T X _ G R O U P 

25 Media Sales and In-drawer Total X X _ M E D I A A L L 

26 

27 

Hourly Range 

X 

Z 

X 

Z 

_ 

_ 

H 

H 

O 

O 

U 

U 

R 

R 

L 

L 

Y 

Y 

28 

X X _ D P _ A L L 

29 

30 

All Department 

Z 

GTX 

Z 

G 

_ 

T 

D 

X 

P 

_ 

_ 

D 

A 

P 

L 

_ 

L 

A L L 

31 

GTZ G T Z _ D P _ A L L 

32 

33 

Individual Department 

X 

GTX 

X 

G 

_ 

T 

D 

X 

P 

_ 

_ 

D 

I 

P 

N 

_ 

D 

I 

I 

N 

V 

D I V 

34 All Media Sales and Cash-in-drawer X X _ M E D I A 

35 

X X _ P L U _ A L L 

36 

37 

ALL PLU 

Z 

GTX 

Z 

G 

_ 

T 

P 

X 

L 

_ 

U 

P 

_ 

L 

A 

U 

L L 

A L L 

38 

GTZ G T Z _ P L U A L L 

39 

X X _ P L U _ Z O N E 

40 

41 

Zone PLU 

Z 

GTX 

Z 

G 

_ 

T 

P 

X 

L 

_ 

U 

P 

_ 

L 

Z 

U 

O 

_ 

N 

Z 

E 

O N E 

42 

GTZ G T Z _ P L U _ Z O N E 

43 

44 

Individual PLU 

X 

GTX 

X 

G 

_ 

T 

P 

X 

L 

_ 

U 

P 

_ 

L 

I 

U 

N 

_ 

D 

I 

I 

N 

V 

D I 

45 

46 

Inactive PLU 

X 

GTX 

X 

G 

_ 

T 

P 

X 

L 

_ 

U 

P 

_ 

L 

Z 

U 

E 

_ 

R 

Z 

O 

E R O 

47 All PLU Stock (QP model) X X _ S T O C K _ A L L 

48 Zone PLU Stock (QP model) X X _ S T O C K _ Z O N E 

49 Individual PLU Stock (QP model) X X _ S T O C K _ I N D I 

50 ALL Customer Files X X _ C U S T _ A L L


Report 

No. 

READ/RESET REPORT NAME TABLE 

6-170 


X: Daily Read 

Z: Daily Reset 

GTX: GT Read 

GTZ: GT Reset 

Report Type Standard Program 

51 Individual Customer Files X X _ C U S T _ I N D I V 

52 Zero-balance Customer Files X X _ C U S T _ Z E R O 

53 Credit-balance Customer Files X X _ C U S T _ C R E D 

54 Debit-balance Customer Files X X _ C U S T _ D E B I T 

55 Zone Customer Files X X _ C U S T _ Z O N E 

56 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

PLU Group Sales 

Money Declaration (QP model) 

X X _ P L U _ G R O U P 

Z Z _ P L U _ G R O U P 

GTX G T X _ P L U G R O U P 

GTZ G T Z _ P L U G R O U P 

X X _ M D R 

Z Z _ M D R 

62 PLU Merge X or Z P L U _ M E R G E 

63 

64 

EFT Media LOG (US model) 

X 

Z 

X 

Z 

_ 

_ 

M 

M 

E 

E 

D 

D 

I 

I 

A 

A 

_ 

_ 

L 

L 

O 

O 

G 

G 

65 Terminal Open Check X N O T _ C O N N E C T 

66 Terminal Condition Check X T / M _ C H E C K 

67 Enforced Clear of Hold Condition Z H O L D _ C A N C E L 

68 Manual Copy of Backup Data Z B A C K _ U P _ C O P Y 

69 

Read of Information copied in communication 

Buffer (US model) X R E S E R V E _ B U F F 

70 

Forcible Reset of Data in Communication Buffer 

(US model) Z R E S E R V E _ C L R 

71 ALL Customer Files Z Z _ C U S T _ A L L 

72 Zone Customer Files Z Z _ C U S T _ Z O N E 

73 Open Batch (EFT) (US model) X O P E N B A T C H 

74 Close Batch (EFT) (US model) X C L O S E B A T C H 

75 Close Batch (with Debit) (EFT) (US model) X C L O S E B A C H D 

76 Change Batch Number (EFT) (US model) X C H A N G E B A T C H 

77 Local Batch Status Report (EFT) (US model) X B A T C H S T A T U S 

78 Local Transaction Inquiry (EFT) (US model) X L T R A N I N Q . 

79 

80 

Local Transaction Report (EFT) (US model) X L T R A N A L L 

to 

99 

-- vacant --


6.45 PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting (Submode 40) (US model only) 

6.45 PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting (Submode 40) 


This submode sets the dollar discount amount or the extra charge amount for PLU price. The data 

programmed here will be used for the PLU Table Programming (Submode 4), Address 15. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for another code. 

40 [X] 

Dollar Discount/ 

Extra Charge 

Code 

[ST] ([RTN MDSE]) | Amount | [#] [AT/TL] 

Max. 2 digits (1 to 99) 

Example) To set as follows: 

• Code 2 for Dollar Discount $1.50 

• Code 10 for Extra Charge $2.00 


2 [ST] (Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code) 

[RTN MDSE] (Dollar Discount declaration) 

150 [#] (Dollar Discount Amount) 

10 [ST] (Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code) 

200 [#] (Extra Charge Amount) 



programming Dollar Discount/Extra 

Charge Codes.) 

Depress the [RTN MDSE] key to 

set the Dollar Discount amount. 

This key is not required for the 

Extra Charge Amount Setting. 

6-171 


(1 to 999999; result: 

$0.01 to $9999.99) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P40 

#02 -1.50 

#10 $2.00 

0067 14:17TM


6.46 Age Limit Setting (Submode 41) (US model only) 

6-172 

6.46 Age Limit Setting (Submode 41) (US model only) 

This submode sets an age limit to purchase a sales item (cigarette or alcoholic beverage) restricted by 

the programmed age limit. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



Repeat for another code. 

41 [X] | Age Limit Code | [ST] | Age | [#] [AT/TL] 

1 digit (1 or 2) 

1: Cigarette 

(Applicable to sales item 

restricted by age limit 

younger than that of Code 2.) 

2: Alcoholic beverage 

(Applicable to sales item 

restricted by age limit older 

than that of Code 1.) 

NOTE: Initial setting (after a RAM Clear) is as follows. 

• Age of 18 is programmed for the Age Limit Code 1. 

• Age of 21 is programmed for the Age Limit Code 2. 

Example) To set date “August 25 (MON), 2003”. 

• Age of 20 for the Age Limit Code 1. 

• Age of 23 for the Age Limit Code 2. 


1 [ST] (Age Limit Code 1) 

20 [#] (Limit Age for Code 1) 

(2 [ST]) (Age Limit Code 2) 

23 [#] (Limit Age for Code 2) 


* (Repeatable from here for 

sequentially the code. 

Max. 2 digits; 

0 to 99 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P41 

#1 20 

#2 23 

0068 14:19TM


6.47 Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting, 1-digit type (Submode 48) 

6.47 Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting, 1-digit type 

(Submode 48) 

This submode programs the rounding process of the sale paid in foreign currencies (tendered in 

foreign currencies) and of the entries of No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign 

Currency. This submode is applicable to the Foreign Currencies whose option “Special Rounding for 

Foreign Currency APPLIED 1 digit” is selected in KEY STATUS PROGRAMMING (Submode 23) at 

Key Codes 46 to 50 (Bit 7 SET & Bit 8 RESET). 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 




48 [X] Foreign Currency [ST] range of the digit subject Post-rounded [#] [AT/TL] 

Key No. to rounding Value 

1 to 5; 

1 = [CUR 1]…..5 = [CUR 5] 

Repeat for other keys 

NOTES: 1 When the “Post-rounded Value” is to be 10 (i.e., the final break point), the break entry is 



the rounding process will occur only on the least effective digit in sales entries. 


Example) To set the following rounding table for the [CUR 2] key: 

Pre-rounded 



Post-rounded 

value 

0 to 2 0 (=00) 

3 to 7 5 (=05) 

8 to 9 10 


2 [ST] (Key No. for [CUR 2]) 

200 [#] 

705 [#] 


Repeat for the next break entries (max. 10 breaks) 


6-173 





PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P48 

#2 200 

705 

0069 14:21TM


6.48 Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting, 2-digit type (Submode 49) 

6.48 Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting, 2-digit type 

(Submode 49) 

This submode programs the rounding process of the sale paid in foreign currencies (tendered in 

foreign currencies) and of the entries of No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign 

Currency. This submode is applicable to the Foreign Currencies whose option “Special Rounding for 

Foreign Currency APPLIED 2 digits” is selected in KEY STATUS PROGRAMMING (Submode 23) at 

Key Codes 46 to 50 (Bit 7 SET & Bit 8 SET). 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 




49 [X] Foreign Currency [ST] range of the digit subject Post-rounded [#] [AT/TL] 

Key No. to rounding Value 

1 to 5; 

1 = [CUR 1]…..5 = [CUR 5] 

Repeat for other keys 

NOTES: 1 When the “Post-rounded Value” is to be 100 (i.e., the final break point), the break entry 

is automatically set (refer to the example below); therefore, it does not need to be 

entered. Entering a value larger 99 for the Post-rounded Value will not cause an error. 

However, the rounding process will occur only on the least effective digit in sales entries. 


Example) To set the following rounding table for the [CUR 1] key: 

Pre-rounded 



Post-rounded 

value 

00 to 24 00 

25 to 74 50 

75 to 99 100 


1 [ST] (Key No. for [CUR 1]) 

2400 [#] 

7450 [#] 


Repeat for the next break entries (max. 10 breaks) 

2 digits; 00 to 99 2 digits; 00 to 09 

6-174 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P49 

#1 2400 

7450 

0070 14:23TM


6.49 Credit Card No. Negative Check File Programming (Submode 54) (US model only) 

6.49 Credit Card No. Negative Check File Programming (Submode 54) 


In this submode, the list of Credit Card Nos to be rejected in the REG mode is programmed. 

Prior to performing this programming, be sure to install the Expansion Memory Board into the ECR. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



54 [X] | Card No. |[ST] | Error Status Code | [#] [AT/TL] 


Repeat for other Card Nos. 

NOTES: 1. A maximum of 3,000 Card Nos can be programmed in the file (the maximum capacity 

varies depending on the RAM allocation). 

2. Each of Error Status Codes 1 to 9 should be assigned to the reason why the Card 

cannot be accepted by each store. (For example, Code 1 indicates that the valid date of 

the card has expired, Code 2 for too much balance remaining, etc.). 

3. When a Card No. contained in the Negative Check file is entered through the [CARD 

CHK] key in the REG mode, an message programmed (Standard Program is “CALL 

MANAGER”) and the Status Code (1 to 9 programmed for the Card No. in this 

submode) are displayed. 

Deletion of Card Nos from the Negative Check File 

Repeat for other card Nos to be deleted. 

[ITEM CORR] 

54 [X] or | Card No. |[ST] [AT/TL] 

[VOID] Max. 19 digits 

Example) To program the following Card Nos in the Negative Check File. 

Card No. Status Code 

1234567890123456 1 

9999999999999999 2 


1234567890123456 [ST] (Card No.) 

1 [#] (Status Code) 

9999999999999999 [ST] (Card No.) 

2 [#] (Status Code) 


1 to 9 

(Each code and its status content 

is determined by each store) 

6-175 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P54 

#1234567890123456 1 

#9999999999999999 2 

0071 14:25TM


6.50 Barcode Individual Flag Type Designation (Submode 55) (US model only) 

6.50 Barcode Individual Flag Type Designation (Submode 55) 


This submode is available for the Scanning System type. The processes of individual flags for the 

UPC In-store Marking Codes are designated here. As for detailed instructions of the UPC Barcode 

System, refer to the Scanning Specifications in the document of System Explanation separately issued. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



55 [X] | Flag Value |[ST] | Process Type Code | [#] [AT/TL] 

NOTE: The “Flag Value” here means the actual numeric value Assigned to the top two digits of the 

13-digit barcode of the UPC In-store Marking Code. These two digits are usually indicated as 

“F 1 F 2 ”, as shown in the PROCESS TYPE TABLE below. 

Process 

Type Code 

02, 04, 11 to 29 

(See the FLAG 

TABLE Below) 

FLAG TABLE 

Flag Value Process Type Code Available 

02 1, 2, 3 

04, 11 to 29 1, 2, 3, 5 

PROCESS TYPE TABLE 

Name Contents of the Code 

6-176 

Code Pattern 

(F = Flag; X = Item; P = Price) 

1 Scale Non-PLU 

Item Code (5 dig.) + Price C/D (1 

dig.) + Price (4 dig.) 

2 Scale Non-PLU Item Code (5 dig.) + Price (5 dig.) F1F2X1X2X3X4X5P1P2P3P4P5C/D 

3 Scale Non-PLU Item Code (6 dig.) + Price (4 dig.) F1F2X1X2X3X4X5X6P1P2P3P4C/D 

5 PLU PLU Code (10 dig.) F1F2X1X2X3X4X5X6X7X8X9X10C/D 

Example) To set the Flag of 02 to the Process Type Code 1: 


02 [ST] (Flag Value) 

1 [#] (Process Type Code) 


Repeat for other Flag Values. 

1, 2, 3, or 5 (See the PROCESS 

TYPE TABLE below. Also see the 

FLAG TABLE.) 

F1F2X1X2X3X4X5PC/DP1P2P3P4C/D 

(C/D = Check Digit) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P55 

02---------------------------- 1 

0072 14:27TM


6.51 Store ID Setting (Submode 56) (QP model only) 

6-177 

6.51 Store ID Setting (Submode 56) (QP model only) 

This submode is available for the Scanning System type. The store need to be identified in Bottle 

Return entries so that the tickets issued by the Bottle Return Machine on entering Bottle Returns may 

not be cashed by other stores. For that reason, the Store ID is to be set and the store will be identified 

in the barcode form. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



56 [X] | Store ID | [AT/TL] 

Example) To set the Store ID 54972: 


54972 [AT/TL] 

6.52 PLU Price Setting or Changing (Submode 60) (QP model only) 

The preset price of each PLU may be set in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 4) already 

described. However, in setting or changing the price only but not other programmed data, the following 

operation will be more convenient. Any price levels (1st, 2nd and 3rd prices) can be set or changed in 

this submode. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 


(0 to 99999; for 0 not to identify 

the store by barcode. 



Repeat for other PLUs 

* Repeatable from here 

if the PLU Code is 

sequential. 

Barcode Scanning [OPEN] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P56 

#54972 

0073 14:29TM 

60 [X] |PLU Code| [PLU] |Price Level| [ST] |New Preset Price| [#] [AT/TL] 

1 digit 

(1 to 3) 

for open price setting 

Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999 

(result: €0.00 to €9999.99) 

NOTES: 1. When the value zero is entered for the New Preset Price, the PLU is set with a zero price. 

2. When the [OPEN] key instead of the New Preset Price entry then the [#] key are 

depressed, it will be an open-price PLU. 

3. Prior to this setting, PLU Codes should be programmed. 

4. The preset price of open PLU can be changed.


Example) To change the 2nd preset price as follows: 

PLU90601 (Drink Small-A) €0,40 

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 60 [X] 

90601 [PLU] 2 [ST] 40 [#] [AT/TL] 

6-178 

6.53 PLU Addition to PLU Additional Table File (Submode 64) 

6.53 PLU Addition to PLU Additional Table File (Submode 64) 

This submode is used to add PLUs in the PLU Additional Table File. Prior to this setting, the PLU 

inquiry option should be selected in the RAM Allocation Setting. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



64 [X] Follow the operation of Submode 4 (after “4 [X]”) in this chapter. 

NOTE: A maximum 200 PLUs can be programmed in the Additional PLU Table File. 

PLU Merge 

This operation is used merge all the PLUs in the Additional Table File into the PLU Table File 

(Main PLU Table File). This is usually operated at the end of the day. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

40 [AT/TL] 

Any time outside a sale (Basically at the end of the day) 

Mode Lock: X or Z 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P60 

090691 Drink Small-A 

#2 0.40@ 

NOTES: 1. This operation is accepted only when there is a vacant area in the Main PLU Table File 

enough to accept the number of PLUs programmed in the Additional PLU Table File. 

2. This operation deletes PLUs which have the deletion “ON” status from the Main PLU 

Table File. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

PLU_MERGE 

0074 14:31TM 

0075 14:33TM


6-179 

6.54 EFT Key Status Programming (Submode 65) (US model only) 

6.54 EFT Key Status Programming (Submode 65) (US model only) 

This submode programs the various selective statuses of the EFT media keys. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



65 [X] | Key Code | [ST] | Bit Nos for SET status | [#] [AT/TL] 


1 Media Type EFT Media Ordinary Media 

2 Manual Card No. Entry Allowed Prohibited 

3 Off-line Authorization Allowed Prohibited 

4 Issuance of Store Receipt (NOTE below) Issue Non-issue 

5 Print of Payment Agreement Print Non-print 

6 EBT Food Stamp Food Stamp Payment Taxable Total Payment 

7 MGR intervention for Off-line Authorization Required Not required 

8 Off-line Authorization Code Entry Required Not required 

KEY NAME 

KEY 

CODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

[CHK TEND] 1 

2 

3 

R R R R R 

[CREDIT 1] 4 R R R S S R R 

[CREDIT 2] 5 R R R S S R R 

[DEBIT] 6 R R S R R R 

[EBT CASH] 7 R R R S R R 

[EBT F/S] 8 R R R S S R R 

[POST AUTH] 9 R S S 

[VOUCHER AUTH] 10 R 

NOTE: A customer receipt 2 is issued after finalizing a sale by a Gift Card. 




1 to 9 

(see the table below) 


= Bit not applicable to the key (Those bits can be SET or RESET.) 

Example) To set the [CREDIT 2] (Key Code 5), the following Bit Nos 

are SET status: 

Bit No. 1, 3, 4, 5 

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 65 and depress the [X] 


1345 [#] (“SET” bit Nos) 


* 

Combination of Bit Nos 1 to 8; 

Enter 0 for all bits to RESET status; 

See the table below.) 

Repeat for other key codes. * (For sequentially programming Key 

Codes, the key code specification can 

be skipped.) 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P65 

#05-------------------------1345 

0076 14:35TM


6-180 

6.55 EFT Information Setting 1 (Submode 66) (US model only) 


This submode programs various parameters regarding the EFT process. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



66 [X] 1 [ST] Character entry for Payment Agreement (1st Line) [ST] 

2 [ST] Character entry for Payment Agreement (2nd Line) [ST] 

3 [ST] Character entry for Payment Agreement (3rd Line) [ST] 

4 [ST] Character entry for Payment Agreement (4th Line) [ST] 

5 [ST] | MSR Waiting Timer | [#] 

6 [ST] | Authorization Response Waiting Timer | [#] 

7 [ST] | Pin Pad Response Waiting Timer | [#] 

8 [ST] | Debit Sales Authorization Response Waiting Timer | [#] 

9 [ST] | Type of Pin Pad | [#] 

10 [ST] | Telephone Number | [ST] 

11 [ST] | Host ID Number | [#] 

12 [ST] | Dialling System Code | [#] 

13 [ST] Character Entry for Store Receipt Title [ST] 

` 14 [ST] | Close Batch Timer | [#] 

[AT/TL] 

Max. 2 digits; 5 to 60 (sec.) 

(Standard: 30 sec.) 





Max. 3 digits; 1 to 255 (sec.) (Standard: 90 sec.) 



1 digit; (0, 3 or 4) 

0: Not used, 3: DUKPT Debit, 4: NOVA Debit (Standard) (See NOTE 2) 

Max. 25 characters (See NOTE 3) 

(Standard: 121599739763) 


(Standard: 0) 

1 digit; 0 or 1 

0: Pulse dialling 

1: Tone dialling (Standard) 

Max. 32 characters (See NOTE 4) 

Max. 2 digits; 0 to 25 (minute) 

(Standard: 10 minutes)


NOTES: 1. Initial setting for Payment Agreement is as follows. 

6-181 


30 25 20 15 10 5 1 

X _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 

I A G R E E T O P A Y A B O V E 

T O T A L A M O U N T A C C O R D I N G 

T O I S S U E R ‘ S A G R E E M E N T 

2. Type of PIN pad selected in the 9 [ST] operation will be activated by performing an 

EFT initialization. 

3. Numerals 0 to 9, W, and comma (,) can be used here. Use of any other characters 

causes an error. 

4. Initial setting for Store Receipt Title is “MERCHANT COPY”. 

Example) To set parameters regarding the EFT process as follows: 

MSR Waiting Timer: 20 sec. 

Authorization Response Waiting Timer: 60 sec. 

Telephone Number: 1234321 

Host ID Number: 15 


5 [ST] (MSR Waiting Timer) 

20 [#] (20 seconds) 

6 [ST] (Authorization Response Waiting Timer) 

60 [#] (60 seconds) 

10 [ST] (Telephone Number) 

301 [#] (1) 

302 [#] (2) 

303 [#] (3) 

304 [#] (4) 

303 [#] (3) 

302 [#] (2) 

301 [#] [ST] (1) 

11 [ST] (Host ID Number) 

15 [#] (15) 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P66 

#05 20 

#06 60 

#10 1234321 

#11 15 

0077 14:37TM


6-182 



Before performing this submode, you should make sure that the EFT terminal is connected and the 

EFT setting (EFT Information Setting 1 (Submode 66) and COM Port and R/J Printer Setting 

(Submode 71)) had been done. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



67 [@/FOR] | Command Code | [AT/TL] 


1: Dial In Load Command Sending 

2: Dial Out Load Command Sending 

3: Network List Output 

4: EFT Initialization 

5: Clear Current Batch 

(1) Dial In Load Command Sending 

This command allows the EFT terminal to communicate over telephone lines. 

(2) Dial Out Load Command Sending 

By this operation, the Telephone Number, Host ID Number and Dialling System programmed will 

be sent to the EFT terminal. 

(3) Network List Output 

By this operation, list of network information stored in the EFT terminal (Data Tran) will be printed 

out from the printer provided for the ECR. In this list, functions programmed in the EFT terminal, 

allowance for the functions (ON/OFF status), and EFT terminal version will be printed. 

The network list is also outputted at the dial in load command sending/dial out load command 

sending. 

(4) EFT Initialization 

By this operation, the EFT terminal and the PIN pad will be initialized. 

(5) Clear Current Batch 

By this operation, reported information for EFT will be cleared. 

6.57 PC Transmission Information Setting (Submode 68) 

This submode is effective for a system with a PC connection, and setting the IP Address of the PC. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



68 [X] 1 [ST] | IP Address of PC | [#] [AT/TL] 

12 digits (000.. 000 to 255.. 255) 

NOTE: IP Address: 12 digits (000.. 000 to 255.. 255) 

ex) To set the IP Address 192.168.0.252……….Enter 192168000252 

The Default value of IP Address (auto-set by RAM Clear) is “192.168.0.100”. 

Example) To set the IP Address as follows: 192.168.0.15 


1 [ST] 

192168000015 [#] (IP Address) 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P68 

#1 192.168. 0. 15 

0078 14:39TM


6.58 COM Port and R/J Printer Setting (Submode 71) 

6-183 


Detailed setting of 3 COM ports of the ECR can be programmed. Also Number of Receipt print buffer 

line and Print Density of R/J printer can be programmed in this submode. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



COM Port 1 (Scanner) setting 

71 [X] 1 [NS] | Connection Code | [ST] (| Baud Rate Code |[#]) 

COM Port 2 setting 

2 [NS] | Connection Code | [ST] (| Baud Rate Code |[#]) 

COM Port 3 setting 

3 [NS] | Connection Code | [ST] (| Baud Rate Code |[#]) 

4 [NS] | Number of Receipt print buffer line | [#] 

5 [NS] | Print Density Code | [#] 

[AT/TL] 

1 digit; (0 or 2) 

(See Connection Table below.) 

1 digit 


1 digit 



(Default: 100) 

1 digit; (0 to 7) 

(See Print Density Table on the next page.) 

Connection Table 

Code Connection 

0 Not Connected 

1 Slip Printer (TM-U295) 

2 Scanner (PSC-QS6000/2500) 

3 Scale (SL-47) 

4 EFT Terminal (Data Tran-LT/SL) (US model only) 

5 Scale (SL-4700) 

US model * QP model 

Scanner Scale Slip Printer EFT Scanner Scale Slip Printer 

Port 1 O X X X O X X 

Port 2 X O O O X O X 

Port 3 X O O O X X O 

* Do not set the same device both to Port 2 and to Port 3. Doing 

so will activate the latter port setting and will delete the former. 

(i.e. The connection code 0 will be set to the former.) 


1 digit; (0 to 5) 

(See Baud Rate Table on the next page.) 

1 digit; (0 to 5) 


1 digit; (0 to 5) 


O: Connectable 

X: Not connectable


6-184 


Baud Rate Table 

Code 

Baud Rate 

(bps) 

Slip Printer Scanner Scale 

EFT 


0 1200 O O O O 

1 2400 O O � � 

2 4800 O O O X 

3 9600 � � O X 

4 19200 X O X X 

5 38400 X O X X 

O: Baud Rate can be set 

�: Standard Baud Rate 

X: Baud Rate cannot be set 

Print Density Table 

Code Print Density 

0 60% 

1 70% 

2 80% 

3 90% 

4 100% 

5 110% 

6 120% 

7 130% 

NOTES: 

1. As the table below shows, each COM port is set as standard after the RAM Clear. 

Port Connection Baud Rate 

01 Not connected 9600 bps 



2. When using the scanner PSC-QS2500, set “Code ID Transmission” to “Enable” status in the scanner 

itself. 

3. Applicable barcode system 

Barcode 

Scanner 

Default 

ITF *1 CODE128 RSS-14 

O: Available 

X: Not available 

PSC-QS6000 O O X 

PSC-QS2500 

*1: ITF: Interleaved 2 of 5 

O O O 

When scanning the barcodes below with the PSC-QS2500, perform proper setting for the scanner itself. 

(This setting is not required for the PSC-QS6000.) 

Barcode Item Status Remarks 

ITF Checksum Transmission Enable 

RSS-14 Read Enable 

UCC/EAN 128 Emulation Enable 

UPC-E Checksum Transmission Enable *2 Default setting 

*2: When this item is set to “Disable” status, the system option “Correspondence with C/D from a 

scanner” should be set. (Address 24, bit 2) 

4. Only the Data Tran-SL type EFT terminal is available. (Program version V001.007)


Example) To set the COM port 1 and 3 as follows: 

Port Connection Baud Rate 

1 Scanner 9600 bps 

3 Slip Printer 9600 bps 


1 [NS] (COM port No.) 

2 [ST] (Scanner) 

(3 [#]) (Baud Rate) 

3 [NS] (COM port No.) 

1 [ST] (Slip Printer) 

(3 [#]) (Baud Rate) 


6.59 PLU File Sequential Sort Check (Submode 93) 

6-185 

6.59 PLU File Sequential Sort Check (Submode 93) 

This operation sequentially executes the checks of code BCD and same code presence for the PLU file. 

This operation is available when the PLU inquiry option has been selected in the RAM Allocation 

Setting. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

93 [X] [AT/TL] 



Status Symbol 

OK: File is normal 

NG: An error is found in the file 

6.60 PLU File Sequential Delete (Submode 94) 

If the same code presence is found by a “PLU FILE SEQUENTIAL SORT CHECK” operation, this 

operation prints that PLU code. This operation is available when the PLU inquiry option has been 

selected in the RAM Allocation Setting. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

94 [X] [AT/TL] 



NOTES: 1. If there is more than one same code, all the codes are 

deleted by this delete operation. 

2. After this operation, the sequential sort is executed 

again, and it is confirmed that the file has no problem. 

PLU code that appears 

more than once in the file. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P71 

1 SCANNER 

#1 2 

#2 3 

3 SLIP PRINTER 

#1 1 

#2 3 



PHONE: 87-6437 

0079 14:41TM 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P93 

OK 



PHONE: 87-6437 

0080 14:43TM 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P94 

0000000000001 

0081 14:45TM


6.61 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing 

6-186 

6.61 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing 

The preset price of each department may be set in the DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING 

(Submode 3) already described. However, in setting or changing the price only but not other 

programmed data, the following operation will be more convenient. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

(1) Using the [DEPT] key: 



Repeatable for other departments. 

| New Preset Price | [DEPT] [AT/TL] 


(result: 0.00 to 9999.99) 

NOTE 

(2) Using the [DP#] key: 

| Department Code | [DP#] | New Preset Price | [#] [AT/TL] 


To change a preset-price department into an open department, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and 

simply depress the [DEPT] key (in the first operation pattern) or simply depress the [#] key (in the 

second operation pattern). Presetting a zero-price is also possible. 

NOTE: With the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed”, 0 to 99999.9 (result: $0.000 to 

$999.999), using the [.] key. 

Example) To set the following preset prices of departments: 

Dept.13……….1.40 

Dept.14……….2.10 

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET 

By the first operation pattern: 

140 [DEPT 13] 

210 [DEPT 14] 

[AT/TL] 

By the second operation pattern: 

13 [DP#] 140 [#] 

14 [DP#] 210 [#] 

[AT/TL] 

Repeatable for other departments. 

* Repeatable from here when 

the Dept Code is sequential. 


(result: 0.00 to 9999.99) 

NOTE 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

13 DP13 

14 DP14 

P00 

1.40@ 

2.10@ 

0082 14:47TM


6.62 PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing, Whole Package Quantity Changing (US model) 

6.62 PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing, Whole Package Quantity 

Changing (US model) 


described. However, in setting or changing the price and/or the whole package quantity only but not 

other programmed data, the following operation will be more convenient. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 




| PLU Code | [PLU] | New Whole Package Quantity | [ST] | New Preset Price | [#] [AT/TL] 


Repeatable for other PLUs 

NOTES: 1. With the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed”, 0 to 99999.9 (result: 

$0.000 to $999.999), using the [.] key. 

2. If the operation |New Whole Package Quantity| [ST] is skipped, only a unit price setting 

is performed. 

3. Only for the Split Price PLU, Whole Package Quantity Changing is available. 

To change a preset-price PLU into an open-price PLU, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and simply 

depress the [#] key. Presetting a zero-price is also possible. 

Example) To set the following preset prices of PLU: 

New Whole Package Q’ty New Preset Price 

PLU20105 (Apple) 6 $1.25 


Max. 2digits; 1 to99 

* Repeatable from here if the PLU code is sequential. 


6 [ST] (New Whole Package Q’ty) 

125 [#] (New Preset Price) 


6-187 


(result: $0.00 to $9999.99) 

NOTE 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P00 

020105 / 6 

Apple 1.25@ 

0083 14:49TM


6.63 PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing (QP model) 

6-188 

6.63 PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing (QP model) 


described. However, in setting or changing the price only but not other programmed data, the following 

operation will be more convenient. Only the 1st price can be set or changed here. To set or change 

the 2nd and 3rd prices, please refer to Section 6.52 PLU Price Setting or Changing (Submode 60). 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 




| PLU Code | [PLU] | New Preset Price | [#] [AT/TL] 


Repeatable for other PLUs 

NOTES: 1. With the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed”, 0 to 99999.9 (result: 

€0.000 to €999.999), using the [.] key. 

To change a preset-price PLU into an open-price PLU, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and simply 

depress the [#] key. Presetting a zero-price is also possible. 

Example) To set the following preset prices of PLUs: 

Old Price New Price 

PLU110501 (Potato Chips) €1.50 €1.55 

PLU120501 (Nutmeg) €0.60 €0.65 


110501 [PLU] 155 [#] 

120501 [PLU] 65 [#] 

[AT/TL] 


(result: €0.00 to €9999.99) 

NOTE 

* Repeatable from here if the PLU code is sequential. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P00 

110501 

Potato Chips 1.55@ 

120501 

Nutmeg 0.65@ 

0084 14:51TM


6.64 %+ and %- Preset Rate Setting 

6-189 

6.64 %+ and %- Preset Rate Setting 

A preset rate may be set on each of the [%+] and [%-] keys, one independent rate for each key. Once 

a rate is preset, the % key will simply be depressed without a prior rate entry to activate the preset rate. 

If a rate is entered prior to the depression of the key, the entered rate (manual rate) will be activated 

instead. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



| Preset Rate | [%+] (For Percent Charge Preset Rate) 

(0.001 to 99,999(%); use the [.] key if a decimal portion is contained.) 

| Preset Rate | [%-] (For Percent Discount Preset Rate) 


• To reset the rate once set: 

Enter 0, depress the required % key. 

(Then the % key will always required a manual rate entry in sale entries.) 

NOTE: When two [%+] keys or two [%-] keys are installed on the keyboard, two different % rates 

(one for each) may be preset, in the same manner as described above. The two rates may be 

the same or different from the other. Or only one key may be preset with a rate and other may 

remain non-preset. 

Example) To program the following rate to each key. 

[%+] key……….Rate: 5.00% 

[%-] key………..Rate: 10.00% 


Enter 5, depress [%+] 

Enter 10, depress [%-] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P00 

%+ 5% 

0085 14:53TM 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P00 

%- 10% 

0085 14:55TM


6.65 Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 to SI4) (SI3 and SI4: US model only) 

6.65 Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 to SI4) 

(SI3 and SI4: US model only) 

If any of [SI1/TL] (or [SI/TL]) to [SI4/TL] keys ([SI3/TL] and [SI4/TL]: US model only) are installed on 

the keyboard, a preset rate may be programmed on each key. 

As for the functions and applications of the Selective Itemizers, refer to the description on the next 

page. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



| Preset Rate | [SI/TL] (or [SI1/TL]) 


| Preset Rate | [SI2/TL] 


NOTES: 1. Whether the calculated amount by the preset SI % rate affects (i.e. add to or subtract 

from) the sale total is determined by a system option status selection. 

2. To reset the rate once set, enter 0 as the rate. (Then the rate is regarded as 100% if the 

option “Non-affect” is selected. With the option “SI Affects Sale Total”, some rate other 

than “0” should be programmed.) 

Example) To set 7% as SI1 preset % rate: 


7 [SI1/TL] 

Selective Itemizer Functions and Applications 

The “Selective Itemizer” is a temporary total memory for each sale and is activated separately from the 

Main Itemizer (i.e. sale total memory). If certain Department or PLU items are programmed with the SI 

(selective itemizer) “net” status, the Selective Itemizer will function to add up amounts of the SI-net 

status items in registering the items, while the Main Itemizer will function to add up all the items in the 

sale. Thus, near the sale finalization, the operator may read the SI content by depressing the [SI/TL] 

key. 

A preset % rate may be programmed for each of SI1 to SI4 (on the preceding page) (SI3 and SI4: US 

model only), and whether the calculated amount will add to, subtract from, or non-affect the sale total is 

a selective option. Whether the amount resulted by depressing the [Sl/TL] key will print or non-print is 

another selective option. (Refer to System Option Address 5 Table.) 

6-190 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P00 

SI1 TL 7% 

0086 14:56TM


6.65 Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 to SI4) (SI3 and SI4: US model only) 

The applications of this function may vary from store to store. Some stores may use it for counting the 

service stamps to be issued to the customers according to the sale amount of service-stampable items. 

In this case, the option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total” should be selected, and a preset % rate, 1% 

for example, may be set to issue one service stamp for every 1,00. Thus the number of stamps to be 

issued to the customer is displayed (and printed if so programmed) as a result of calculation with the 

preset % rate, but the resulted value (the number of stamps in this case) will not affect the sale total. 

Example. 1) With option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total”: 

Key Operation in REG Mode Receipt/Journal Print 

100 [DEPT 1] (SI-net) 

150 [DEPT 2] (non-SI) 


[SI/TL] (1% is preset) 

[AT/TL] 

Dept.1 and Dept. 3 are programmed with SI-net-status. On depressing [SI/TL], “0.03” (which is 

1 % of total amount of Dept. 1 “1.00” + Dept. 3 “2.00”) is displayed and printed, and 3 stamps are 

to be issued to the customer in this case. 

The sale total “4.50” is not affected by the SI calculation. 

Other stores may use it for calculating the discount amount for certain sales items during a special 

discount sales period by presetting the discount % rate on the SI and programming SI-net status to 

certain Departments and PLUs which are subject to the special discount. 

Example 2) With option “SI Special Discount”: 

Key Operation in REG Mode Receipt/Journal Print 


150 [DEPT 2] (non-SI) 


[SI/TL] (10% is preset) 

[AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

DP01 1.00 S 

DP02 1.50 

DP03 2.00 S 

SI TL 0.03 

CASH 4.50 

On depressing [SI/TL], “-0.30” (which is 10% discount from the total amount of Dept.1 + Dept. 3 items) 

is displayed and printed, and that amount is subtracted from the sale total. (4.50 - 0.30 = 4.20) 

6-191 

0087 14:57TM 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

DP01 1.00 S 

DP02 1.50 

DP03 2.00 S 

SI TL -0.30 

CASH 4.20 

0088 14:59TM 

“S” : SI-net Symbol 

Number of stamps to 

be issued 

Discount Amount 

resulted by SI %


6.66 Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting 

6-192 


In this program, the rate of each foreign currency (corresponding to the [CUR1] to [CUR5] keys) will be 

set. By setting a rate on each Foreign Currency Key, reading the sale total and tendering in the foreign 

currency value will be possible for sale finalization. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



| Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 1 | [CUR 1] 

0.000001 to 9999.999999 

(Use the [.] key if decimal portion is contained in the rate.) 

| Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 5 | [CUR 5] 

AS for how to calculate the Exchange Rate, see the description below. 

Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Calculation 

1. The rate must be calculated in the subsidiary currency unit values for both the domestic and the 

foreign currencies. (In case of calculating the rate from the domestic to a foreign currency with the 

same zero-suppress form, such as from U.S. $ to Euro, it will be no problem even if it is calculated 

in the main currency of $ and Euro. However, in case of exchanging from a domestic currency 

such as $ or Euro to Japanese yen, or vice versa, this rule must be obeyed; otherwise a wrong 

rate will result.) 

2. Calculate the required foreign currency value equivalent to the domestic currency value “1”. Then 

the obtained value is the Exchange Rate value to be entered in the setting operation stated above. 

Example) To set two foreign currency rates: 

(The rates here are merely examples, and may be different from the actual rates currently 

in effect.) 

Conditions given for Domestic Currency and Foreign Currencies 

(DOMESTIC) (CUR 1) (CUR 2) 

U.S. Dollar EURO Japanese Yen 

$1.00 €1.0914 ¥117.10 

1 cent 1.0914 1.1719 yen 

EURO Cent



1 [.] 0914 [CUR 1] (for EURO) 

1 [.] 1710 [CUR 2] (for Japanese yen) 

Resetting a Foreign Currency Rate Once Set: 

6-193 



TEC STORE Closed: every Wednesday 


PHONE: 87-6437 

08-25-2003 MON #0 


Closed: every Wednesday P00 

CUR2 1.171∗ 

08-25-2003 MON #0 



PHONE: 87-6437 

P00 

CUR1 1.0914∗ 

0089 15:01TM 

0090 15:03TM 

Enter “0” in place of the Exchange Rate for the Foreign Currency in the setting operation. Then the 

rate for that foreign currency will be reset. The Foreign Currency Key of the rate thus reset cannot be 

used in sales entries.


6.67 HAUS BON Discount Rate Setting (QP model only) 

6-194 

6.67 HAUS BON Discount Rate Setting (QP model only) 

This operation sets the discount rates of [HAUS BON1] and [HAUS BON2] (Employee Meals) sale 

items respectively. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



| Discount Rate for HAUS BON 1 | [HAUS BON1] (For HAUS BON1 Preset Rate) 

1 to 100 (%) 

| Discount Rate for HAUS BON 2 | [HAUS BON2] (For HAUS BON2 Preset Rate) 

1 to 100 (%) 

• To reset the rate once set: 

Enter 0, then depress the required [HAUS BON] key. 

(Then the HAUS BON sale items through that key will be recorded with no discount 

Example) To set 20% discount on [HAUS BON1]: 


20 [HAUS BON1] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P00 

HAUS BON1 20% 

0091 15:05TM


6.68 TAX Table Setting (US model only) 

6-195 


A maximum of four tax tables can be programmed (Tax 1, Tax 2, Tax 3, Tax 4) in accordance with 

installation of [TX1/M], [TX2/M], [TX3/M], [TX4/M] keys. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



TYPE 1: TAX 1 FULL BREAKS (COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC AND CYCLIC BREAKS) 

| Max. amount non-taxable | [TX1/M] 

| Max. amount for 1 ¢ tax levied | [TX1/M] 

| Max. amount for 2 ¢ tax levied | [TX1/M] 

Repeat up to the “A” Break 

| Max. amount for N¢ tax levied | [TX1/M] .. ... “A” Break (Non-cyclic Break Limit) 

[ST] (to indicate the completion of Non-cyclic Breaks) 

| Max. amount for N + 1¢ tax levied | [TX1/M] (beginning of Cyclic Breaks) 

| Max. amount for N + 2¢ tax levied | [TX1/M] 

Repeat up to the “B” Break (“B” Break - “A” Break + Multiple of $1.00; max. $9.00) 

[AT/TL] (to complete this tax table programming) 

NOTE: The break amount entry must be a maximum of 4 digits (1 to 9999 resulting in $0.01 to 

$99.99) 

TYPE 2: TAX 1 COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC BREAKS AND % RATE 

First set all the breaks up to the “A” Break entry and the [ST] key depression as shown in TYPE 1. 

| TAX RATE applied when exceeding the “A” Break amount | 

(0.0001% to 99.9999%; use the [.] key if a decimal portion is contained. Examples: To set 5%, 

enter 5. To set 5.26%, enter 5.26. The fraction of the amount resulting from this % rate 

calculation will be rounded off.) 

[AT/TL] (to complete this tax programming) 

TYPE 3: TAX 1 % RATE ONLY 

0 [TX1/M] [ST] | TAX RATE | [AT/TL] 

(The description for the TAX RATE in TYPE 2 is also applied to this case.)


6-196 


NOTES: 1. For Tax 2, Tax 3, Tax 4 table programming, follow the same procedure in TYPE 1, 2, or 

3 on the preceding page, using [TX2/M] or [TX3/M] or [TX4/M] instead of [TX1/M]. 

2. If multiple tax tables are programmed, the Tax 1 table must be set first, then Tax 2, Tax 

3, and Tax 4. The Tax 1 table setting will automatically reset all of the old Tax 1, 2, 3. 

and 4 tables if they have been programmed. 

3. No second depression of the [ST] key is allowed within one tax table programming. 

4. A maximum of 99 breaks can be entered for Tax 1 to Tax 4 tables altogether. 

5. For inclusive tax (Tax 3 or Tax 4), tax table programming using a rate only is available. 

Tax table programming using a tax break is unavailable. 

Example 1) TAX 1 FULL BREAKS 

Tax Table Key Operation 


Amount Range Tax Levied 

$0.00 to $0.10 0¢ 10 [TX1/M] 

$0.11 to $0.22 1¢ 22 [TX1/M] 

$0.23 to $0.39 2¢ 39 [TX1/M] 

$0.40 to $0.56 3¢ 56 [TX1/M] 

$0.57 to $0.73 4¢ 73 [TX1/M] 

$0.74 to $0.90 5¢ 90 [TX1/M] 

$0.91 to $1.08 6¢ 108 [TX1/M] 

---- “A” Break [ST] 

$1.09 to $1.24 7¢ 124 [TX1/M] 

$1.25 to $1.41 8¢ 141 [TX1/M] 

$1.42 to $1.58 9¢ 158 [TX1/M] 

$1.59 to $1.74 10¢ 174 [TX1/M] 

$1.75 to $1.92 11¢ 192 [TX1/M] 

$1.93 to $2.08 12¢ 208 [TX1/M] 

---- “B” Break [AT/TL] 

Example 2) TAX 2 COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC BREAKS AND % RATE 



Amount Range Tax Levied 

$0.00 to $0.09 0¢ 9 [TX2/M] 

$0.10 to $0.29 1¢ 29 [TX2/M] 

$0.30 to $0.59 2¢ 59 [TX2/M] 

$0.60 to $0.84 3¢ 84 [TX2/M] 

$0.85 to $1.12 4¢ 112 [TX2/M] 

---- “A” Break [ST] 

5% is applied to any amount 5 

exceeding the “A” Break. [AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P00 

TAX1 

00 $0.10 

01 $0.22 

02 $0.39 

03 $0.56 

04 $0.73 

05 $0.90 

06 

∗ 

$1.08 

07 $1.24 

08 $1.41 

09 $1.58 

10 $1.74 

11 $1.92 

12 

∗∗ 

$2.08 



PHONE: 87-6437 

0092 15:07TM 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P00 

TAX2 

00 $0.09 

01 $0.29 

02 $0.59 

03 $0.84 

04 $1.12 

∗ 

5% 

0093 15:09TM


Example 3) TAX 10% RATE ONLY 



10% is applied to any sale amount 0 [TX3/M] 

[ST] 

10 

[AT/TL] 

6-197 




PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #0 

P00 

TAX3 

00 $0.00 

∗ 

10% 

0094 15:11TM


6.69 Store/Register No. Setting 

6-198 

6.69 Store/Register No. Setting 

A maximum of 6 digits may be set as ID No. for the store and/or register. And once set, it will be 

printed on every receipt and every transaction on journal. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



| Store/Register No. | [#] 


NOTE: The preceding zeros, if entered, will not be printed. For example, if “001234” is entered in the 

above operation, “#1234” will always be printed as the Register No. 

Example) To set the Register No. of this terminal: 3001 


3001 [#] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #3001 

P00 

#3001 

0095 15:13TM

7. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA EO3-11103B 

7. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA 

7.1 Verification of Programmed Data 

7- 1 


The programmed data entered in the preceding chapter can be read for verification purposes. 

The print format of each program reading is almost the same as on the program receipt, except that 

“PX” and a 3-digit number are printed instead of printing “P” and a 2-digit number. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 


Mode Lock: X or SET 

1. To read out the data of programming operations with a Submode No., first enter “1”, then each 

Submode No., and finally depress the [AT/TL] key. 

For example, to read the programmed data entered in Submode 1 (STORE NAME/MESSAGE, 

COMMERCIAL MESSAGE, FOOTER LOGO MESSAGE PROGRAMMING), operate: 

1 0 1 [AT/TL] 

Submode No. (In case of a 1-digit number, add a “0” on top to be a 2-digit 

number.) 

Always attach “1” to the Program Submode No. for reading data. 

NOTE: Data of Submodes 5, 6, 24 (QP model), 64 (QP model) cannot be read. 

2. To read out the data of programming operations without a Submode No., the following operation will 

read all the data together: 

1 0 0 [AT/TL] 

To read the data of the following operations: 

• %+ and %- PRESET RATE 

• SELECTIVE ITEMIZER RATE 

• FOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RATE 

• HAUS BON DISCOUNT RATE (QP model only) 

• TAX TABLE (US model only) 

3. Zone destination is possible in reading the PLU TABLE: 

1 0 4 [ST] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL] 

PLU Code PLU Code 

NOTE: On depressing the [AT/TL] key, the programmed data will be printed. To abort printing 

once started, depress the [ITEM CORR] or [VOID] key. The reading operation is 

immediately stopped halfway.

7. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA EO3-11103B 

7- 2 

7.2 Tax Calculation Test (US model only) 

4. To display software version and checksum concerning the scale spec.: (QP model only) 

Mode Lock: X 

97 [AT/TL] 

 

N M I X X W U N F X X X 

Fixed Checksum Fixed Software version 

(Data in ROM) (Scale function) 

7.2 Tax Calculation Test (US model only) 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 


Mode Lock: X or SET 

Enter any amount. Depress [TXBL TL] 

Displays the entered amount. Displays the tax amount 

(Tax 1 + Tax 2 + Tax 3 + 

Tax 4) is displayed, 

issuing a receipt such as 

below. 

NOTE: Whether Taxes 1 to 4 amounts calculated are printed or not depends on the selection of 

“REORT ITEM PRINT/NON-PRINT SETTING (Submode 28).” 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-25-2003 MON #3001 

PX 

TAX1 

$100.00 

$6.00 

TAX2 $5.00 

TAX3 $4.00 

TAX4 $3.00 

0096 15:15TM 

Entered Amount 

Tax 1 amount calculated 



Tax 4 amount calculated

2. M/S LEVEL


EO3-11103B 


1. INTRODUCTION----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1- 1 

2. SYSTEM OVERVIEW ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2- 1 

2.1 System Configuration ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2- 1 

3. SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURE --------------------------------------------------------------3- 1 

3.1 To Start-up using the MA-1595 Terminal only ------------------------------------------------------ 3- 1 

3.2 To Start-up using a PC ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3- 2 

4. MASTER-SATELLITE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING -------------------------------------------4- 1 

4.1 Introduction -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4- 1 

4.2 RAM Allocation Setting (Submode 79) --------------------------------------------------------------- 4- 4 

4.3 In-line ID and LAN Network Setting (Submode 77)------------------------------------------------ 4- 6 

4.4 Terminal Connection Table Setting (Submode 69)------------------------------------------------ 4- 9 

4.5 In-line/LAN Socket Programming (Submode 70) ------------------------------------------------- 4-10 

4.6 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63) ------------------------------- 4-12 

4.7 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing with DLL (Submode 72) -------------------- 4-15 

4.8 PLU Price Changing with DLL (Submode 73) ----------------------------------------------------- 4-15 

4.9 Verification of Programmed Data --------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-17 

5. RTR DECLARATION, TERMINAL DESIGNATION -------------------------------------------5- 1 

5.1 RTR (Register-to-Register) Declaration -------------------------------------------------------------- 5- 1 

5.2 RTR Declaration Cancel---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5- 1 

5.3 Terminal Designation-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5- 2 

6. DLLs (Down Line Loadings) -----------------------------------------------------------------------6- 1 

6.1 DLLs ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6- 1 

6.2 Display Indications of DLL Operations---------------------------------------------------------------- 6- 5 

6.3 Print Format of DLL Operations ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6- 5 

7. IN-LINE REPORTS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7- 1 

8. INQUIRIES -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8- 1 

8.1 PLU Inquiries ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8- 1 

8.2 Customer File (Check Track) Inquiries --------------------------------------------------------------- 8- 1 

8.3 Credit Card No. Inquiries to the Negative Check File (US model only) ---------------------- 8- 2 

8.4 Cashier Occupy Inquiries -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8- 2 

9. BACKUP DATA CONTROL -------------------------------------------------------------------------9- 1 

9.1 Overview of Backup Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9- 1 

9.2 Process at Changing Program Data------------------------------------------------------------------- 9- 1 

9.3 Sales Data Update Process ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9- 2 

9.4 Backup Data Checking ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9- 2 

9.5 Backup Error Flag------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9- 2 

9.6 Backup Data Update Process--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9- 3 

Page

EO3-11103B 


10. TRANSACTION DATA CAPTURE -------------------------------------------------------------- 10- 1 

10.1 Transaction Data Control----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10- 1 

11. TRANSMISSION ERROR -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11- 1 

11.1 Cause of Error------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11- 1 

11.2 Error Display--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11- 1 

11.3 Error Cancelling Process----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11- 2 

12. OTHER IN-LINE OPERATIONS ------------------------------------------------------------------ 12- 1 

12.1 Time Out-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12- 1 

12.1 Suspending ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12- 2 

12.3 Retry ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12- 2 

12.4 Incomplete Ending ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12- 3 

12.5 Cancel----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12- 3 

12.6 Terminal Open Check--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12- 4 

12.7 Terminal Condition Check --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12- 4 

12.8 Enforced Clear of Hold Condition (on Individual Terminals) -------------------------------- 12- 5 

12.9 Manual Copy of Backup Data ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 12- 5 

12.10 Read of Information Already Copied Communication Buffer (US model)---------------- 12- 6 

12.11 Enforced Clear Communication Buffer (US model) ------------------------------------------- 12- 6 

Page



1- 1 


This programming manual describes information on programming and other related operation of the 

MA-1595 Master-Satellite System. 

Please start reading this manual after going through the MA-1595 Programming Manual for the standalone 

level. 

In Master-Satellite System, a Batch-consolidation system (maximum of 16 terminals) or Scanning 

systems (maximum of 4 terminals) can be built. By connecting a PC, a Transaction Data Capture 

system is possible. 

Most of the programming operations for the stand-alone level are still effective in the Master-Satellite 

System. However, those operations that need to be changed for the Master-Satellite system level are 

to be described in this manual. 

Especially for operation procedures by cashiers and manager respectively, please refer to the M/S 

Level of the MA-1595 Owner’s Manual which is separately issued.

2. SYSTEM OVERVIEW EO3-11103B 

2. SYSTEM OVERVIEW 

2.1 System Configuration 

Satellite 

Terminal 

PC 

TCP/IP 

Master 

Terminal 

Remote Slip Printer 

Scanner 

Scale 


RS-232C 


Scanner 

Scale 


RS-232C 

Satellite 

Terminal 


Scanner 

Scale 


RS-232C 

2- 1 

UDP 

Backup Master 

Terminal 


Scanner 

Scale 


RS-232C 

Satellite 

Terminal 


Scanner 

Scale 


RS-232C 

2.1 System Configuration 

Batch-consolidation System: Max. 16 terminals 

Master Terminal ... 1 unit 

Backup Master Terminal ... 1 unit System including 

Satellite Terminal ... Max. 14 units Backup Master Terminal 

or 

Master Terminal ... 1 unit System not including 

Satellite Terminal ... Max. 14 units Backup Master Terminal 

Scanning System: Max. 4 terminals 

Remote Slip Printer: TM-U295 (EPSON) 

Scanner: PSC-6000/2500 

Scale: SL-47 

EFT: Data Tran-LT DATACAP 

Data Tran-SL DATACAP



3.1 To Start-up using the MA-1595 Terminals only 

Step Job Description 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

RAM Clear 

Connect all the terminals via the in-line 

Cables. 

RAM Allocation System setting. 

Set the M/S System selection, Various 

system requirements, and allocation. 

(Submode 79) 

In-line ID and LAN Network Setting 

Set the In-line ID (Master=1), and IP 

Address, Subnet Mask, and Default 

Gateway, and Store/Register No. 

(Submode 77) 

SFKC Programming 

Assign the [RTR] key by SFKC 

Programming 

RTR Declaration 

Terminal Connection Table Setting 

Set all the terminals to be connected to 

the system. (Submode 69) O 

Terminals 

M BM, S 

O O 

O O 

O 

O O 

(In-line/LAN Socket Programming) 

(Submode 70) O O 

RAM Allocation DLL 

Terminal Connection Table DLL 

Various Data Programming 

DLL of Programmed Data 

Manual Data Copy 

O 

O 

O 

O 

O 

O 

O 

3- 1 

3.1 To Start-up using the MA-1595 Terminals only 

Remarks 

Install option equipments into the terminals, 

then perform a RAM Clear 

The Master-Satellite (M/S) System is 

selected and each system setting and 

allocation is performed. 

(On the Master Terminal (M) only.) 

 

Master: ID=1 

Backup Master: ID=2 

Satellite: ID=3 to 16 

On the Master Terminal (M) only. 

[RTR] key: SFKC 138 

Depress the [RTR] key on the Master 

Terminal (M) as various in-line jobs can be 

performed. 

Terminal ID number should assigned to all 

terminals connected in the M/S system. 

When the ID=2 terminal is assigned, this 

system will be M/S system with Backup 

Master Terminal (BM). 

This setting is not required, however, in-line 

transmission information can be 

programmed. 

Allocation and System setting are 

downloaded to the Backup Master Terminal 

(BM) and all Satellite Terminals (S). This 

operation is performed on the Master 

Terminal (M). 

This operation is performed on the Master 

Terminal (M). 

Each items should be programmed. When 

program data is downloaded from the PC, 

PC connection is selected in the system 

option setting. PC transmission information 

should be changed as required. This 

operation is performed on the Master 

Terminal (M). 

This operation is performed on the Master 

Terminal (M). 

Manual Data Copy should be performed only 

when the Backup Master Terminal (BM) is 

included in the system. 

14 RTR Declaration Cancel O The In-line jobs are terminated.


3.2 To Start-up using a PC 

3- 2 

3.2 To Start-up using a PC 

To perform start-up using the PC, refer to the stand-alone level start-up procedure. 

When performing a DLL directed from the PC, only the terminals actually connected should be 

designated in the terminal list attached to the PC command.

4. MASTER-SATELLITE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING EO3-11103B 

4. MASTER-SATELLITE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 

4.1 Introduction 

4- 1 


This chapter describes on settings required for the Master-Satellite System and on remarks and notes 

for the settings. As for the settings for the Stand-alone level, refer to the Programming Manual for 

Stand-alone Level. 

Most of the settings here are to be performed on the Master Terminal, and those programmed data will 

be loaded to each Satellite Terminal by DLL operations described in Chapter 6. 

The following are the programming submodes that need changes from the Stand-alone level: 

SFKC PROGRAMMING (BLIND Mode) 

Be certain to set the [RTR] key (SFKC 138) on the Master Terminal. This key is to be used in 

settings, DLLs, and other in-line service jobs that will be described in this manual. 

CASHIER CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 2) 

Select the “Floating Cashier Feature” or the “Non-floating Cashier Feature” in the RAM 

Allocation Setting. 

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 4), PLU STOCK LOADING (QP model (Submode 24)) 

The stock control system is not applicable to the Master-Satellite System. (QP model) 

Select “PLU to be inquired” or “PLU not to be inquired” in the RAM Allocation Setting. 

(The status “PLU to be inquired” (inquired to the Center File) is obtained when Expansion 

Memory is used.) 

SYSTEM OPTION PROGRAMMING (Submode 18) 

By performing a RAM, setting of System Option Address 46 (IN-LINE OPTION) will be 

effective. (Refer to the Programming Manual for the stand-alone level.) 

CUSTOMER FILE CODE (Submode 15) 

The Customer Files (Check Tracks) are always programmed in the Center File (that is subject 

to inquiries) in the Master-Satellite System. 

CREDIT CARD No. NEGATIVE CHECK FILE PROGRAMMING (US model (Submode 54)) 

The Negative Card Files are always programmed in the Center file (that is subject to inquiries) 

in the Master-Satellite System (only when Expansion Memory is used). 

PLU ADDITION TO PLU ADDITIONAL TABLE (Submode 64) 

It is operable when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is selected in the RAM Allocation Setting, 

it can be operated only on the Master Terminal. 

PLUs added in the Additional PLU Table 

(Submode 64 and Urgent Maintenance) is to be merged into the PLU Main Table by the PLU 

Merge operation. 

OPERATION 

Mode Lock: X or Z (The IN-LINE Lamp must be illuminated) 

40 [AT/TL] 

Furthermore, there are some other programming operations that need to be set for the Master-Satellite 

System only, such as DISPLAY MESSAGE, ERROR MESSAGE, etc. Therefore, also refer to the 

Programming Manual for Stand-alone Level.


4- 2 


Below and on the following pages are the list of programming items specified to be programmable or 

unprogrammable in accordance with the Terminal level. 

O: Programmable 

Blank: Unprogrammable 

S/A: Stand-alone 

M: Master Terminal (when RTR Declaration is ON) 

S: Satellite Terminal (including Backup Master and Master Terminal with RTR Declaration is OFF). 

List of Programming Operations on Terminals 

Programming Item Mode Submode 

Terminal Level 

S/A M S 

Remarks 

RAM Clear BLIND --- O O O 

Data Clear BLIND --- O O O 

Status Clear BLIND --- O O O 

SFKC (Selective Function Key Code) Programming BLIND --- O O O 

Store Name, Commercial Message, and Footer Logo Message 

Programming 

SET 1 O O O 

Cashier Code and Name Programming SET 2 O O 

Department Table Programming SET 3 O O 

PLU Table Programming SET 4 O O 

Time Setting or Adjustment SET 5 O O O 

Date Setting or Adjustment SET 6 O O O 

Hourly Range Table Setting SET 7 O O 

Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys SET 8 O O O 

Financial Report Item Name Programming SET 9 O O 

Print Line Item Name Programming SET 10 O O 

System Option Programming 

SET 

BLIND 

11/18 

18 

O O O 

Non-Taxable Amount Limit Setting SET 12 O O US model 

VAT or Add-on Tax Rate Setting SET 12 O O QP model 

Minor Group Name Programming SET 13 O O 

Major Group Name Programming SET 14 O O 

Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting SET 15 O O 

Display Upper-row Message Programming SET 17 O O 

Combination Report Table Programming SET 19 O O O 

Salesperson Code and Name Programming SET 20 O O 

Credit Card Company ID Code Name Programming SET 21 O O 

Endorsement (or FRANCE Cheque Print) Message Programming SET 22 O O O 

Key Status Programming SET 23 O O 

PLU Stock Loading or Changing SET 24 O O QP model 

Link-PLU Table Programming SET 25 O O 

Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting SET 26 O O 

PLU Preset-Code Key Setting SET 27 O O O 

Report Item Print/Non-Print Setting SET 28 O O 

PLU Group Name Programming SET 29 O O 

Comment Message Programming SET 30 O O O US model 

Display Message Programming SET 31 O O O 

Error Message Programming SET 32 O O 

Media Pick-Up Warning Setting SET 33 O O 

Function Key (Combination Key) Setting SET 34 O O O 

Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting SET 35 O O 

Special Rounding Process Setting, 1-digit type SET 36 O O QP model 

Special Rounding Process Setting, 2-digit type SET 37 O O QP model 

Drawer Warning Time Setting SET 38 O O 

Read/Reset Report Name Programming SET 39 O O 

PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting SET 40 O O US model 

Age Limit Setting SET 41 O O US model 

Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting, 1-digit type SET 48 O O 

Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting, 2-digit type SET 49 O O 



4- 3 


List of Programming Operations on Terminals (continued) 

Programming Item Mode Submode 

Terminal Level 

S/A M S 

Remarks 

Credit Card No. Negative Check File Programming SET 54 O O US model 

Barcode Individual Flag Type Designation SET 55 O O US model 

Store ID Setting SET 56 O O QP model 

PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing SET 60 O O QP model 

PLU Addition to PLU Additional Table File SET 64 O O 

EFT Key Status Programming SET 65 O O O US model 

EFT Information Setting 1 SET 66 O O O US model 

EFT Information Setting 2 SET 67 O O O US model 

PC Transmission Information Setting SET 68 O O 

Terminal Connection Table Setting SET 69 O O 

In-line/LAN Socket Programming SET 70 O O O 

COM Port and R/J Printer Setting SET 71 O O O 

In-line ID and LAN Network Setting SET 77 O O O 

RAM Allocation Setting BLIND 79 O O 

Table Clear BLIND 91 O O 

Department Preset Price Setting or Changing SET --- O O 

PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing, Whole Package Quantity 

Changing (US model) 

SET --- O O 

%+ and %- Preset Rate Setting SET --- O O O 

Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 to SI4) SET --- O O O 

SI3 and SI4: 

US model only 

Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting SET --- O O 

HAUS BON Discount Rate Setting SET --- O O QP model 

Tax Table Programming SET --- O O US model 

Store/Register No. Setting SET --- O O O



4- 4 


This submode is almost the same as same submode stated in the Programming Manual for the standalone 

level, except that the submode here specifies the RAM allocation in the Master-Satellite System. 

RAM allocation values set on the Master Terminal are loaded to the Satellite Terminals by the DLL 

operation described in Chapter 6. 

CONDITION After a Table Clear or a RAM clear 

OPERATION 

Mode Lock: BLIND (Operable on the Master Terminal) 

79 [X] 1 [ST] 1 [#] 

[AT/TL] 

M/S system designation 

2 [ST] | Codes to designate Expansion Memory | [#] 

1 digit 

0: No Expansion Memory (Standard Memory only) (Default) 

2: 2MB 

4: 4MB 

3 [ST] | Codes to designate System Setting | [#] 

US model: Max. 4 digits, 

QP model: Max. 3 digits 

(combination of 1,2, 3 and 4) see * below 

4 [ST] | Number of Cashiers | [#] 


5 [ST] | Number of PLUs | [#] 


6 [ST] | Number of Check Tracks | [#] 


7 [ST] | Number of Data Capture Records | [#] 


8 [ST] | Number of Negative Card Nos | [#] 

Max. 4 digits (US model only) 

(See ** for 

the value of 

each item.)


* Codes to designate System Setting: 

US model: Combine the following four codes (1 to4) in a maximum of 4 digits. 

QP model: Combine the following three codes (1 to3) in a maximum of 3 digits. 

For example, enter 12 to designate 1 and 2. 

1: Floating Cashier System is used. 

2: PLU Inquiry Function is used. 

3: Check Track Expansion Memory is used. 

4: CVS Spec. is used (US model only) 

4- 5 


NOTES: 1. Default Value (auto-set after a RAM Clear) is “2”. 

2. When no Expansion Memory is used, entering the code 3 then depressing the [#] 

key causes an error. 

3. To use the CVS spec., the Expansion Memory of 2MB or more is necessary. 

Furthermore, when the system setting code 4 (CVS spec.) is selected, all other 

system setting codes (1 to 3) are forcibly programmed. (US model only) 

** Values to be set for the Number of Cashiers, the Number of PLUs, the Number of Check 

Tracks, Number of Data Capture Records and Number of Negative Card Nos (US model only): 

Item 

(Number of:) 

Default Value 

(auto-set after a 

RAM Clear) 


Standard Memory is 

used 


Expansion Memory 

Is used 

Cashiers 15 1 to 15 1 to 99 

PLUs 5,000 

Check Tracks 

500 (US model) 

400 (QP model) 

0 to 5,000 (NOTE 1) 

0 to 1,500 (NOTE 2) 

0 to 65,000 (NOTE 3) 

0 to 1,000 0 to 3,000 

Data Capture 

Records 

0 0 0 to 65,000 

Negative Card Nos 


0 0 0 to 3,000 

No setting for the Number of “Data Capture Records” and “Negative Card Nos (US model only)” will be 

possible unless the Expansion Memory is used. 

NOTES: 1. When using the PLU Inquiry Function. 

2. When not using the PLU Inquiry Function. 

3. For a system with the CVS spec. selected, value range with expansion memory is 0 

to 30,000. 

4. The minimum unit for setting the number of PLUs, Check Tracks, or Data Capture 

Records or Negative Card Nos. (US model only) is 100. 

5. Even when a large area remains to be unallocated in the RAM, setting of any item 

cannot exceed its value range specified in the table above. 

6. When any of the values already set are to be changed even during the entire setting 

operation sequence, complete the submode first by depressing the [AT/TL] key, 

then start the submode again from the first after executing the Table Clear or the 

RAM Clear. 

7. The Expansion Memory capacity must match the installed RAM capacity. When 

Check Tracks, Data Capturing, or Negative Card Nos (US model only) is used, 

select the corresponding System Option settings. 

8. When using the Cashier Expansion memory on Stand-alone Terminal or using the 

Floating Cashier System on Master/Satellite Terminal, select the Code Entry 

Method.


4.3 In-line ID and LAN Network Setting (Submode 77) 

4- 6 


This submode is available for in-line terminals (including the master and backup master terminals). It 

must be operated separately on each terminal since the In-line ID should vary from terminal to terminal. 

The data sent in this submode is used as the in-line address of the terminal for in-line service 

operations. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

Any time outside a sale for Master or Satellite 

Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated (Master Terminal) 

SET (Satellite Terminal or Backup Master Terminal) 

77 [X] 1 [ST] | In-line ID | [#] 

2 digits (Assign No. of 01 to 16) 

(NOTE 1 on the next page.) 

01: Master Terminal 

02: Backup Master 

03 to 16: Satellite Terminals 

[AT/TL] 

2 [ST] | Network Status | [#] 

Enter a maximum of eight-digit number 

composed of Bit Nos whose status must be 

selected to the “SET” status in the Network 

Status Table. (NOTE 2 on the next page.) 

3 [ST] | IP Address | [#] 

12 digits (000..000~255..254) 


4 [ST] | IP Address of Master Terminal | [#] 

12 digits (000..000~255..254) 


5 [ST] | Subnet Mask | [#] 

12 digits (000..000~255..255) 


6 [ST] | Default Gateway | [#] 

12 digits (000..000~255..254) 

(NOTE 3 on the next page.)


4- 7 


NOTES: 1. As the In-line ID setting, be sure to enter 01 for Master Terminal and 02 for Backup 

Master Terminal, respectively. Never assign the same In-line ID to terminals on the same 

In-line system. Doing so may cause an error. In this case, perform a STATUS Clear on 

all the terminals. 

2. Network Status Table 

Code Item SET RESET 

0 No Status 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 Default Gateway Used Not used 

6 Subnet Mask auto-setting Ineffective Effective 

7 

8 

Enter a maximum of eight-digit number composed of Bit Nos. whose status must be 

selected to SET status. In the above table, only Code 5 and Code 6 can be set. Enter 0 

when none of the statuses should be set. Default value after a RAM Clear is 0. 

Default Gateway (Code 5): 

Select SET status before performing Default Gateway setting (6 [ST]). 

Subnet Mask auto-setting (Code 6): 

When this code is set, the Subnet Mask setting (5 [ST]) will be effective. 

When this code is reset, the Subnet Mask auto-setting will be performed according to 

the IP Address setting as follows. 

IP Address first section value Subnet Mask 

0 to 127 255. 0. 0.0 

128 to 191 255.255. 0.0 

192 to 223 255.255.255.0 

3. • IP Address 

Self IP Address is programmed with 12-digit value. 

After a RAM Clear, the value 192.168.0.254 is set as standard. 

Example) To program “192.168.0.254”, enter 192168000254. 

• IP Address of Master Terminal 

It is programmed with 12-digit value. 

On the Master Terminal, enter the same value as that of the IP Address. 

• Subnet Mask 

It is programmed with 12-digit value. 


When the Subnet Mask auto-setting is set in the Network Status (2 [ST]), the Subnet 

Mask to be programmed here will be effective. When RESET status is selected (2 

[ST]), the Subnet Mask setting is not required. 


• Default Gateway 

Only when Default Gateway has been set (Used) in the Network Status (2 [ST]), the 

Default Gateway is programmed with 12-digit value. 



4. This submode is also available on the stand-alone terminal, however, the In-line ID and 

the IP Address of Master Terminal should not be set.


4- 8 


Example) To assign Terminal ID No. 3 to the Terminal used as the Satellite Terminal of the in-line 

system: 

In-line ID No.: 03 (Satellite Terminal) 

Network Status: None of the status 

IP Address: 192.168.0.242 

IP Address of Master Terminal: 192.168.0.240 

Key Operation: Mode Lock SET, enter 77, depress [X]. 

1 [ST] (In-line ID No.) 

03 [#] (In-line ID: 03 Satellite Terminal) 

2 [ST] (Network Status) 

0 [#] (None of the status) 

3 [ST] (IP Address) 

192168000242 [#] (192.168.0.242) 

4 [ST] (IP Address of Master Terminal) 

192168000240 [#] (192.168.0.240) 

[AT/TL] (Complete this Submode) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-31-2003 SUN #333303 

P77 

#1 03 

#2 0 

#3 192.168. 0.242 

#4 192.168. 0.240 

0026 19:38TM


4.4 Terminal Connection Table Setting (Submode 69) 

4- 9 

4.4 Terminal Connection Table Setting (Submode 69) 

This submode is required for In-line services. The In-line ID No., Store/Register No. and IP Address of 

each terminal (including the Master Terminal) can be programmed on the Master Terminal. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 


Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated 

69 [X] | In-line ID No. | [ST] | Store/Register No. | [#] | IP Address | [#] [AT/TL] 

2 digits (01 to 16) 

(NOTES 1 & 2 below) 


0 to 999999 

(NOTE 2 below) 

NOTES: 1. In-line ID No.: Master Terminal ... 01 (fixed) 

Backup Master Terminal (if connected) ... 02 (fixed) 

Satellite Terminals ... 03 to 16 (max. 14 terminals) 

2. The In-line ID No. and Register No. of each terminal to be set here must be the same 

as those programmed for the terminal in IN-LINE TERMINAL ID SETTING (Submode 

77) in this chapter and STORE/REGISTER NO. SETTING (no submode) in Chapter 6 

of the Programming Manual for stand-alone level. 

3. IP Address: 12 digits (000.. 000 to 255.. 255) 

ex) To set the IP Address 192.168.0.252……….Enter 192168000252 

4. To delete an individual terminal from the Terminal Connection Table, enter 0 in place of 

the In-line ID No., then enter Register No.. 

69 [X] 0 [ST] | Register No. | [#] [AT/TL] 

5. To delete the entire Terminal Connection Table once set, operate: 

69 [X] 0 [AT/TL] 

6. If a deleting operation (individual or entire deletion) is performed, the files occupied by 

the deleted terminal(s) (such as Floating Cashier File, etc.) is canceled. Therefore, a 

deleting operation should be performed only when the system is to be re-built or a 

terminal is to be detached from the system. 

Example) 

To set Master Terminal and Satellite Terminal in the Connection 

Table (total of two terminals in the in-line system): 

Master Terminal In-line ID No. 1 Register No. 111101 IP Address 192.168.0.251 

Satellite Terminal In-line ID No. 3 Register No. 333303 IP Address 192.168.0.253 

Key Operation: Mode Lock SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated, 

enter 69, depress [X]. 

01 [ST] (Master In-line ID No.) 

111101 [#] (Master Register No.) 

192168000251 [#] (Master IP Address) 

03 [ST] (Satellite In-line ID No.) 

333303 [#] (Satellite Register No.) 

192168000253 [#] (Satellite IP Address) 

[AT/TL] (Complete this Submode) 

* 

Repeat for other terminals to be connected, including the Master Terminal itself. (Max. 16 terminals) 

12 digits 

(NOTE 3 below) * For sequentially 

programming In-line 

ID Nos, the In-line ID 

specification can be 

skipped. 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-31-2003 SUN #111101 

P69 

#01 #111101 192.168. 0.251 

#03 #333303 192.168. 0.253 

0025 19:40TM


4.5 In-line/LAN Socket Programming (Submode 70) 

This submode provides setting of various requirements for in-line/LAN transmission. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



70 [X] 1 [ST] | IRT Receive Timer | [#] 


(1 = 100ms) 

(Standard: 100 = 10000ms = 10sec) 

[AT/TL] 

* 

2 [ST] | Batch Receive Timer | [#] 


(1 = 100ms) 


* 

3 [ST] | PC Receive Timer | [#] 


(1 = 100ms) 


* 

4 [ST] | UDP Transmission Delay Timer | [#] 


(1 = 20ms) 

(Standard: 2 = 40ms) 

4-10 


* 

5 [ST] | TCP/IP Transmission Delay Timer | [#] 


(1 = 20ms) 

(Standard: 2 = 40ms) 

| Type of Socket | [ST] | Socket No. | [#] 

1 digit (6 to 9) 1 digit (0 to 3) 

6: UDP Transmission Socket (T/M to T/M) 

7: UDP Receive Socket (T/M to T/M) 

8: TCP Transmission/Receive Socket (T/M to PC) 

9: Not used 

| Terminal Port No. | [#] 

Max. 5 digits, 1 to 65535 

| Time out value | [#] 

Max. 5 digits, 1 to 65535 

* For sequentially programming 

the address, the address No. 

specification can be skipped.


4-11 


NOTES: 1. The Standard values of address 1 to 5 are auto-set by a RAM Clear. 

2. The Standard values of each socket are follows below. 

Type of Socket 

Standard value (auto-set by 

RAM Clear) 

6: UDP Transmission 

Socket 

Socket No. 

Terminal Port No. 

Time out value 

0 

49153 

10 sec. 

Socket No. 1 

7: UDP Receive Socket Terminal Port No. 49154 

Time out value 10 sec. 

8: TCP Transmission/ 

Receive socket 

Socket No. 

Terminal Port No. 

Time out value 

2 

49155 

10 sec. 

Socket No. 3 

9: Not used 

Terminal Port No. 49156 

Time out value 10 sec. 

Example) 

To set the following values; 

• IRT Receive Timer: 8000ms 

• Batch Receive Timer: 45000ms 

• PC Receive Timer: 45000ms 

• UDP Transmission Delay Timer: 60ms 

• TCP/IP Transmission Delay Timer: 60ms 

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated, 

enter 70, depress [X]. 

1 [ST] 80 [#] IRT Receive Timer 

2 [ST] 450 [#] Batch Receive Timer 

3 [ST] 450 [#] PC Receive Timer 

4 [ST] 3 [#] UDP Transmission Delay Timer 

5 [ST] 3 [#] TCP/IP Transmission Delay Timer 

[AT/TL] To complete this submode 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-31-2003 SUN #111101 

P70 

#1 0080 

#2 0450 

#3 0450 

#4 0003 

#5 0003 

0026 19:45TM


4-12 

4.6 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63) 


On the Master Terminal, new PLU items are added, PLU program data is changed, or PLUs are 

deleted. The programmed data will be loaded to each Satellite Terminal or designated terminals. 

(US model) 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

Repeat for 

other PLUs. 

All the terminals: After PLU daily and GT Resets (when the feature “PLU not be inquired” is selected) 

Master Terminal: Any time outside a sale (when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is selected) 

Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp Illuminated 

63 [X] |Address Numbers| [#] |PLU Code| [PLU] 

Repeat for 

any address 

within the 

same PLU by 

re-entry for 

correction. 



1 [ST] 



(1 to 99) 

2 [ST] 




[ST] 

3 [ST] 


|Price| [#] 





Address 6: Tax Status 



Address 7: Unit Price of Individual Split Package 

7 [ST] |Unit Price| [#] 


Address 8: Whole Package Quantity 

8 [ST] |Whole Package Quantity| [#] 














Address 13: Mix & Match Group No. 

13 [ST] |Mix & Match Group No.| [#] 

(1 to 255; 0 to reset) 

Address 14: Tare 2 Rate 

14 [ST] |Tare 2 Rate| [#] 

(0.01 to 99.99%; 0 to reset) 

Address 15: Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code 

15 [ST] |Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code| [#] 


[AT/TL] 



Operation procedure surrounded by this line is the same as the operation in Submode 4.


(QP model) 

Repeat for 

other PLUs. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

4-13 


All the terminals: After PLU daily and GT Resets (when the feature “PLU not be inquired” is selected) 

Master Terminal: Any time outside a sale (when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is selected) 

Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp Illuminated 


(See NOTE 1.) 


|PLU Code| 


[PLU] 

1 [ST] 



(1 to 99) 

2 [ST] 




[ST] 

3 [ST] 


|Price| [#] 



Repeat for 

any address 

within the 

same PLU by 

re-entry for 

correction. 



Address 6: VAT/Tax Status 



Address 7: Stock Quantity 

7 [ST] |Stock Quantity| [#] 

(0 to 9999.99) 

Address 8: Minimum Stock Quantity 

8 [ST] |Minimum Stock Quantity| [#] 

(0 to 9999.99) 













Address 13: 2nd Preset Price 

13 [ST] |2nd Preset Price| [#] 


Address 14: 3rd Preset Price 

14 [ST] |3rd Preset Price| [#] 


[AT/TL] 



Operation procedure surrounded by this line is the same as the operation in Submode 4.


Deletion 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

4-14 


The sales data of the required PLUs are zero and all terminals are outside a 

sale, programming, or report taking operations. (when the feature “PLU not to 

be inquired” is selected.) 

The sale data of the required PLUs are zero and any time outside a sale for 

Master. (when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is selected) 


63 [X] [ITEM CORR] | PLU code | [PLU] [ST] [AT/TL] 

Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted. 

NOTES: 1. For system with the feature “PLU not to be inquired” selected: 

By the [AT/TL] key depression, DLL-start command is sent to each Satellite Terminal or 

designated terminals, then DLL is executed. After DLL is completed, DLL-end command 

will be sent to the terminals. 

For system with the feature “PLU to be inquired” selected: 

By the [AT/TL] key depression, programmed data is sent to the Backup Master Terminal, 

resulting the backup data is updated. 

2. DLL is possible while a sales transaction is being performed in the Satellite Terminal. 

3. Up to 100 PLUs can be added/changed/deleted once.


4-15 

4.7 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing with DLL (Submode 72) 

4.7 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing with DLL (Submode 72) 

This submode is used to newly set or change preset price to required departments, and loads the price 

data into Satellite Terminals. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 



| New Preset Price | [DEPT] 

Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999 (Department Preset Code Key) 

(result: 0.00 to 999.999) 

72 [X] [AT/TL] 

| Dept. Code | [DP#] | New Preset Price | [#] 

Max. 2 digits; 1 to 99 Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999 

* (result: 0.00 to 999.999) 

Repeatable for other departments * For sequentially programming the department, 

the Dept Code specification can be skipped. 

NOTES: 1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, it sends a DLL-start 

command to the designated terminals. After DLL is completed, it sends DLL-end 

command to each terminal. 

2. When zero is entered as the New Preset Price value, the department is set with a zero 

price. When the new Preset Price entry is skipped and the [DEPT] or [#] is simply 

depressed, it will be an open-price department. 

3. A maximum of 99 departments price can be changed in one operation sequence of this 

submode. 

4.8 PLU Price Changing with DLL (Submode 73) 

This submode is used to change prices of PLUs existent in the PLU Table files, and into immediately 

load the data into Satellite Terminals. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

(US model) 

Any time outside a sale for Master or Satellite. 

(only when the feature “PLU not to be inquired” is selected) 


Barcode Scanning Can be skipped (for non-split Pricing type 

or when Whole Package Quantity is 1.) 

73 [X] | PLU code | [PLU] | New Whole Package Quantity | [ST] 


Repeatable from here for 

sequentially programming 

PLU codes. 

| New Preset Price | [#] [AT/TL] 


(result: 0.00 to 999.999) 


to make open-price PLU


(QP model) 


73 [X] | PLU code | [PLU] | Price Level | [ST] 


Repeatable from here for 

sequentially programming 

PLU codes. 

4-16 

4.8 PLU Price Setting Changing with DLL (Submode 73) 

| New Preset Price | [#] [AT/TL] 


(result: 0.00 to 999.999) 


to make open-price PLU 

NOTES: 1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, it sends a DLL-start 

command to the designated terminals. After DLL is completed, it sends a DLL-end 

command to each terminal. 

2. A maximum of 100 PLUs’ prices can be changed in one operation sequence of this 

submode. 

3. When zero is entered as the New Preset Price value, the PLU is set with a zero price. 

When the New Preset Price entry is skipped and the [#] is simply depressed, it will be 

an open-price PLU.



The programmed data can be read for verification purposes. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

4-17 


Any time outside a sale (Sign OFF required under Cashier Signing Method) 

Mode Lock: X or SET with IN-LINE Lamp Illuminated or extinguished. 

(Operable on any type of Terminal (Master, Backup Master, Satellites)) 

1 x x [AT/TL] 

Submode No. at programming 

69: Terminal Connection Table Setting 

70: In-line/LAN Transmission Information Setting 

77: In-line ID and LAN Network Setting 

79: RAM Allocation Setting 

NOTE: Verifications listed in the stand-alone level are also available on all the terminals of the in-line 

system.

5. RTR DECLARATION, TERMINAL DESIGNATION EO3-11103B 

5. RTR DECLARATION, TERMINAL DESIGNATION 

5.1 RTR (Register-to-Register) Declaration 

5- 1 

5.1 RTR (Register-to-Register) Declaration 

By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal, various in-line jobs (DLLs, Consolidated 

Read/Reset Report takings, etc.) can be performed. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

Depress [RTR] 


Mode Lock: SET, X, Z, or MGR 

NOTES: 1. While a PC job is under way (a command of ULL, DLL, or Read/Reset from the PC), 

this RTR Declaration is not possible. Similarly, while this RTR Declaration is on, no PC 

jobs are possible. 

2. While the RTR Declaration is on, no transaction entries in REG, MGR, or - mode are 

possible. 

3. While the RTR Declaration is on, no Backup Data Check is performed. 

4. While the RTR Declaration is on, the following are jobs to be allowed: 

• Programming Operations 

• DLL Operations (DLL to Satellite Terminals) 

• Consolidated Read/Reset Report takings 

• Manual Copying of Backup Data 

5. The [RTR] key can be programmed to require Manager Intervention in Key Status 

Programming (Submode 23). 

6. If the option “Auto Data Copying feature” is selected for Copying of Backup Data, the 

RTR Declaration is not possible while a backup data update process is under way. 

7. If the option “Compulsion of Data Sending to PC” is selected, the RTR Declaration is 

not possible until sending the reset data (the consolidation data) to PC is completed. 

5.2 RTR Declaration Cancel 

By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal when the RTR Declaration is on, the RTR 

Declaration ON status is canceled. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

Depress [RTR] 

When RTR Declaration is ON 

Mode Lock: SET, X, Z, or MGR 

NOTE: If the Backup Error Flag is ON (the standard error message is “PLEASE BACK UP”), it 

means that manual copying of Backup Data is required, and therefore the RTR Declaration 

Cancel is not accepted until copying is completed.

5. RTR DECLARATION, TERMINAL DESIGNATION EO3-11103B 

5.3 Terminal Designation 

5- 2 

5.3 Terminal Designation 

By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal, various in-line jobs (DLLs, Consolidated 

Read/Reset Report takings, etc.) can be performed. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 


Mode Lock: SET, X, or Z (depending on the in-line service operations to follow) 

RTR Declaration ON status (i.e., the IN-LINE Lamp should be illuminated) 

To be operated on the Master Terminal only. 

[#] | Store/Register No. | [#] [AT/TL] 

Enter the Register No. (Max. 6 digits) 

of the Terminal subject to the in-line 

Service operations to follow. 

Repeat for other terminals if more are subject 

To the in-line service operation. 

NOTE: The Terminal Designation once declared by the above operation will be canceled by 

changing the position of the Mode Lock, or by RTR Declaration Cancel, or by turning OFF 

and ON the power of the terminal. The designation is automatically canceled on completion 

of the operation to follow or when a new designation is operated. 

Example) To designate the following Terminal out of two 

Terminals in the system: 

Store/Register No. 333303 

(Terminal ID No. 3, IP Address 192.168.0.251) 

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET (if operated before DLLs) 

The RTR Declaration must be ON (i.e., the IN-LINE 

Lamp must be illuminated; if not, depress the [RTR] 

Key to declare RTR status). 

[#] 333303 [#] [AT/TL] 

(Issues a receipt, printing the Store/Register Nos. 

of the terminals designated in the above operation.) 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-31-2003 SUN #111101 

P00 

#03 #333303 192.168. 0.251 

0029 20:00TM

6.DLLs (Down Line Loadings) EO3-11103B 

6. DLLs (Down Line Loadings) 

6.1 DLLs 

6- 1 

6.1 DLLs 

The DLL operations will send and load the programmed data of the Master Terminal (the terminal file 

portion described in Chapter 6 in the Programming Manual for the stand-alone level) into the Satellite 

Terminals. Thus, in an in-line system, program data are mostly generated or changed on the Master 

Terminal, and the Satellite Terminals only wait for the data sent from the Master Terminal through DLL 

operations. All the DLLs in this chapter are operated on the Master Terminal only. 

The DLL operations are expected to be executed in the System Start-up Procedure, as well as in any 

necessary occasion when any additional data are programmed or any pre-programmed data are 

changed on the Master Terminal. 

The following are DLL operations, among which required ones may be chosen according to the 

requirements of data to be loaded for each occasion. 

Before going into DLL operations, please be certain that the Master Terminal and Satellite Terminals 

have gone through the respective programming requirements before DLLs. These requirements are 

listed in Chapter 3 (SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURE). 

When a DLL process has not normally ended, the Master Terminal will be in the condition of accepting 

a RETRY or INCOMPLETE ENDING (described in Chapter 12). On an INCOMPLETE ENDING, a 

receipt is issued with the unopened Register Nos printed. 

When a DLL is executed and there are any DLL-incomplete terminals, the Master Terminal will be in 

the condition of accepting a RETRY or INCOMPLETE ENDING. On an INCOMPLETE ENDING, a 

receipt is issued with the DLL-incomplete Register Nos printed. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

Master Terminal and the terminals subject to the DLL: 

Sign-OFF is not necessary required for the Cashier Code Entry type 

Satellite Terminals: Any position if the power is ON 

Master Terminal: Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated 

1. To execute a DLL operation, first enter “5”, then the Submode No., and finally depress the [AT/TL] 

key. 

5 X X [AT/TL] 

Submode No. at programming (add “0” on top to a 1 digit Submode No.) 

Always attach “5” on top 

NOTES: 1. “06” (for Date) is not available; both Time and Date will be DLLed by entering “05”. 

2. “18” (for Dealer System Options) is not available; Dealer System Option will be 

DLLed by entering “11”. 

3. “15” (for Customer File Code & Name) is not available; because it is the Center 

File. 

4. For the QP model, “24” (for PLU Stock) is available because it is not applicable to 

the Master-Satellite System.


2. For those data programmed with no Submode No., operate the following for DLLs: 

5 0 0 [AT/TL] 

“500” is fixed for DLLs of the following programmed contents: 

Percent Rate 

Selective Itemizer Rate 

Foreign Currency Rate 

HAUS BON Rate (QP model) 

Tax Table (US model) 

3. The following are provided as Entire Program DLLs: 

1) Entire Program DLL 1 

5 9 0 [AT/TL] 

Program Contents subject to DLL: 

All the programmed tables listed on the following pages except the RAM Allocation. 

6- 2 

6.1 DLLs 

NOTES: 1. When the PLU inquiry option has been selected, the DLL operation should not be 

performed for the PLU table. 

2. When the floating cashier feature has been selected, the DLL operation should not be 

performed for the cashier table. 

2) Entire Program DLL 2 

5 9 1 [AT/TL] 

Program Contents subject to DLL: 

All the programmed tables except the following items: 

SFKC 

System Option 

PLU Preset-code Key 

Function Key 

RAM Allocation 

In-line/LAN Transmission Information 

NOTES: 1. When the PLU inquiry option has been selected, the DLL operation should not be 

performed for the PLU table. 

2. When the floating cashier feature has been selected, the DLL operation should not be 

performed for the cashier table.


DLL Job List 

DLL Item Code Condition 

SFKC (Selective Function Key Code) 

Programming 

Store Name, Commercial Message, and 

Footer Logo Message Programming 

Cashier Code and Name Programming 502 

Department Table Programming 503 

6- 3 

Entire 

Program 

DLL 1 

576 After all Daily & GT Resets O 

Entire 

Program 

DLL 2 

501 Any time O O 

After All Cashier Daily & GT 

Resets O O 

After Department/PLU Daily & 

GT Resets O O 

PLU Table Programming 504 After PLU Daily & GT Resets O O 

Date and Time Setting or Adjustment 505 Any time O O 

Hourly Range Table Setting 507 After Hourly Resets O O 

Remarks 

The DLL is not executed to 

terminals with a different 

keyboard type. 

Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys 508 Any time O O 

Financial Report Item Name Programming 509 

After Financial Daily & GT 

Resets O O 

Print Line Item Name Programming 510 Any time O O 

System Option Programming 511 After Financial Daily Reset O 

Non-Taxable Amount Limit Setting 512 After Financial Daily Reset O O US model 

VAT or Add-on Tax Rate Setting 512 After Financial Daily Reset O O QP model 

Minor Group Name Programming 513 Any time O O 

Major Group Name Programming 514 Any time O O 

Display Upper-Row Message Programming 517 Any time O O 

Combination Report Table Programming 519 Any time O O 

Salesperson Code and Name Programming 520 Any time O O 

Credit Card Company ID Code Name 

Programming 


Endorsement (or France Cheque Print) 

Message Programming 


Key Status Programming 523 Any time O O 

Link-PLU Table Programming 525 Any time O O 

Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting 526 Any time O O 

PLU Preset-Code Key Setting 527 Any time O 

Report Item Print/Non-Print Setting 528 Any time O O 

PLU Group Name Programming 529 Any time O O 

Comment Message Programming 530 Any time O O US model 

Display Message Programming 531 Any time O O 

Error Message Programming 532 Any time O O 

Media Pick-Up Warning Setting 533 After Financial Daily Reset O O 

Function Key (Combination Key) Setting 534 Any time O 

Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting 535 Any time O O 

Special Rounding Process Setting, 1-digit 

type 536 Any time O O 

Special Rounding Process Setting, 2-digit 

type 537 Any time O O 

Drawer Warning Time Setting 538 Any time O O 

Read/Reset Report Name Programming 539 Any time O O 

6.1 DLLs 

Operable only when the “Nonfloating 

Cashier” feature is 

selected. (For Floating Cashier, 

the file is in the Center File and 

programmed on the Master 

only) 

Operable only when the feature 

“PLU not to be inquired” is 

selected. 

All addresses (Submodes 11 & 

18) 

Operable only when the feature 

“PLU not to be inquired” is 

selected. 

If preset code keys of SFKC 96 

need to be changed on an 

individual Satellite terminal, set 

them again in Submode 27 on 

the terminal. 

It is not loaded to terminals 

programmed with a keyboard of 

any key layout different from 

that of the master. 

QP model 

QP model


DLL Job List (Continued) 

DLL Item Code Condition 

6- 4 

Entire 

Program 

DLL 1 

Entire 

Program 

DLL 2 

PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge 

Amount Setting 540 Any time O O 

US model 

Age Limit Setting 541 Any time O O US model 

Foreign Currency Rounding Process 

Setting, 1-digit type 548 Any time 

O O 

Foreign Currency Rounding Process 

Setting, 2-digit type 549 Any time O O 

Barcode Individual Flag Type Designation 555 Any time O O US model 

Store ID Setting 556 Any time O O QP model 

EFT Key Status Programming 565 Any time O O US model 

EFT Information Setting 1 566 Any time O O US model 

PC Transmission Information Setting 568 Any time O O 

Terminal Connection Table Setting 569 Any time O O 

In-line/LAN Socket Programming 570 Any time 


%+ and %- Preset Rate Setting 

Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers 


Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting 500 Any time O O 

HAUS BON Discount Rate Setting QP model 

Tax Table Programming 

US model 

Entire Program DLL 1 590 After all Daily & GT Resets 

Entire Program DLL 2 591 After all Daily & GT Resets 

Remarks 

6.1 DLLs


6.2 Display Indications of DLL Operations 

6- 5 

6.2 Display Indications of DLL Operations 

The followings are displayed in the 16-digit dot windows, 10-digit 7-segment window, and IN-LINE 

Lamp of the Operator Display panel during a DLL execution. 

 

 

The IN-LINE Lamp flickers. 

DPT X 

6.3 Print Format of DLL Operations 

Master Terminal Receipt 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-31-2003 SUN #3001 

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ 

P5XX 

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ 

#111101 XXXX 

#222202 XXXX 

#999909 XXXX 

Number of ECRs unserviced 

0011 14:16TM 

Illuminated 

(( )) TL ST 

5xx = Submode No. of the 

specific DLL operation 

Un finished register No. and status 

?: No response 

BUSY: The terminal is busy 

Blank: Other statuses 

In-line Job No. 

Mode Indication 

Satellite Terminals Journal 

Time of receiving the DLL 

NOTES: 1. As for a system with the CVS spec. selected, DLL is unavailable when the Satellite 

Terminals perform sales data copy into the communication buffers. 

2. For the Satellite Terminals being received the DLL data, the item entry is prohibited. (HOLD 

status) 

Blink 

∗ P5XX 18:02TM ∗

7. IN-LINE REPORTS EO3-11103B 

7. IN-LINE REPORTS 

7- 1 

7. IN-LINE REPORTS 

As for In-line Read/Reset reports in the Master-Satellite System, refer to the MA-1595 Owner’s Manual 

(for Master-Satellite System).

8. INQUIRIES EO3-11103B 

8. INQUIRIES 

8- 1 

8.1 PLU Inquiries 

This chapter describes various inquiries made from each terminal to the Master Terminal and affect 

data (sales data updating). 

8.1 PLU Inquiries 

When the feature “PLUs to be inquired” is selected and a PLU is entered in a sale (entered manually or 

through a barcode) on each terminal, the terminal inquires the PLU to the Master Terminal. The 

inquired Master Terminal searches the PLU code in the PLU Main Table and the PLU Additional Table. 

When the PLU exists, the Master Terminal responds the price, name, and other required data to the 

inquiring terminal. 

When the applicable PLU code does not exist in the Master Terminal, the message “CODE ERROR” 

(standard program; programmable) is displayed on the inquiring terminal. 

PLU URGENT MAINTENANCE 

When the inquired PLU code does not exist in the Master Terminal, the PLU can be programmed into 

the Master Terminal (and the Backup Master Terminal) along with its sale entry on the terminal by 

entering the linked Department and the price. The PLU thus entered is temporarily programmed in the 

PLU Additional Table. 

AFFECT 

When a PLU entry is determined on a terminal, the terminal sends an AFFECT text to the Master 

Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal), and updates the sales data of the Master Terminal (and 

Backup Master Terminal). 

NOTE: When the PLU Urgent Maintenance is not possible resulting from the PLU Additional File is 

full, the error message “PROGRAM ERROR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed 

on the inquiring terminal. 

8.2 Customer File (Check Track) Inquiries 

When the feature “Customer File (Check Track)” (instead of PB Manual Entry) is selected and a PICK 

UP BALANCE (by [PICK UP BAL]) is entered on a terminal, the terminal inquires the entered 

Customer File Code to the Master Terminal. The inquired Master Terminal searches the Customer File 

Code in the Customer File Table. When the Customer File Code exists, the Master Terminal responds 

the name and the previous balance of the Customer File to the inquiring terminal. 

NEW CUSTOMER FILE INQUIRIES 

When a NEW CUSTOMER FILE (by [CODE OPEN] key) is entered on a terminal, the terminal inquires 

the new Customer File code entered to the Master Terminal. The Master Terminal confirms that the 

inquired Customer File code does not exist, then adds it to the Customer File table, and responds to 

the inquiring terminal that the code has been additionally set. (If a Backup Master is connected, the 

code inquiry to and additional setting in the Backup Master Terminal occur at the same time.) 

AFFECT 

When a Customer File entry is determined on a terminal, the terminal sends an AFFECT text to the 

Master Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal), and updates the sales data of the Master Terminal 

(and Backup Master Terminal).

8. INQUIRIES EO3-11103B 

8- 2 

8.3 Credit Card No. Inquiries to the Negative Check File (US model) 

NOTES: 

1. When the applicable file code does not exist on a Customer File Code inquiry (by [PICK UP BAL]) 

or when the applicable file code exists on a New Customer File Code inquiry (by [CODE OPEN]), 

the message “CODE ERROR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed on the inquiring 

terminal. 

2. When the addition of new customer file code is not possible resulting from the Customer File is full, 

the error message “PROGRAM ERROR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed on the 

inquiring terminal. 

8.3 Credit Card No. Inquiries to the Negative Check File (US model) 

When the “Negative Card Check” feature is selected by program option, each terminal inquires to the 

Master Terminal whether the entered Credit Card No. is acceptable or not. The Master Terminal, thus 

inquired, searches the Card No. in the Negative Card File. 

When the applicable Card No. exists in the Negative Card File, the Master Terminal responds to the 

inquiring terminal the response message “CALL MANAGER” (standard program; programmable) 

displayed in the Dot-display Windows with the Error Status Code (programmable) in the 7-segment 

Windows on the inquiring terminal to indicate that the Card No. is not acceptable. 

8.4 Cashier Occupy Inquiries 

When the “Floating Cashier” feature is selected and a Cashier Code is entered on a terminal, the 

terminal inquires the cashier code corresponding to cashier code entered to the Master Terminal. The 

Master Terminal searches the Cashier Table of the Cashier No. in the Cashier File. 

When the Cashier No. exists and its table is not occupied by any other terminal, the Master Terminal 

makes the cashier in the occupied status and sends the cashier table to the inquiring terminal. 

When the Cashier No. does not exist in the Master Terminal’s Cashier File, the Master Terminal 

responds the message “CODE ERROR” (standard program; programmable) to the inquiring terminal. 

When the Cashier Table is occupied by another terminal, the message “FILE BUSY” (standard 

program; programmable) is responded instead. 

AFFECT 

When a sale entry is determined (i.e. finalized) on a terminal, the terminal sends AFFECT text to the 

Master Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal) and updates the sales data (in the Cashier Table) of 

the Master Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal). 

CASHIER CANCEL INQUIRES (OCCUPY CANCEL) 

When a Sign-OFF is operated on a terminal, the terminal inquires a CASHIER CANCEL to the Master 

Terminal. The Master Terminal cancels the occupied status of the applicable cashier.

9. BACKUP DATA CONTROL EO3-11103B 

9. BACKUP DATA CONTROL 

9.1 Overview of Backup Function 

9- 1 

9.1 Overview of Backup Function 

By connecting a Backup Master Terminal (Terminal ID No. 02) to the Master-Satellite System, the 

Center File in the Master Terminal will be backed up. Thus, if the Master Terminal becomes down, the 

Backup Master can replace the Master function to continue operation. 

 

Table File Type of Data to be backed up 

Cashier Table 

Program Data & Sales Data 

(for Floating Cashier System only) 

PLU Table (Main) 

(only when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is 

selected (i.e. when the Center File is used)) 

Program Data & Sales Data 

PLU Addition Table 

(only when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is Program Data & Sales Data 


Customer File (Check Track) Table Program Data & Sales Data 

Link PLU Table 

(only when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is Program Data 


Negative Card Table (US model) Program Data 

PC Transmission Information Table Program Data 

NOTES: 1. The “Transaction Data Capture” (described in Chapter 10) will not be backed up. 

2. Neither “RAM Allocation (Submode 79)” nor “Terminal Connection Table (Submode 

69)” will be backed up because each terminal has the same data. 

9.2 Process at Changing Program Data 

1) At receiving DLL Data from PC: 

The Master Terminal, on receiving various center files from the PC, automatically performs backup 

of the program data and sales data to the Backup Master Terminal. 

PC 

[1] DLL Data 


[2] Backup Data 

[4] Response [3] Response 

Backup 


2) At programming operation on Master Terminal: 

When various center files are programmed on the Master Terminal (including Data Clear), the 

applicable Backup Error Flag is turned ON. At this moment, however, the backup data update 

process is not performed. (Refer to Sections “9.5. Backup Error Flag” and “9.6. Backup Data 

Update Process.”)


9.3 Sales Data Update Process 

9- 2 

9.3 Sales Data Update Process 

When sales data has been entered on a terminal, the terminal sends AFFECT data to the Master 

Terminal to update the sales data in the Center File. Then the terminal sends the same data to the 

Backup Master Terminal to update the Backup Data also. 


9.4 Backup Data Checking 

The Master Terminal sends a Version Request command to the Backup Master Terminal every certain 

period of time, and receives the Version information of the Backup Master Terminal. The Master 

Terminal checks matching between the Version information from the Backup Master and the Master 

Terminal’s own Center File. When an error is found, the Backup Error Flag is turned ON. (Refer to 

Sections “9.5. Backup Error Flag.”) 

NOTE: When the Master Terminal is in IN-LINE servicing status (i.e. with IN-LINE Lamp illuminated) 

or in PC-job status, no backup data checking is performed. 

9.5 Backup Error Flag 

[1] 

Backup 


[1] [2] 

[2] 

[1] 

Satellite 

[2] 

Satellite 

: Affect Data 

: Backup Data 

Updating Affect Data 

When a difference arises between the Master Terminal’s own data and the Backup Master Terminal’s 

Backup data, the Master Terminal turns ON the Backup Error Flag of the file in which the difference is 

found. 

The following are the eight different timings to turn ON the Backup Error Flag: 

(1) When the Center File program data has been changed on the Master Terminal. 

(2) When a Version difference has arisen in Backup Data checking. 

(3) When a backup job has failed after receiving a center file DLL from the PC. 

(4) When backup data updating has failed after resetting the center file. 

(5) When backup data updating has failed after reading any report with the Center File Read 

Counter. (QP model) 

(6) When a Data Clear of the Master Terminal has been operated. 

(7) When a Backup Master Terminal has been added by the Terminal Connection Table Setting 

(Submode 69). 

(8) Mergence of backup data is not correctly performed by PLU merge operation (when the 

feature “PLU to be inquired” is selected). 

While the Backup Error Flag is ON, the following actions will be made: 

(1) Every time a long receipt is issued from the Master Terminal, a short buzzer tone is 

generated to warn the operator of the Backup Error occurrence. 

(2) On operating RTR Declaration Cancel, a “Manual Data Copy Compulsory” error occurs, 

displaying “PLEASE BACK UP” (standard program; programmable). In this case, the RTR 

Declaration Cancel will be accepted only after a manual copying operating.


9- 3 

9.6 Backup Data Update Process 

The following are the two different timings to turn OFF the Backup Error Flag: 

(1) When the backup data has been updated correctly by the backup data updating process. 

(2) When the Backup Master (ID=2) has been deleted from the connection in the Terminal 

Connection Table. 

9.6 Backup Data Update Process 

The process for a Backup Error occurrence is determined by System Option, Address 46 - Bit 1 status 

selection, as described below. Even when status “Auto Data Copy” is selected, manual data copying is 

possible as well. 

Auto Data Copy (Address 46 - Bit 1 SET): 

When the Backup Error Flag turns ON, the Master Terminal automatically sends to the 

Backup Master Terminal the file whose version matching is found to be different, to perform 

a backup data update process. 

Manual Data Copy (Address 46 - Bit 1 RESET): 

By the operator’s manual operation, updating of the backup data is performed. (Refer to 

“MANUAL COPY OF BACKUP DATA” in “12. OTHER IN-LINE OPERATIONS.”) 

NOTE: While the Master Terminal is in in-line service (i.e. with IN-LINE Lamp illuminated), no 

backup data update processes are performed. (If the Backup Error Flag turns ON during an 

in-line service, a Manual Data Copy operation will be compulsory on canceling the RTR 

Declaration.)

10. TRANSACTION DATA CAPTURE EO3-11103B 

10. TRANSACTION DATA CAPTURE 

10- 1 

10.1 Transaction Data Control 

The Transaction Data Capture function is possible when the feature of “PC Connected” and “With 

Transaction Data Capture Function” are both selected in System Option (SET status for Address 47, 

Bit 5) and when the Expansion Memory has been installed into the Master Terminal. This function 

enables to store details of sale entries made on each terminal into the Master Terminal as transaction 

data, and to transfer the data by request of the PC. 

10.1 Transaction Data Control 

10.1.1 Transaction Data Buffering 

Each terminal sends the transaction data (data of a sale finalized) to the Master Terminal in the 

following cases. 

Each transaction is finalized. 

Transaction buffer becomes full. 

Cashier key is changed to another during the Cashier Interrupt operation. (QP model) 

The Master Terminal, on receiving transaction data, stores the transaction data in the Transaction Data 

Buffer. 

The Transaction Data is to be controlled usually by two buffers. One is for buffering transaction data, 

and the other is used for PC’s data collection. When the first buffer becomes full or requested by PC, it 

is released to the PC and buffering is switched to the other one. 

The capacity of the Transaction Data Buffer is specified in RAM ALLOCATION SETTING (Submode 

79). The specified capacity is the total value of the two buffers described above. By performing a 

TABLE CLEAR (Submode 91), the Transaction Buffer of the Master Terminal will be forcibly cleared. 

10.1.2 Transaction Data Collection 

By request of the PC, the transaction data stored in the Master Terminal is sent to the PC. For a 

Transaction Data Request command from the PC, the Master Terminal will send the transaction data in 

the buffer that has been full. If neither buffers are full, the transaction data in the buffer that is now 

functioning for transaction data buffering will be sent to the PC. Thus for one Transaction Data 

Request command, the data stored in one buffer will be collected. 

10.1.3 Process for Transaction Buffer Full 

The Master Terminal checks the vacant capacity of the Transaction Data Buffer on receiving 

transaction data from each terminal. When the received transaction data cannot be stored in the buffer, 

the Master Terminal sends the response to indicate the buffer-full condition to the terminal. (In this 

system, no warning will be made on the remaining capacity of the Transaction Data Buffer.) On 

receiving this response, the terminal prints on its journal that the transaction data has not been sent. 

10.1.4 Process for Transaction Data Sending Failure 

When the transaction data cannot be sent to the Master Terminal due to some error, the message “IRC 

CONNECT ERR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed on the terminal and operation is 

stopped.

11. TRANSMISSION ERROR EO3-11103B 

11. TRANSMISSION ERROR 

11- 1 

11.1 Cause of Error 

When a terminal makes an inquiry but a communication error occurs for some reason and the inquiry 

to the other station is not possible, the message “IRC CONNECT ERR” (standard program; 

programmable) is displayed on that terminal and operation is stopped. 

When the Master Terminal cannot access the inquiring file because the Master Terminal is receiving 

DLL data, the backup data is being updated between the Master and the Backup Master terminals, etc., 

the message “MASTER IS BUSY” (standard program; programmable) is displayed and operation is 

stopped. 

11.1 Cause of Error 

11.1.1 “IRC CONNECT ERR” 

a) Communication with the other station is not possible due to a connection error (cable cut, Master 

Terminal’s Power-OFF, etc.). 

b) Communication was made, but due to a text error, the other station cannot recognize it correctly. 

11.1.2 “MASTER IS BUSY” 

Cannot access the inquiring file due to the following causes: 

a) The Master Terminal is receiving DLL data from the PC. 

b) Programming operations are under way on the Master Terminal. 

c) Backup data updating process is under way. 

d) Read/Reset Report taking operation is under way on the Master Terminal. 

e) ULL operations are under way on the Master Terminal. 

f) Copy of the relevant table into the communication buffer area is under way on the Master Terminal. 

(Applicable to a system with the CVS spec. selected) (US model) 

11.2 Error Display 

IRC CONNECT ERR 

< 16-digit Dot Windows > 

I R C C O N N E C T E R 0 1 

MASTER IS BUSY 


M A S T E R I S B U S Y 

Terminal ID of the 

other station 

NOTE: The display contents in the 7-segment portion remains the same as before the error 

occurrence. The error status will be canceled by the [C] key.

11. TRANSMISSION ERROR EO3-11103B 

11.3 Error Cancelling Process 

There are two error-cancelling processes in accordance with the inquiring job contents. 

11- 2 

11.3 Error Canceling Process 

Type 1: Depressing the [C] key will return to the statuses before the inquiry. 

Applicable Jobs: 

PLU Inquiry 

PLU Urgent Maintenance 

Customer File (Check Track) Inquiry 

Credit Card No. Inquiry to the Negative Check File (US model) 

Cashier Occupy Inquiry 

Type 2: Depressing the [C] key will cancel the error status, displays the following message, and waits 

for RETRY or CANCEL. 

Applicable Jobs: 

PLU Affect 

Customer File Affect 

Cashier Affect 

Cashier Cancel Inquiry 

Transaction Data Send 

R E T R Y ? 


For Retry ................... [AT/TL] (Performs re-sending to the other station.) 

For Cancel ................ [X] → [ST] (Stops the inquiry, printing on journal “ ** X → ST ** “) 

NOTE: The “Cancel” in Type 2 above is for only the case the other station is in trouble which cannot 

be recovered by a Retry operation.

12. OTHER IN-LINE OPERATIONS EO3-11103B 

12. OTHER IN-LINE OPERATIONS 

12- 1 

12.1 Time Out 

The following are other operations relating to in-line service operations but not described in the 

preceding chapters. 


Page 

TIME OUT ................................................................................................................. 12- 1 

SUSPENDING ........................................................................................................... 12- 2 

RETRY ...................................................................................................................... 12- 2 

INCOMPLETE ENDING............................................................................................. 12- 3 

CANCEL .................................................................................................................... 12- 3 

TERMINAL OPEN CHECK ........................................................................................ 12- 4 

TERMINAL CONDITION CHECK .............................................................................. 12- 4 

ENFORCED CLEAR OF HOLD CONDITION (on Individual Terminals)..................... 12- 5 

MANUAL COPY OF BACKUP DATA......................................................................... 12- 5 

READ OF INFORMATION ALREADY COPIED IN COMMUNICATION BUFFER 

(Only for a system with the CVS spec. selected) (US model)..................................... 12- 6 

ENFORCED CLEAR OF COMMUNICATION BUFFER 

(Only for a system with the CVS spec. selected) (US model)..................................... 12- 6 

12.1 Time Out 

A Time-Out condition arises when the Master Terminal is making an in-line service operation, such as 

X/Z report collection, DLL, etc. to the Satellite Terminals. The service timer is provided for servicing 

each of the Satellite Terminals, thus on exceeding the time limit, a Time-Out condition will occur. In this 

case, a “RETRY”, “SUSPENDING”, “INCOMPLETE ENDING”, or “CANCEL” operation will be accepted. 

ex. 1) In a system with a Master Terminal and 3 Satellite Terminals: 


Terminal 

Busy S1 Busy 

S2 S3 

When a report collection is executed on the Master Terminal, a series of data collections from each 

terminal (S1 to S3) will be performed, but services for S1 and S2 will be skipped due to their “busy” 

conditions. Thereafter, services will again be attempted to S1 and S2. As a limit of 30 seconds is 

provided for servicing each terminal, the total service time in this case will be 30 sec. x 2 units = 60 sec. 

If data collection is successfully done from S1 within this time limit, servicing S2 follows for the rest of 

the time, and on reaching the time limit, the Time-Out condition arises, displaying on the Master 

Terminal the number of not-yet collected terminal(s) and the Store/Register No. of the last serviced 

terminal. On this stage, the operator may only go on to “SUSPENDING” (to wait for a while until S2 

clears the “busy” condition), or to “RETRY” (to execute collection service to S2 again, expecting that 

S2 has already cleared the “busy” condition), or to “INCOMPLETE ENDING” (to abandon the service to 

S2 and end with collection of the data of so-far collected terminals only), or to “CANCEL” operation. If 

“RETRY” is operated, the service time now is 30 seconds because only one terminal remains 

uncollected.

12. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE EO3-11103B 

ex. 2) 


Terminal 

12- 2 

12.2 Suspending 

In this case, S2 is in a “No response” condition and S1 is in a “busy” condition. As only one terminal is 

responding with some kind of status, a time out limit of 30 seconds is given (the “No response” status 

is not subject to the service timer). However, if S2 turns into a “Power ON” condition, it will also be 

subject to the service timer. 

12.2 Suspending 

This is to be operated for the purpose of suspending an in-line service being executed, when any 

terminals remain unserviced, and of going on to a “RETRY”, “INCOMPLETE ENDING”, or “CANCEL” 

operation as the next step. 

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed) 

Depress [ITEM CORR] until the key-in tone is generated. 

DESCRIPTION: 

The SUSPENDING operation is allowed any time during an in-line service procedure. 

If suspending by the [ITEM CORR] key is accepted, the Master Terminal’s display indicates the 

number of unserviced terminals. (SUSPENDING of a service execution of one terminal is not 

possible). Now a “RETRY” or “INCOMPLETE ENDING” operation can be selected as the next 

step. (When no key-in operations are made in about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING operation, 

a RETRY process will automatically be executed.) 

12.3 Retry 

S1 S2 S3 

Busy No response 

(Power OFF) 

This is to be operated for the purpose of re-attempting the in-line service that has been stopped due to 

“TIME OUT” or that has just been suspended by “SUSPENDING” operation. 


Depress [AT/TL]. 

DESCRIPTION: 

The in-line service will again be attempted to the unserviced terminals. This operation is possible 

any number of times after a “TIME OUT” condition or a “SUSPENDING” operation as long as any 

terminals remain unserviced. (When no key-in operations are made in about 10 seconds after a 

SUSPENDING operation, a RETRY process will automatically be executed.)


12.4 Incomplete Ending 

12- 3 

12.4 Incomplete Ending 

This is to be operated to abandon services to unserviced terminals, and ends the in-line service with 

the services to service-completed terminals only. 


Depress [NS]. 

DESCRIPTION: 

If an in-line service being executed does not seem to end normally due perhaps to some abnormal 

status of any Satellite Terminals after “TIME OUT”, “SUSPENDING”, and/or “RETRY” operations, 

the [NS] key can be depressed to end the in-line service with only the service-completed terminals 

serviced and the unserviced terminals remaining unserviced. In case of In-line X or Z Report 

Collection sequences, reports of only the service-completed terminals will be issued. 

As part of the print out, the Store/Register No. of the terminal and its status will be printed. 

12.5 Cancel 

Status Print Format 

No nnnnnn ? 

Store/Register No. Status Symbol 

?: No response (power off, etc.) 

BUSY: The terminal is busy (during a sale, etc.) 

Blank: Other statuses 

This can be operated when a SUSPENDING condition arises due to a TIME OUT or a SUSPENDING 

operation. 

The entire in-line service being performed is cancelled. This operation is effective to in-line read report 

operations but not to any in-line reset report operations. 

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Mode Lock: X) 

Depress [x] (or [@/FOR]). 

DESCRIPTION: 

The CANCEL symbol is printed as in the following. 

CANCEL Print Format 

================================


12.6 Terminal Open Check 

12- 4 

12.6 Terminal Open Check 

This operation sends a dummy text to those terminals set in the TERMINAL CONNECTION TABLE 

(Submode 69), and prints out the Register Nos. of the disconnected terminals (i.e. terminals not 

responding). 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

Any time outside a sale (operable on Master Terminal) 

Mode Lock: X and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated 

80 [AT/TL] 

Master Terminal Receipt Print 

When the check result is normal: When any error status is found: 

Prints the Report Name only. Prints the Register Nos. of the terminals not 

connected properly, as well as the Report Name. 

12.7 Terminal Condition Check 

This operation checks the condition of the designated terminals, and prints out the status responded 

from the terminals. 

81 [AT/TL] 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-31-2003 SUN #111101 

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ 

NOT_CONNECT 

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

0013 12:18TM 


Mode Lock: X and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated 

Master Terminal Receipt Print 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-31-2003 SUN #111101 

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ 

T/M_CHECK 

#111101 OK 

#333303 OK 

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ 

0018 12:22TM 



PHONE: 87-6437 



08-31-2003 SUN #111101 

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ 

NOT_CONNECT 

#333303 

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ 

0016 12:20TM 

Status Symbol 

OK: The terminal condition is normal. 

?: No response (power-OFF, etc.) 

BUSY: The terminal is busy 

(during a sale, etc.). 

Blank: Other statuses


12- 5 

12.8 Enforced Clear of Hold Condition (on Individual Terminals) 

12.8 Enforced Clear of Hold Condition (on Individual Terminals) 

When a Master job execution is under way (DLL, Consolidated Read/Reset, etc.), the Master Terminal 

or the PC suddenly becomes down, accordingly the connected terminals turns into HOLD condition, 

and the HOLD condition cannot be cleared. In such cases, this operation is useful. (It is effective to the 

HOLD condition of the Master Terminal caused by a PC-start operation.) 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

9999 [AT/TL] 

Any terminal in HOLD condition 

Mode Lock: Z 

NOTES: 1. When the Master Terminal’s HOLD condition is cleared, the PC job-ON status that is 

controlled in the Master Terminal is also cleared. After clearing the HOLD condition of 

the Master Terminal, various in-line jobs started by the Master Terminal will be accepted 

(in case the PC is down). 

2. If the PC or the Master Terminal becomes down during a DLL execution, the program 

data by the DLL execution may not be set correctly. Therefore, perform programming or 

DLL again after clearing the HOLD condition of each terminal. 

3. After this HOLD clear operation, the IN-LINE Lamp will be extinguished. 

12.9 Manual Copy of Backup Data 

While the backup error message “PLEASE BACK UP” (standard program; programmable) is displayed, 

the following operation will enforce the Master Terminal to send program data and sales data to the 

Backup Master Terminal to update the backup data. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

900 [AT/TL] 


Mode Lock: Z and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated 

NOTES: 1. While the backup data is being updated, any inquiry from each terminal may result in 

displaying the message “MASTER IS BUSY.” Therefore, cancel the error status by the 

[C] key, then wait for the Master Terminal job to be completed, and re-execute it. 

2. Only the program data and sales data subject to the backup error occurrence will be 

sent. 

3. Even if the feature “Auto Copy of Backup Data” is selected, this manual copying 

operation will be possible.


12.10 Read of Information Already Copied in Communication Buffer (US model) 

12.10 Read of Information Already Copied in Communication Buffer 

(US model) (Only for a system with the CVS spec. selected) 

This operation issues report names of which sales data have been already copied in the 

communication buffer. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

96 [AT/TL] 


Mode Lock: X 

NOTES: 1. Type of report which sales data has been copied in the communication buffer (Daily/GT 

Read or Reset) is output from the ECR printer. 

2. For each Read/Reset report, only its transaction name is printed. Those contents are 

not printed. 

3. Information is read from the terminal in which data copying has been performed. 

12.11 Enforced Clear of Communication Buffer (US model) 

(Only for a system with the CVS spec. selected) 

The memory is copied in the communication buffer by Reservation or Report Issue job. 

The copied contents and the Reservation job can be cleared here. This operation should be performed 

only when malfunction of PC or Master Terminal occurs. When RESET status (Rewriting Prohibited) 

has been selected for “Data protection in communication buffer” (Address 46, Bit 7 of System Option), 

this operation is also used for forcibly clearing all the buffer data. 

CONDITION 

OPERATION 

9998 [AT/TL] 


Mode Lock: Z 

12- 6

TEC Ma-1595 program manual - 4S Business Systems Inc.

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?